•IKKIifY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY Of 
 CALIFORNIA ^ 
 
Rev. MOSES DICKSON, 
 Founder of the International Order of Twelve. 
 
MANUAL 
 
 OF THE 
 
 IntePnational Or'dei' of Twelve 
 
 OF 
 
 Kniflits and MMm i Talior 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 GENERAL LAWS, REGULATIONS, CER- 
 EMONIES, DRILL, 
 
 AND A 
 
 TABORIAN LEXICON, 
 
 Br 
 
 Rev. MOSES DICKSON. 
 
 ST. LOUIS, MO,: 
 
 A. R. FLEMING & CO., PRINTERS, 522 N. Third Street. 
 1891. 
 

 LOAN STACK 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1891, by 
 
 MOSES DICKSON, 
 In the olllce of tlie Librarian of Congress, at Wasliington. 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 Orders, societies and governments were insti- 
 tuted for the purpose of making a united effort in 
 a given direction. Wiiat one man cannot accom- 
 plish, many men united can. Hence great enter- 
 prises for the well-being of mankind are carried 
 foward by companies. Governments are formed 
 by uniting a number of people under one form or 
 code of laws. Societies are or£:anizations of a 
 number of persons to accomplish a certain object, 
 or to obtain a desired end. Man was made a social 
 being; he must have society, or the company of a 
 fellow-being, or he will drift into barbarism and 
 brutality. Man is an intelligent being. Civiliza- 
 tion, art, science, and architecture, and govern- 
 ment, must come only from an united effort. 
 Therefore, the members of the International Order 
 of Twelve have formed one band, united by the 
 strongest ties of friendship, and bound together by 
 solemn obligations, and established on a firm basis, 
 for the purpose of making a united and effective 
 effort in aiding each member in sickness or dis- 
 tress, to protect and defend each other, to aid and 
 help the widows and orphans of members that died 
 in good standing, to inculcate true morality, that 
 the members of the International Order of Twelve 
 may be an example to the masses of mankind. 
 
 »59 
 
It 18 the highest and bounden duty of every 
 member of the Knights' and Daughters of Tabor 
 to individually and collectively help to spread and 
 build up the Christian religion. The Order of 
 Twelve is non-sectarian — all members of the Order 
 are free to make their choice of any Evangelical 
 Church. The members of this Order are reminded 
 that education and a cultivated mind will open the 
 way to a useful and respected life. We are ad- 
 monished to use every honorable method to ad- 
 vance the cause of education. The members of the 
 International Order of Twelve are advised to 
 acquire real estate — this makes a man or woman 
 a substantial and reliable citizen. Avoid intem- 
 perance ; cultivate true manhood ; eschew immoral 
 and degraded people. Let your bearing and de- 
 portment be such that will show you to be a lady 
 or a gentleman. Live an exemplary life, and you 
 will die respected. Knights and Daughters of 
 Tabor, it is in your power to make the Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve a real and lasting benefit 
 to mankind. 
 
THE FOUNDER AND FATHER. 
 
 **Rev. Moses Dickson was born in the City of Cin- 
 cinnati, Ohio, April 5th, 1824. His parents, Robert 
 and Hannah Dickson, were natives of Virginia. 
 They moved to Ohio just three months before the 
 subject of this sketch was born. Mr. Dickson's 
 father died a. d. 1832; his mother departed this 
 life A. D. 1838. She was truly a Christian mother, 
 and became a member of the first A. M. E. Church 
 that was organized in Cincinnati. Her children 
 were all christened by Elder Wm. Paul Quinn, a 
 number of years before he was made a bishop. 
 
 *'Mr. Dickson had five sisters and three brothers — 
 all have passed away — and he has not a relative 
 living at this date, A. d. 1891. He learned the 
 barber's profession with the well-known William 
 Darnes. While learning the tonsorial art, he 
 attended school, and mastered all the branches of 
 study that were taught in that early day. At the 
 age of sixteen he felt a desire to see the South. 
 He embarked on a steamboat, and traveled for 
 three years, on various boats, upon the different 
 southern rivers and bayous. 
 
 **In these travels he saw slavery in all its horrors; 
 he witnessed such scenes of monstrous cruelty as 
 caused his African blood to boil with suppressed 
 indignation at the sight of the outrageous suffering 
 
 7 
 
8 
 
 of his people. What he saw in these three years 
 made a lasting impression on his heart, and he be- 
 came a life-foe to the slave-owner, the slave-driver 
 and the slave-trader. In his travels he made the 
 acquaintance of a few true and trusty young men, 
 who were ready to enter into any plan that would 
 assure freedom to the African race. These men 
 knew that the magnitude of the work would re- 
 quire time, courage and patience to make a success 
 of any plan they might adopt. They resolved to 
 take two years to study out a plan, and meet in the 
 City of St. Louis, Mo., the second Tuesday in the 
 month of August, 1846, to prepare for business. 
 
 **Mr. Dickson embarked on board of the steamer 
 <Oronoco,' at New Orleans, in the month of May, 
 1844,' and made the trip to St. Louis, remaining in 
 that city during the summer. For two years he 
 traveled through Iowa, Illinois and Wisconsin. 
 August, 1846, he was in the City of St. Louis, pre- 
 paring to meet his young friends. He had in the 
 meantime prepared a plan to be submitted to them. 
 On the second Tuesday in August, as per agree- 
 ment, twelve men assembled in the second story of 
 an old brick house, on the southeast corner of 
 Green and Seventh streets. (The name of Green 
 St. has since been changed to Lucas Ave. ) They 
 were just the kind of men to carry to success the 
 spcret and great work of obtaining liberty for the 
 bondsmen. Mr. Dickson read his plan for operat- 
 ing, and, after a very careful discussion of all its 
 pails, it was adopted. Organizations were secretly 
 to be made in the Southern States. None but re- 
 liable, fearless men were to be enrolled. The 
 
organizers were to carefully pick the men that were 
 courageous, patient, temperate, and possessed of 
 sound common sense. This was what was required 
 in every man that was enrolled. The oath that 
 bound them together was so binding that it could 
 not be broken. One feature of it was : 'I can die, 
 but I cannot reveal the name of any member until 
 the slaves are free.' This oath never was broken. • 
 All the matter pertaining to the business was 
 finished, and each man understood his part. Mr. 
 Dickson was elected Chief ; he was to remain North 
 and watch events, and keep the members posted. 
 Ten years was the time fixed on to open battle for 
 freedom. 
 
 *'It will not be amiss now to give the names of the 
 men who, like the Twelve Apostles, commenced 
 the great w^ork for Liberty: John Patton and 
 Henry Wright, in South Carolina ; James Bedford 
 and Silus W. Green, in Mississippi ; Irvin Hodges, 
 in Alabama; Peter Coleman and Willis Owens, in 
 Virginia; James Orr, in Louisiana; Miles Graves, 
 in North Carolina ; Henry Simpson, in Georgia; 
 Lewis Williams, in Tennessee, and Moses Dickson, 
 their Chief. These men, with their aides, formed 
 organizations in all the Slave States, except Mis- 
 souri and Texas. Silently, like the falling of Autumn 
 leaves, the organizations multiplied, until, in 
 1856, the army of true and trusty men numbered 
 forty-seven thousand, two hundred and forty 
 Knights of Liberty. 
 
 *'Mr. Dickson will give, in another place, details 
 of this wonderful organization, its secrecy, its mode 
 of operation, its drill, the many Incidents in its 
 
10 
 
 history, and why the battle was not opened in 
 1856. 
 
 **One incident I must name: The first organiza- 
 tion that was created, under the distinct name of 
 the Order of Twelve, was organized in the City of 
 Galena, Ills., by Mr. Dickson, at the residence of 
 Alfred H. Richardson, in August, 1855. The se- 
 cret work of the Knights of Liberty was not im- 
 parted to this Society. 
 
 **Mr. Dickson was married to Mrs. Mary Elisabeth 
 Peters, in Galena, Ills., on the 5th day of October, 
 1848. She has been his companion in jovs and 
 sorrows for forty-two years (up to 1891, when she 
 departed this life). She. was an exemplary Chris- 
 tian, a true and loving wife, a sound and able coun- 
 selor. She was loved by all that were acquainted 
 with her throughout the South and West. She 
 was known by the dear name of Mother Dickson. 
 
 **Mr, Dickson has one child, Mrs. Mamie Augusta 
 Hay den, the widow of Harry Halyard Hay- 
 den. They have one child, Zennie Arvesta. 
 This child was adopted by the Order of Twelve at 
 their National Grand Session, held in Louisville, 
 Ky., in 1885. Her title is Princess of the Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor. Mr. Dickson fixed his 
 headquarters in St. Louis, Mo., in 1859, that he 
 might be near the Knights of Liberty to guide their 
 affairs. After the war was over, the work begun 
 by the twelve — seemingly his work for his people 
 — was finished, but he could not rest ; schools for 
 Colored children must be opened. He, with a num- 
 ber of other stalwart men, worked Avith energy in 
 the lobby at Jefferson City, Mo. At length, under 
 
11 
 
 the administration of Governor McClurg, the pres- 
 ent school laws for Missouri were adopted. Mr. 
 Dickson's next move was to procure Colored teach- 
 ers for Colored Schools. It was a hard fight, but 
 the move was a success. Now, throughout the 
 State of Missouri, Colored schools have Colored 
 teachers. 
 
 "Mr. Dickson took an active part in the founding 
 of 'Lincoln Institute,' at Jefferson City, Mo. He 
 was Trustee and Vice-President of the Board for 
 several years, and remained in the Board until the 
 success of the Institute was a fixed fact. Mr. 
 Dickson is a member of the Republican Party, and 
 he remains true to it. He was a Delegate to every 
 State Convention of Missouri, from 1864 to 1878, 
 and stumped the State several times in the interests 
 of the party ; he was Elector-at-Large on the Grant 
 ticket in 1872, and did good work. Mr. Dickson 
 was President of the Refugee Relief Board, in St. 
 Louis, Mo., in 1878. This Board received and 
 cared for about sixteen thousand men, women and 
 children, who were fleeing from Southern oppres- 
 sion. The whole North and East was stirred up, 
 and thousands of dollars were received by the 
 Board from the East and North to aid the fugitives. 
 This money, with hundreds of large boxes of cloth- 
 ing and provisions that were received, enabled the 
 President and the Board to send the refugees to 
 their destinations comfortably clothed and with 
 ample provisions to last them for several months. 
 Kansas, Nebraska, Colorado, and other Northern 
 States received these fugitives from oppression. 
 Mr. Dickson has not lost sight of them in the 
 
12 
 
 several States wherein they have settled. He finds 
 them good citizens and doing well. Kansas re- 
 ceived over ten thousand of them. 
 
 *'Mr, Dickson was converted and joined the A. M. 
 E. Church in 1866, and was licensed to preach in 
 1867. He has held large and small charges for a 
 number of years, and has had invariably good suc- 
 cess in the management of churches. He is known 
 as a church-builder, a debt-payer and a revivalist. 
 Thirteen hundred and ninety persons have been 
 converted in the different charges during his pas- 
 torship. Mother Dickson has been a great help to 
 him in his pastoral work. 
 
 "The International Order of Twelve, of Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor, is an evidence of Mr. 
 Dickson's skill as an organizer. The Society that 
 was organized by him in Galena, in 1855, dis- 
 banded in 1859. The Knights of Liberty had be- 
 come extinct after the War of the Rebellion. At 
 the close of that war, not a man, so far as known, 
 of that great number, returned from the battle-field, 
 except Mr. Dickson ; he, as an independent fighter, 
 was in thirteen hard-fought battles, and returned 
 home in 1864, not having received a scratch from 
 the enemy's bullets. 
 
 '*In 1865, all that was found of the Galena So- 
 ciety were seven ; their names are in the Manual. 
 In 1868 Mr. Dickson decided to create a Beneficial 
 Order to perpetuate the memory of the twelve that 
 organized the Knights of Liberty. After three 
 years of preparation, in 1871, he was ready to com- 
 mence the work. He organized a Temple and 
 Tabernacle in Independence, Mo.; a Tabernacle in 
 
13 
 
 Kansas City, Mo. ; a Temple and Tabernacle in Lex- 
 ington, Mo. With these five organizations a Con- 
 vention was called to meet in Independence, Mo., 
 the second Tuesday in August, 1872. This Con- 
 vention organized the National Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle of the Order of Twelve, of Knights and 
 Daughters of Tabor. The Child of Destiny was 
 born and named. Mr. Dickson, with his usual 
 energy and perseverance, pushed the work of or- 
 ganizing, aided by a number of Knights and 
 Daughters. 
 
 "The Order grew rapidly, spreading from State to 
 State, gathering strength in its onward march. Mr. 
 Dickson did not spare time nor money ; he used all 
 the means that were at his command to build a last- 
 ing Beneficial Order. Within eighteen years this 
 Order has taken its place and rank with the great- 
 est Colored organizations of the world. It has had 
 strong opposition at every step put forward ; but, 
 ^forward' was the motto. The father and founder 
 has lived to see his work firmly fixed on a solid basis, 
 going onward, gaining strength daily, and a benefit 
 to thousands. This Order meets the necessities and 
 wants of the Colored people. It encourages Chris- 
 tianity, education, morality and temperance; it 
 teaches the art of governing, self-reliance and true 
 manhood and womanhood. It recommends to its 
 members the getting of homes and the acquiring of 
 wealth. It teaches the greatness, goodness and 
 mercy of God, and man's responsibility to the Su- 
 preme Being. Tabor. 
 
 Dec. 1st, 1890." 
 
u 
 
 Extract of the I. C. G. M.'s Message to the 
 Triennial Grand Session, held in St. Louis, Mo., 
 August, A. D. 1890: 
 
 A Change of Time. 
 **We have been much perplexed and bothered in 
 explaining the two dates of the original organiza- 
 tion. Our public speakers are hampered when they 
 come to this part of our history. The organization 
 of the Order of Twelve that was made in Galena, 
 Ills. , in 1855, was made to perpetuate the names of the 
 Twelve Knights of Tabor, who were so successful 
 in enrolling the 47,000 Knights of Liberty, for the 
 purpose of aiding in breaking the bonds of our 
 slavery. This secret organization of the Knights of 
 Liberty was one of the strongest and most secret of 
 any organization ever formed by men. The question 
 of giving the history of this organization to the 
 world is one that has had my most earnest thoughts 
 for several years. There are so many families of 
 the old men of renown, both in this country and 
 England, that are now living and hold high posi- 
 tions, that they might be injured by revealing the 
 secrets of the Knights of Liberty and giving the 
 names of their fathers. I had almost decided to 
 let this part of our history rest in the grave, more 
 especially since God found other means to give us 
 our manhood and freedom ; but the names of the 
 twelve men who were instruments in God's hands 
 in preparing and organizing 47,000 men of un- 
 doubted courage to do battle for our freedom shall 
 be perpetuated. God fixed the time, and every man 
 was at his post. In their death struggles they gave 
 to us the boon of liberty. Precious be their memory. 
 
15 
 
 <*The organization that was made in Galena, Ills., 
 was no part of the Knights of Liberty. They were 
 simply organized to perpetuate the name, **Order of 
 Twelve, of Knights of Tabor." I made the organi- 
 zation in the residence of Alfred H. Richardson. 
 The names of the Knights that were known to be 
 alive in 1872 were given in the old Manual, and are : 
 A. H. Richardson, R. H. Cain, Wm. P. Emery, 
 James T. Smith, J. Garrett Johnson and G. 
 Christopher. This organization closed its doors at 
 the beginning of the great Rebellion and never 
 opened again. I have given this statement, that we 
 may be enabled to change the date of our Order's 
 birth. This Order, in its present form, was changed 
 from the original warlike order. Order of Twelve, 
 into a Beneficial Secret Order, and the real date of 
 the birth of our Order is the 12th of August, A. d. 
 1872. On that day the Representatives of three 
 Tabernacles and two Temples assembled in the City 
 of Independence, State of Missouri, and organized 
 the Order of Twelve, of Knights and Daughters of 
 Tabor, and elected Grand Officers. The birthday of 
 this great Order of ours is the 12th day of August, 
 1872. The first Grand Session was held in the same 
 city the second Tuesday in August, a. d. 1873. 
 
 **I refer to these matters as a part of the history 
 of the Order, and that all official papers may give 
 thecorrectdate, the 12th of August, 1890, A. O. T., 
 age of Taborians — 18 years. I recommend that the 
 12th of August be made the day to celebrate the 
 birthday of the International Order of Twelve. I 
 recommend that the Triennial Grand Session be 
 changed from the second Tuesday in August. The 
 
16 
 
 fourth Tuesday in the month of August was fixed 
 by this Triennial Grand Session as the day to 
 assemble. The 12th day of August was made the 
 day for our annual celebration, in commemoration 
 of the birthday of the Order. 
 
 Knights of Liberty. 
 "This oro^anization was known among: its mem- 
 bers by the name of Knights of Tabor — a name 
 that gave the members courage. That God was 
 with Barak and Deborah, in Israel's great battle 
 with the immense army of Sisera; they, with only 
 ten thousand men, assembled on Tabor, to fight 
 Jabin's army, and, if possible, win the victory and 
 break the bondage of the Israelites. God was with 
 Israel, and gave the victory to the bondsmen, 
 though they were opposed by twenty times their 
 number. Our cause was just, and we believed in 
 the justice of the God of Israel and the rights of man. 
 Under the old name of Tabor, we resolved to make 
 full preparation to strike the blow for liberty. We 
 felt sure that the Lord God was on the side of 
 right and justice, our faith and trust was in him, 
 and that he would help us in our needy time. 
 
 Secrecy. 
 **From the very origin of the organization of the 
 Knights of Liberty, the necessity of secrecy was 
 impressed on each member. Let not your right 
 hand know what your left hand does ; trust no one, 
 and test every man before he is admitted to mem- 
 bership. A part of the oath was: * We can die, 
 but we can't reveal the name of a member, or make 
 known the organizfttioa and its objects.* It was 
 
17 
 
 absolutely a secret organized body. We know of 
 the failure of Nat. Turner and others, the Abolition- 
 ist in the North and East. The under-ground 
 railroad was in good running order, and the Knights 
 of Liberty sent many passengers over the road to 
 freedom. 
 
 **We feel that we have said enough on this subject. 
 If the War of the Rebellion had not occurred just 
 at the time it did, the Knights of Liberty would 
 have made public history. Let the past sleep ; 
 enough has been said. 
 
 Faithfully Yours, 
 
 Moses Dickson. 
 
Mrs. MABT ELIZABETH DICKSON. 
 
 Born August 18th, 1818. Died February 1st, 1891, aged 72 
 years, 5 months and 13 days. 
 
 18 
 
19 
 
 Extract from an eulogy delivered by Rev. Sir R. 
 L. Beal, at the memorial services of Mother Dick- 
 son, held at Independence, Mo., February 23d, 
 1891: 
 
 *'Mrs. Mary Elizabeth Dickson was born in the 
 town of Ste. Genevieve, County of Ste. Genevieve, 
 State of Missouri, August 18th, 1818. Her par- 
 ents were members of the Roman Catholic Church. 
 She was the youngest of ten children. When she 
 was twelve years old her parents sent her to St. 
 Louis to reside with her sister Louisa and attend 
 school. She received her education at the old 
 Sacred Heart Convent. Her father, John Sebastian 
 Butcher, was a German, born near the boundary line 
 between France and Germany. He was a stone-cutter 
 and builder, and one among the first settlers of Ste. 
 Genevieve. Her mother's name was Mary Butcher. 
 The family was highly respected by all who knew 
 them, and were owners of considerable property in 
 the town of Ste. Genevieve. Miss Mary E. Butcher 
 was married at the age of 17 years to Mr. Caleb 
 Peters, and in 1838 they moved to Galena, Ills. Mr. 
 Peters opened a provision store, and continued 
 in that business until his death, in 1846. Mrs. 
 Peters was converted and joined the A. M. E. 
 Church, in 1845. She remained a widow until she 
 married Moses Dickfeon. The ceremony was per- 
 formed by the then famous A. M. E. Elder, George 
 W. Johnson, Oct. 5th, 1848, in the City of Galena, 
 Ills. For over forty -two years Rev. and Mrs. Dick- 
 son have traveled together, living in peace and 
 harmony, bearing each other's troubles and trials. 
 Their home-life was pleasant, loving and trusting. 
 
20 
 
 Mother Dickson is the honorable title that she was 
 known by. She has been a consistent and earnest 
 Christian, and a member of the A. M. E. Church for 
 more than 45 years. She was a faithful and zealous 
 worker in the church for many years, until she be- 
 came too old for active work ; she was full of fire, 
 and one of God's greatest women. The Interna- 
 tional Order of Twelve, of which the Kev. Moses 
 Dickson is the Founder and Father, recognizing 
 the influence and part that Daughter Dickson had 
 in building up the Order, did, at the Grand Session, 
 August, 1882, by a unanimous vote, elect and install 
 her into the honorable office and title of Mother of 
 all Knights and Daughters of Tabor, for life. She 
 is held in great esteem and honored by all the 
 members of the great Order. Kev. Moses Dickson 
 is the founder of the Court of Heroines. At the 
 organization of St. Mary's Court, A. D. 1865, in 
 St. Louis, Mo., Sister Dickson was made a charter 
 member. St. Mary's Court is the first and oldest 
 regularly organized Court in the United States. Sis- 
 ter Dickson has presided as Most Ancient Matron 
 and Most Ancient Grand Matron. Mother Dickson 
 was a member of R. H. Gleaves Tabernacle of 
 Brothers and Sisters of Love and Charity in this 
 city. When the Grand Lodge of Good Samaritans 
 and Daughters of Samaria, for Kansas and Mis- 
 souri, was organized at St. Joseph, Mo., Mother 
 Dickson was made an honorary member. She has 
 been in ill health for four years. Sunday, January 
 18th, she was confined to her bed; she gradually 
 grew weaker from day to day ; day and night her 
 doctor, family and friends did everything to retain 
 
21 
 
 her on earth ; but the Lord said to his faithful fol- 
 lower — come homel Sunday night, at 10:35 p. m., 
 her spirit obeyed the summons ; she bid farewell 
 to the church on earth ; in the church triumphant 
 she has taken her place among the redeemed from 
 earth. She leaves a husband, a daughter and a 
 grand-child, and a large number of relations in 
 various parts of the United States, to mourn her 
 departure. Her age was 72 years, 5 months and 
 13 days when she entered into rest. 
 
 **We are brought together by order of the Chief 
 Grand Mentor, to pay tribute to a noble woman, 
 whose influence has done more to cement the bonds 
 by which we are bound together in common broth- 
 erhood, than to any other individual effort put 
 forth for the promotion of our mystic Order. To- 
 day hundreds — yea, thousands — rise up to call her 
 blessed. All over this land, wherever our Order has 
 gained a foothold, the name of Mother Dickson is 
 a household word, for she was the hidden force be- 
 hind the executive chair which urged her husband 
 to the first place in the scale of human endeavor, 
 that we must look elsewhere for proof. After 
 careful investigation, we reach the conclusion that 
 the Creator has planted in the breast of every hu- 
 man certain innate principles. Some of which are 
 will to do and power to act in human affairs, which, 
 if cultivated, make us useful in whatever sphere we 
 are placed. With hearts willing, minds to plan 
 and hands to execute, our possibilities are unlim- 
 ited. Our venerable mother was possessed of these 
 qualifications, and cultivated them, and looked for- 
 ward to the time when opportunity would favor her 
 
22 
 
 to put into practice schemes that would lead to 
 deeds of lofty heroism. 
 
 "But wherein lay the secret of her success, that 
 wraps itself, as if by magic spell, around our 
 hearts ? 
 
 **Let us enter the laboratory of human charac- 
 ter, and analyze the elements which make up the 
 good and the great. It is claimed by some high in 
 authority that lineal descent, through the law of 
 heredity, transmits greatness from the parental 
 stock to the children ; but history has so often re- 
 futed this, by the splendid achievements she has 
 recorded of some lowly born, who, in the humble 
 walks of life surmounted every difficulty, took the 
 front ranks in the annals of Fame, thereby prov- 
 ing their right to which, she conceived, would pro- 
 mote the best interests of the race. The geomet- 
 rical truism, which says: *If equals be added to 
 equals, the remainder will be equals,' is a fitting 
 analogy of the conjugal ties between Father and 
 Mother Dickson; each was suited and equal to the 
 other. If certain qualities appeared more promi- 
 nent in him, such as the marshaling and organiz- 
 ing the crude material of which the Taborian 
 Order is composed, she was the refiner of these 
 forces ; his nature was the more rugged, hers was 
 the more gentle. He, the impetuous commander, 
 at times became discouraged at the gigantic un- 
 dertaking of building up a society that should have 
 a national reputation. She was the patient, steady 
 plodder, who encouraged and kept up his spirit. 
 
 **When truth shall give a hearing to our cause, 
 and the work done by our great men shall be prop- 
 
23 
 
 erly accredited, the Africo-Americans will be al- 
 lowed to build upon some public thoroughfare a 
 monument to Father Dickson, the master-organizer 
 of the race. As its shaft will rise heavenward, our 
 youth, with uncovered head, will point with pride 
 to the illustrious name engraved thereon. Love, 
 fairest daughter of the virtues, will continue to write 
 on the hearts of the coming children, who are to 
 perpetuate this Order, the name of Mary E. Dick- 
 son. She was a mother to us in the fullest sense 
 of the word. She knew no creed, no denomination, 
 simply for its name. 
 
 *'While a member of the Methodistic family, she 
 practiced that broad religion which comes from a 
 pure heart. Her doors were always opened to the 
 distressed. She fed the hungry, clothed the naked, 
 comforted the lowly in spirit. There are some 
 here to-night that received counsel from her, when 
 you needed the advice of a friend. Some in this 
 city, and many in other places where she has been, 
 when she would give up her bed to see you comfor- 
 table. 
 
 <'Her sainted face presents itself before me to- 
 night; that sweet voice, which has soothed so many 
 sad hearts, whispers from across the mystic river. 
 But why do we mourn for her as one lost. She is 
 not dead, no ; for those sainted souls can never die. 
 Her influence lives on. She will never be seen by 
 us with the natural eye, but we can hold communion 
 with her in spirit. Her seraph wing will stretch 
 over us, and her works will live, although she is re- 
 moved from us. We shall all see her again when 
 the despised Galileean shall step from the throne 
 
24 
 
 of His sovereign mercy to that of His sovereign 
 justice ; when the revivified, at the shrill blast of the 
 trumpets, shall wake to life, and throw off their 
 winding sheets at the world's glad re-union. 
 
 **We close with this climax, borrowed from Dr. 
 Munsay's last sermon on the resurrection of the 
 human body. (Mother Dickson will be with all the 
 sanctified.) When the battlefields of the world: 
 Troy and Thermopylae, Palavera and Marengo, 
 Austerlitz and Waterloo, Marathon and Missolouofh, 
 the battlefields of Europe, Asia, Africa and Amer- 
 ica, will produce their armies, and crowd the world 
 with their revivified legions, Indian maidens will 
 leap from the dust of our streets, and our houses 
 overturning, will lead their chiefs to Judgment. 
 Abraham will shake off the dust of Machpelah, and 
 arise with Sarah by his side. David will come with 
 harp in hand. The Reformer of Geneva and the 
 Apostles of Christianity will come side by side. 
 
 '*Our village church-yards and family burial- 
 grounds will be deserted. All will come : patriarchs, 
 prophets, Jews and Gentiles, and Heathens, bond 
 and free, rich and poor, fathers and mothers, chil- 
 dren, sisters, brothers, husbands, wives. All from 
 Adam down will come forth. And all the good from 
 around the world, all together, will hail this re- 
 demption's grand consummation with one proud 
 anthem, whose choral thunders rolling along all the 
 paths of space will shake the universe with its 
 bursting chorus : *0, death, where is thy sting? 
 O, grave, where is thy victory?' " 
 
25 
 
 Power Defined. 
 When a Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium or Tent 
 fails to meet for business every month in the year, 
 they forfeit their charter, and the C. G. M. must 
 declare them closed, unless a dispensation has been 
 obtained, permitting them to omit one session. 
 
 Closed Up. 
 When a Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium or Tent is 
 closed up or becomes defunct, all the money and 
 property belonging to the Temple, Tabernacle, 
 Palatium or Tent that has been closed up or has be- 
 come defunct must be taken by the C. G. M., and 
 record of it made in the C. G. S.'s office, and put 
 in care of the C. G. T. If the said closed or de- 
 funct organization is not re-opened within one 
 year, all property that belonged to said closed or 
 defunct organization must be sold, and the pro- 
 ceeds turned over to the Grand Treasurer. 
 
 Withdrawals. 
 When a Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium or Tent 
 withdraws from the International Order of Twelve, 
 and from the authority of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle, the charter, rituals, and property of 
 all kinds must be surrendered to the C. G. M., or 
 his Deputy. Members who withdraw are not per- 
 mitted to use the ritualistic works, or the name, 
 "Knights and Daughters of Tabor," in any other 
 organization. 
 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles. 
 If a Grand Temple and Tabernacle withdraws 
 from the International Grand Temple and Taber- 
 
26 
 
 nacle; that is, from the general government of the 
 International Order of Twelve, without the consent 
 of all other Grand Temples and Tabernacles, it is 
 hereby ordained that the withdrawing Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle shall forfeit every right 
 and privilege of the Knights and Daughters of 
 Tabor; that is, the right to use the name, the ritu- 
 als and laws of the International Order of Twelve. 
 Their copy-rights shall be annulled by the act of 
 withdrawing. The International Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle shall have authority to enforce this 
 law. 4 
 
CONSTITUTION 
 
 OF THE 
 
 International Order of Twelie 
 
 OP 
 
 Knights and Daofhtm of Takr, 
 
 AND 
 
 OENERAL LAWS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Mernatioial Graaft Temple M Takmacle. 
 
By order of the International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle every Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium 
 and Tent must have and own a Manual, and keep 
 the same for the use of their members. 
 
 New Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents 
 are hereby ordered to obtain a Manual within sixty 
 days after their organization. Learn and know the 
 laws, and obey them. All parts of the Manual are 
 general laws, except the biographies, history and 
 lexicon. 
 
 CONSTITUTION 
 
 ARTICLE I. 
 
 Section 1. — This organization shall be known as 
 the ^'International Order of Twelve, of Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor.** 
 
 Sec. 2. — This organization is vested with full 
 power and authority to organize and charter 
 Temples or Plateaus of the Knights of Tabor, Tab- 
 ernacles or Saba Meroe of the Daughters of Tabor, 
 Palatiums of the Royal House of Media, and Tents 
 of the Maids and Pages of Honor, in any part of 
 the civilized world. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle is hereby authorized to charter Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles in any State, Territory or 
 
29 
 
 country, when they have a lawful number of Tem- 
 ples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents within their 
 boundaries. 
 
 Sec. 4. — The International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle shall have the authority to enact gen- 
 eral laws for the government of the Order. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle shall assemble in Grand Session trien- 
 nially, the fourth Tuesday in the month of August, 
 at 10 o'clock A. M , and assemble from day to day, 
 until its business is finished. 
 
 Sec. 6. — Special sessions can be called by the In- 
 ternational Chief Grand Mentor, whenever he may 
 find it is necessary ; or it shall be his duty to call a 
 special session, when officially requested by a two- 
 third vote of the Chief Grand Mentors. 
 
 ARTICLE II. 
 
 Section 1. — Membership of the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall be as follows : 
 Present and Past International Chief Grand Mentors. 
 Present and Past International Chief Grand Precep- 
 tresses. 
 Present an d Past Inter n ation al Grand Queen Mothers. 
 Present and Past Chief Grand Mentors. 
 Present and Past Chief Grand Preceptresses. 
 Present and Past Grand Queen Mothers. 
 Present and Past Chief Mentors. 
 Present and Past Chief Preceptresses. 
 Present and Past Queen Mothers. 
 Present and Past Presiding Princes. 
 Present and Past Vice-Princesses. 
 Present and Past International Grand Deputies. 
 Present and Past International Deputy Grand Men- 
 tors. 
 
30 
 
 Sec. 2. — A Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall 
 have twelve votes in the International Grand 
 Session, these votes to be cast by the Chief Grand 
 Mentor or the Chief Grand Preceptress. If both of 
 these officers are present in the Grand Session, they 
 shall divide the vote, each casting six votes. A 
 Past Grand Mentor, three votes ; a Past Grand Pre- 
 ceptress, three votes; a Grand and Past Grand 
 Queen Mother, three votes ; International Grand 
 Officers, one vote each; Chief Mentors, one vote; 
 Past Chief Mentors, one vote; Chief Preceptress, 
 one vote; Past Chief Preceptress, one vote; Pre- 
 siding Prince, one vote ; Past Presiding Prince one 
 vote ; Vice-Princess, one vote ; Past Vice-Princess, 
 one vote; Queen Mother, one vote; Past Queen 
 Mother, one vote; International Grand Deputies, 
 one vote ; Past International Grand Deputies, one 
 vote; Present or Past International D. G. M., one 
 vote. 
 
 Sec. 3. — A member of the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle cannot be represented in 
 the Triennial Grand Session by proxy. A proxy 
 vote for any purpose will not be permitted in the 
 International Grand Sessions. 
 
 Sec. 4 — The Chief Grand Mentors and the Chief 
 Grand Preceptresses are the Representatives of 
 their Grand Temples and Tabernacles in the Inter- 
 national Grand Sessions. 
 
 ARTICLE III. 
 
 POWERS AND AUTHORITY. 
 
 Section 1. — The International Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle shall have the authority to organize 
 
31 
 
 and charter Temples of the Knights of Tabor, 
 Tabernacles of the Daughters of Tabor, Palatiums 
 of the Royal House of Media, and Tents of Maids 
 and Pages, in any part of the civilized world. 
 
 Sec. 2. — When an organization is formed inside 
 of the boundaries of any Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle by an International Grand Deputy, or I. D. 
 G. M., the Deputy must report to the Chief Grand 
 Mentor for a charter or warrant. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle shall receive, hear and decide all appeals 
 that come from Grand Temples and Tabernacles, 
 and shall adjust all grievances and complaints 
 arising between Grand Temples and Tabernacles. 
 
 Sec. 4. — The International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle shall have the authority to provide :for 
 its own support. 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 OFFICIAL TITLES. 
 
 Section 1. — The titles of the officers of the Inter- 
 national Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall be as 
 follows : 
 
 1. — International Chief Grand Mentor. — I. C. G. M. 
 
 2. — International Chief Grand Preceptress. — I. C. G. P. 
 
 3. — International Vice-Grand Mentor. — I. V.-G. M. 
 
 4. — International Vice-Grand Preceptress. — I. V.-G. P. 
 
 5. — International Chief Grand Scribe. — I. C. G. S. 
 
 6. — International Chief Grand Reeorder. — I. C. G. R. 
 
 7. — International Chief Grand Treasurer. — I. C. G. T. 
 
 8. — International Grand Queen Mother. — I. G. Q. M. 
 
 9. — International Chief Grand Orator. — I. C. G. O. 
 10. — International Chief Grand Priestess. — I. C. G. Ps. 
 11. — International Grand Drill-Master. — I. G. D.-M. 
 12. — International Grand Inner Sentinel. — I. G. I. St. 
 
The above officers are elected and installed at each 
 Triennial Grand Session. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The following officers are appointed by 
 the International .Chief Grand Mentor, and installed 
 with the other officers : 
 
 1. — International Grand Color Bearer. — I. G. C. B. 
 2. — International Chief Grand Sentinel. — I. C. G. St. 
 3. — International Chief Grand Guard. — I. C. G. G. 
 4. — International Chief Grand Guard. — I. C. G. G. 
 5. — International Chief Grand Guard. — I. C. G. G. 
 6.— International Chief Grand Guard.— I. C. G. G. 
 7.— International Chief Grand Guard.— I. C. G. G. 
 
 1. — International Chief Grand Judge. — I. C. G. J. 
 2. — International Chief Grand Judge. — I. C. G. J. 
 3. — International Chief Grand Judge. — I. C. G. J. 
 4. — International Chief Grand Judge. — I. C. G. J. 
 5. — International Chief Grand Judge. — I. C. G. J. 
 6. — International Chief Grand Judge. — I. C. G. J. 
 7. — International Chief Grand Judge. — I. C. G. J. 
 
 Three Knights are appointed by the International 
 Chief Grand Mentor, and four Daughters are ap- 
 pointed by the International Chief Grand Precep- 
 tress. 
 
 The International Chief Grand Preceptress ap- 
 points the following Daughters : 
 1.— International Chief Grand Tribune.— I. C. G. Te. 
 2.— International Chief Grand Tribune.— I. C. G. Te. 
 3. — International Chief Grand Tribune. — I. C. G. Te. 
 4. — International Chief Grand Tribune. — I. C. G. Te. 
 5. — International Chief Grand Tribune. — I. C. G. Te. 
 6. — International Chief Grand Tribune. — I. C. G. Te. 
 7. — International Chief Grand Tribune. — I. C. G, Te. 
 
33 
 
 ARTICLE V. 
 
 Section 1. — The officers of the International 
 Grand Temple an<l Tabernacle are elected during 
 the Triennial Session, and installed before the Ses- 
 sion closes. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The ballots shall be written or printed. 
 A majority of all the votes shall be necessary to 
 elect. Nominations shall be made in open Session. 
 In case there is no election on the ballot, the candi- 
 date receiving the lowest number of votes is to be 
 dropped, until some one else is elected. 
 
 Sec. 3.— The I. C. G. M. shall appoint five Tel- 
 lers, whose duty it is to count the ballots and an- 
 nounce the result. 
 
 Sec. 4. — A Knight cannot be elected and in- 
 stalled as International Chief Grand Mentor, who 
 has not served one year as Chief Grand Mentor of 
 a Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 5. — A Daughter cannot be elected and in- 
 stalled as International Chief Grand Preceptress, 
 until she has served one year as Chief Grand Pre- 
 ceptress of a Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 ARTICLE VI. 
 
 PERPETUATION. 
 
 Section 1. — In the event of the death, resigna- 
 tion or the disqualification of the I. C. G. M. and 
 I. V.-G. M., the I. C. G. S. is authorized to issue 
 a summons to the Chief Grand Mentors, requesting 
 them to meet within ten days from date of sum- 
 mons, and elect and install an I. C. G. M., to serve 
 the balance of the term. 
 
 (2— Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
34 
 
 ARTICLE yn. 
 
 DUTIES OF INTERNATIONAL GRAND OFFICERS. 
 
 Section 1. — The International Chief Grand 
 Mentor shall preside at all Sessions of the Inter- 
 national Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and call 
 Special Sessions when he deems it necessary, or 
 when requested by two-thirds of the Chief Grand 
 Mentors. He shall decide all points and questions 
 of order in the Triennial Grand Session — appoint 
 officers pro-tem, in the absence or disqualification of 
 the officer elected or appointed. He can open and 
 close the Triennial Session without a motion. He 
 shall make to the Triennial Session a report of the 
 business that has been transacted during the inter- 
 val since the last Session. He shall appoint all 
 committees not otherwise ordered by the Triennial 
 Session. He can order the I. C. G. S. and I. C. 
 G. T. to report to him the condition of the treas- 
 ury at any time. His signature to a warrant on 
 the Treasurer makes it legal. No money can be 
 paid out of the treasury without his signature. 
 He shall organize Grand Temples and Tabernacles 
 under the International Charter, in any State, Ter- 
 ritory or country, when he is satisfied that they 
 have the constitutional number of organizations 
 within their boundary. He must supply the Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles that he organizes with 
 all the requisites to commence business as a Grand 
 body. He can organize Temples, Tabernacles, 
 Palatiums and Tents in person or by Deputy, in 
 any part of the civilized world, and assign such or- 
 ganizations to the nearest Grand Temple and Tab- 
 ernacle, or organize them into International Dis- 
 
35 
 
 tricts. He must issue the quarterly Pass in the 
 months of March, June, September and December, 
 and furnish a sufficient supply to the C. G. Ms., 
 for all Temples and Tabernacles. He must decide 
 on all matters that are requested of him by the C. 
 G. Ms. or C. G. Ps. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND PRECEPTRESS. 
 
 Sec. 2.— It shall be the duty of the I. C. G. P. 
 to assist the I. C. G. M. during the business of 
 the Triennial Session, when he is absent from the 
 Chair at any time during the Session. She must 
 give such instructions and assistance to Chief Grand 
 Preceptresses as they may request of her. She is 
 authorized to organize Tabernacles, Palatiums and 
 Tents in any part of the civilized world, and, if in 
 a State where there is a Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle, report her organizations to the C. G. M. for 
 a charter. She must make a full report to the 
 Triennial Session of her work and official business 
 during the interval since the last Triennial Session. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL VICE-GRAND MENTOR. 
 
 Sec. 3.— It shall be the duty of the I. V.-G. M. 
 to assist the I. C. G. M. in keeping order during 
 the Triennial Session. In the event of the death 
 or mental inability of the I. C. G. M., the I. V.- 
 G. M. shall attend to and perform all the duties of 
 the I. C. G. M. until another is elected at the 
 Triennial Session and installed. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL VICE-GRAND PRECEPTRESS. 
 
 Sec. 4.— It is the duty of the I. V.-G. P. to 
 assist the I. V.-G. M. in his duties during the 
 Triennial Session. Should the I. C. G. P. be re- 
 
se 
 
 moved by death, or resign her office, the I. V.-G. 
 P. must fill her station and attend to its duties 
 until the regular election. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND SCRIBE. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The I C. G. S. shall have charge of 
 all the records, and keep a journal of the proceed- 
 ings of the Triennial Session. He must keep and 
 preserve all official papers. He shall keep a register 
 of all Grand Temples and Tabernacles, and a copy 
 of their seals. He shall attest all official papers 
 that are issued from his office with the seal of his 
 office. He shall collect the International Grand 
 dues and other moneys due the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, and pay them to the I. C. 
 G. T. He shall draw all warrants for money on 
 the Grand Treasurer, and have them signed by the 
 I. C. G. M., and sign his name and impress his 
 seal thereon. He must make a full report of all 
 business that has been transacted in his office to 
 each Triennial Session. At the expiration of his 
 term of office he must dt'liver to his successor all 
 books, papers and property that are in his possession 
 belonging to the International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND RKCORDER. 
 
 Sec. 6.— It shall be the duty of the I. C. G. R. 
 to assist the I. C. G. S. in the business of the 
 Triennial Session, and aid him in getting the pro- 
 ceedings ready for the printer, and perform such 
 other duties pertaining to her office as may be 
 assigned to her. 
 
37 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND TREASURER. 
 
 Sec. 7.— It shall be the duty of the I. C. G. T. 
 to receive all moneys and valuables belonging to 
 the International Grand Temple and Tabernacle, 
 and keep a correct account of what he receives. He 
 must pay all warrants drawn on the Treasurer that 
 are signed by the I. C. G. M. and I. C. G. S. 
 He shall make a full report to the Triennial Session 
 of the amount of money received and disbursed. 
 His books shall always be ready for the inspection 
 of the I. C. G. M., or any committee appointed by 
 him. At the expiration of his term of office he 
 must deliver to his successor all books, papers, 
 moneys and valuables, belonging to the Inter- 
 national Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL GRAND QUEEN MOTHER. 
 
 Sec. 8.— It is the duty of the I. G. Q. M. to 
 communicate with the Grand Queen Mothers of the 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles, and receive from 
 them the annual reports of the Tents and their con- 
 dition, the number of Tents, and the number of 
 children in the Tents. She must make a triennial 
 report of all Tents to the Triennial Session. 
 
 international chief grand orator. 
 
 Sec. 9.— The I. C. G. O. shall conduct the de- 
 votional exercises of the Triennial Session, and 
 perform the functions of Chaplain on public oc- 
 casions, and preach the triennial sermon, and con- 
 duct the funeral services of all International Grand 
 Officers. 
 
38 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND PRIESTESS. 
 
 Sec. 10.— It is the duty of the I. C. G. Ps. to 
 assist the I. C. G. O. in the exercises of the Trien- 
 nial Session ; and when he is absent from the Session, 
 she shall attend to the opening and closing of the 
 Session in the usual form. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL GRAND DRILL-MASTER. 
 
 Sec. 11.— The I. G. D.-M. shall assist the I. G. 
 I. St. in her duties at the inner door of the hall. 
 He shall perform the functions of Chief Marshal 
 at all public processions of the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, and has authority to ap- 
 point Aides. He must give instructions to the Grand 
 Drill-Masters, when they so request. He must 
 arrange the hall for the Triennial Session, assisted 
 by the I. C. G. Gs. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL GRAND INNER SENTINEL. 
 
 Sec. 12.— It is the duty of the I. G. I. St. to 
 guard the inside door during the Triennial Session, 
 and to admit none, unless they give the proper Pass 
 and are- properly clothed. She must report all ap- 
 plicants for admission to the I. V.-G. M.,and admit 
 or reject them on his order. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL GRAND COLOR BEARER. 
 
 Sec. 13.— It is the duty of the I. G. C. B. to 
 take care of the International Banner, and carry it 
 in public processions. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND SENTINEL. 
 
 Sec. 14.— The I. C. G. St. shall have charge of 
 the outer door of the hall during the International 
 Grand Session. He must notify the I. G. I. St. 
 
39 
 
 when a Knight or Daughter desires admittance. It 
 is his business to see that they are properly clothed 
 before he permits them to enter. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND JUDGES. 
 
 Sec. 15. — The Board of Interqational Chief 
 Grand Judges shall consist of seven members — three 
 Knights and four Daughters. This Board shall in- 
 vestigate all appeals, grievances and complaints 
 that are referred to it by the International Session ; 
 they must report their decisions to the Interna- 
 tional Session. This Board shall have authority to 
 impeach an International Chief Grand Mentor in 
 accordance with Article XVII of the International 
 Constitution. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND TRIBUNES. 
 
 Sec. 16.— It shall be the duty of the I. C. G.Tes. 
 to assist the I. C. G. Gs. in their several duties. 
 This Board shall consist of seven Daughters. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL CHIEF GRAND GUARDS. 
 
 Sec. 17. — This Board shall consist of five 
 Knights, whose duty it is to attend on the members 
 under the orders of the I. C. G. M., and they shall 
 assist the I. G. D.-M. in preparing the hall for the 
 International Sessions. 
 
 ARTICLE VIII. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL DEPUTIES. 
 
 Section 1. — Commissions are issued by the I. C. 
 G. M. to none but those distinguished members of 
 the Order who have by their zeal and earnest work 
 aided in building up and enlarging the Order. 
 
40 
 
 Their commissions are evidence of their high stand- 
 ing in the International Order of Twelve. This 
 constitutional provision is not to be departed from, 
 except when a Deputy is needed for organizing. 
 
 Sec. 2. — An International Deputy Grand Mentor 
 shall have authority to organize and setup Temples, 
 Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents in any part of 
 the United States of North America, and in any 
 part of the civilized world. 
 
 Sec. 3. — An International Grand Deputy shall 
 have the authority to organize and set up Taber- 
 nacles, Palatiums and Tents in any part of the 
 United States of North America, and in any part 
 of the civilized world. 
 
 Sec. 4. — The I. C. G. M. can appoint Special 
 International Deputy Grand Mentors, and assign 
 them to special duty, with specific instructions. 
 
 Sec. 5. — When an International Deputy organ- 
 izes within the boundaries of a Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle, the organization must be reported to 
 the Chief Grand Mentor of the State in which the 
 organization has made application for a charter or 
 warrant. 
 
 Sec. 6. — When an International Deputy organ- 
 izes at any place that is not within the boundaries 
 of a Grand Temple and Tabernacle, the organiza- 
 tion must be reported to the International Chief 
 Grand Mentor for charter or warrant. 
 
 Sec. 7. — An International commission creates 
 and makes the bearer a life member in the Interna- 
 tional Grand Temple and Tabernacle, with all of 
 its rights and privileges. If the bearer is a Knight, 
 he must be and remain a member in good standing 
 
41 
 
 in a Temple ; if a Daughter, she must be and re- 
 main a member in good standing in a Tabernacle. 
 
 ARTICLE IX. 
 
 REVENUE. 
 
 Section 1. — The revenue of the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall be derived 
 from the following sources: 
 
 1. — All members of Temples and Tabernacles 
 shall each pay two cents annually. 
 
 2. — Tents of Maids and Pages of Honor shall 
 pay one dollar each annually, and Palatiums two 
 dollars each annually. The fee shall be fixed by the 
 Triennial Session. 
 
 3.— The C. G. S. of Grand Temples and Taber- 
 nacles are required to collect these International 
 Grand dues, and forward them annually to the I. 
 C. G. S., and take his receipt therefor. 
 
 The International Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 must furnish to each Grand Temple and Tabernacle, 
 on their organization, the following requisites : Four 
 dozen Saba Meroe Rituals, four dozen Daughters* 
 Third Degree Rituals, two dozen Knights' Rituals, 
 six dozen Daughters' Constitutions, four dozen 
 Knights' Constitutions, four dozen Daughters' Trav- 
 eling Certificates, three dozen Knights Traveling 
 Certificates, four dozen Daughters' Transfers, three 
 dozen Knights' Transfers, sixteen dozen Blank 
 Daughters' Petitions, twelve dozen Knights' Peti- 
 tions, twenty dozen Daughters' Monthly Cards, 
 twelve dozen Knights' Monthly Cards, twenty dozen 
 Tent Constitutions, twenty dozen Children's Monthly 
 Cards, twenty Blank Tabernacle Warrants, sixteen 
 
42 
 
 Blank Temple Charters, twelve Blank Tent Char- 
 ters, one Grand Temple and Tabernacle Seal Press, 
 one C. G. S. Seal Press, ten Palatium Charters, four 
 dozen Palatium Rituals, and four dozen Past Ar- 
 canum Rituals. 
 
 The amount required for organizing a Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle shall be as follows: For 
 the Charter, fifty dollars; to the I. C. G. M., 
 for organizing and expenses, fifty dollars; for 
 Requisites, one hundred and fifty dollars ; total, two 
 hundred and fifty dollars. To cover these expenses 
 the I. C. G. M. shall assess each Temple, Taber- 
 nacle, Palatium and Tent pro-rala. 
 
 ARTICLE X. 
 
 PAY-ROLL OF INTERNATIONAL OFFICERS. 
 
 Section 1. — The I. C. G. M. shall receive five 
 cents per mile for traveling expenses to and from the 
 Triennial Session, and three dollars per day during 
 the Triennial Session. 
 
 The I. C. G. P. shall receive the same amount. 
 
 The I. C. G. S. shall receive the same amount. 
 
 The I. C. G. R. shall receive the same amount. 
 
 The I. C. G. T. shall receive the same amount. 
 
 That is, these four officers shall receive the same 
 amount that is paid to the I. C. G. M. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The salary of the above officers must 
 be fixed, from time to time, by the Triennial Ses- 
 sion. 
 
 Sec. 3.— The I. C. G. O., I. C. G. Ps., I. G. Q. 
 M.,I. G. D.-M., I. C. G. St. and I. G. I. St. shall 
 receive three dollars per day during the Triennial 
 Session. 
 
43 
 
 ARTICLE XI. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL BOARD OF GRAND CURATORS. 
 
 Section 1. — This Board shall consist of five mem- 
 bers, namely: Thel. C.G. M.,I.C. G. P.,I. C. G. 
 S., I. C. G. R. and I. C. G. T. 
 
 Sec. 2. — This Board shall be the Trustees of the 
 International Grand Temple and Tabernacle. All 
 deeds, donations, gifts or devises, for the benefit of 
 the International Grand Temple and Tabernacle, 
 shall be made to them. 
 
 Sec. 3. — They shall invest in stocks, loans or se^ 
 curities, the funds, as the Grand Session may direct. 
 They shall call in, sell and realize on loans, stocky 
 and investments, collect interest, rents and divi- 
 dends accruing or arising from any investments 
 belonging to the International Grand Temple andf 
 Tabernacle, and pay all that is collected to the I. 
 C. G. S., and he shall turn it over to the I. C. G. T 
 
 Sec. 4. — The International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle shall furnish the Board with such books 
 and requisites as are needed to conduct their bus- 
 iness. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The Board shall make a Triennial re- 
 port to the Triennial Session of all the business ; 
 when their successors in office are installed and quali- 
 fied, they shall deliver to them all books, securities, 
 deposits, stocks, deeds, papers and moneys belong- 
 ing to the International Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle. 
 
 ARTICLE XII. 
 
 BONDS. 
 
 Section 1.— The I. C. G. S. and the I. C. G. T. 
 must give bond, with such security as shall be ap- 
 
u 
 
 proved by the I. C. G. O., I. C. G. Ps. and I. V.- 
 
 G. M., for the faithful application of all moneys 
 and valuables belonging to the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, in accordance with the 
 Constitution and the orders of the Triennial Session. 
 
 AETICLE XIII. 
 
 Section 1. — The I. C. G. M. must appoint the 
 following committees immediately after the Trien- 
 ninal Session is opened, and shall consist of seven 
 members each — three Knights and four Daughters : 
 
 1. — On Credentials. 
 
 2. — On Returns of Grand Temples and Taber- 
 nacles. 
 
 3.— On I. C. G. M.'s Message and I. C. G. P.'s 
 Report. 
 
 4. — On Finance and Accounts. 
 
 5. — On Ways and Means. 
 
 6. — On Obituaries. 
 
 7. — On Collecting the Membership Fee. 
 
 8. — On the Condition of the Colored People of 
 the World. 
 
 9.— On I. C. G. S.'sandl. C. G. T.'s Reports. 
 
 10. — On Board of Grand Curators' Report. 
 
 11. — On the Condition of the Order. 
 
 12. — On Edowment Benefits. 
 
 ARTICLE XIV. 
 
 DUTIES OF COMMITTEES. 
 
 Section 1. — The Committee on Credentials must 
 make a full report of all the Members of the Inter- 
 national Grand Temple and Tabernacle, divided as 
 follows ; 
 
45 
 
 1. — The Kepresentatives of Grand Temples and 
 Tabernacles. 
 
 2. — The Chief Mentors and Past Chief Mentors. 
 
 3. — The Chief Preceptresses and Past Chief Pre- 
 ceptresses. 
 
 4. — The Presiding Princes and Vice-Princesses. 
 
 5. — The Queen Mothers and Past Queen Mothers. 
 
 6. — The International Deputies. 
 
 This report must include those that are present 
 and absent. When members are absent, absent 
 shall be marked opposite their names. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Committee on Returns of Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles are to examine the re- 
 turns of the Grand Temples and Tabernacles, and 
 report the number of Temples, Tabernacles, Pala- 
 tiums and Tents, and the number of members be- 
 longing to each Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and 
 the dues that are due to the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 3.— The Committee on I. C. G. M.'s Mes- 
 sage and the I. C. G. P.'s Report must examine 
 the message, and make such disposition of it as in 
 their judgment it requires, and they must also 
 recommend what shall be done with the I. C. G. 
 P.'s report. 
 
 Sec. 4. — The Committee on Finance and Ac- 
 counts must report the amount of money in the 
 treasury after all dues have been collected in Trien- 
 nial Session. Members who have accounts against 
 the International Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 must put their accounts into the hands of this com- 
 mittee. This committee shall read their report 
 just before the election of the Grand Officers. The 
 
46 
 
 report must itemize and give the amount of money 
 received from each Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 and other sources, and the total amount that is in 
 the International Grand treasury, and the amount of 
 the accounts against the treasury, and the balance 
 remaining in the treasury after all bills are paid. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The Committee on Ways and Means 
 shall examine all business that is referred to them 
 by the Triennial Session, and recommend what it 
 considers the best action the Session shall take. 
 
 Sec. 6. — It shall be the duty of the Committee 
 on Obituaries to report the names of the members 
 of the International Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 who have died since the last Triennial Session, and 
 prepare a programme for the Session, and recom- 
 mend that an hour be set apart during the Session 
 for the obituary exercises. 
 
 Sec. 7. — The Committee on Collecting the Mem- 
 bership Fee must collect the fee that is ordered by 
 the Triennial Session, and report the names of the 
 members that have paid. 
 
 Sec. 8. — The Committee on the Condition of the 
 Colored People of the World shall be a standing 
 committee, and shall hold their office for three 
 years. It is the duty of this committee to prepare 
 a detailed report of what the Colored People are 
 doing. Their report should be complete, and cover 
 all the avenues of life. 
 
 Sec. 9. — It is the duty of the Committee on the 
 I. C. G. S/s and I. C. G. T.'s Reports to examine 
 and compare these reports carefully, and submit 
 their decision to the Session. 
 
47 
 
 Sec. 10. — The duty of the Committee on the 
 Board of Grand Curators must examine the bus- 
 iness of this Board, and report upon its correctness. 
 
 Sec. 11. — The Committee on the Condition of 
 the Order must prepare a carefully written report 
 of the condition of the Order, and make any 
 recommendation that will in their judgment be of 
 benefit in administering the affairs of the Order. 
 
 Sec. 12. — It shall be the duty of the Committee 
 on Endowment Benefits to carefully examine the 
 workings of the Taborian endowment, and widows' 
 and orphans' benefits in the Grand Temples and 
 Tabernacles, and report to the Session, and recom- 
 mend such measures as they may think necessary. 
 
 The reports of the I. G. Q. M., I. D. G. M.s 
 and I. G. D.s must be referred to a Special Com- 
 mittee. 
 
 ARTICLE XV. 
 
 BUSINESS RULES. 
 
 1. — The International Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle shall assemble in Triennial Session on the 
 constitutional day and hour, and open with the usual 
 ceremonies in the Saba Meroe Des^ree. 
 
 2. — The International Grand Chief appoints the 
 committees. 
 
 3. — The Committee on Credentials makes a 
 partial report. 
 
 4. — The International Grand Chief reads his 
 message, and the International Grand Preceptress 
 makes her report ; the I. G. Q. M., I. D. G. M.s 
 and I. G. D.s make their reports. 
 
 5. — Reports of ReguUir Committees. 
 
 6. — Reports of Special Commiltees. 
 
48 
 
 7. — Eeports of the Board of Grand Curators. 
 
 8.— Reports of the I. C. G. S. and I. C. G. T. 
 are not made until all returns are made from Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles and other sources from 
 which money is received. 
 
 9. — Motions, resolutions and new business. 
 
 10. — A special meeting of the C. G. M.s, to ex- 
 emplify the Knights' ritualistic work. 
 
 11. — ^A special meeting of C. G. P.s, to exemplify 
 the Daughters' and Priestesses' ritualistic work. 
 
 12. — A special meeting of the G. Q. M.s, on the 
 best manner of conducting the Tent work and bus- 
 iness. 
 
 13. — A special meeting of the P. P.s and V.-P.s 
 on the Palatiuni ritualistic work. 
 
 14. — Nomination and election of International 
 Grand Officers. 
 
 15. — Installation of Grand Officers. 
 
 16. — The I. C. G. M. declares the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle at rest until the 
 next Triennial Grand Session, unless a Special Ses- 
 sion is called. 
 
FORM OF TRIENNIAL SESSION. 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 ^6 
 
 ALTAR. 
 
 
 
 
 
 -■ 
 
 I. G. Te. 
 
 
 I. G. Gs. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 PP 
 
 Q 
 
 
 • 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 5;^ 
 
 CiC 
 
 I. C. G. St. 
 
 Committee Room. 
 
 49 
 
50 
 AETICLE XYI. 
 
 POWERS AND PREROGATIVES OF THE I. C. G. M. 
 
 Section 1. — He can organize and set Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles to work, and constitute 
 them by International Charter. 
 
 Sec. 2. His decisions are final on all questions 
 that are submitted to him from the C. G. M.s of 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles. 
 
 Sec. 3. — His decisions on International and Gen- 
 eral Laws and Kules remain in force until reversed 
 bj his successor. 
 
 Sec. 4. — He can visit any Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle when in Session, and have his traveling 
 expenses paid by the Grand Session that he visits. 
 
 Sec. 5. — He can arrest the charter and suspend a 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle, when it is clear that 
 they are in rebellion against the International and 
 General Laws of the Order of Twelve. 
 
 Sec. 6. — He can preside at all meetings of the 
 International Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 7. — He can assemble the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle in Special Session at 
 any time, if he decides that it is necessary for the 
 interests of the Order. 
 
 Sec. 8. — He can call all the C. G. M.s and C. 
 G. P.s into a council whenever grave and import- 
 ant business concerning the Order demands an united 
 consultation and action. 
 
 Sec. 9. — When complaint or charges are made 
 against a C. G. M. for violation of the criminal 
 laws of the State, county or city, or for immorality 
 or imbecility, by a majority of the elected Grand 
 
51 
 
 Officers, the I. C. G. M., when he receives the 
 charges and specifications, properly signed, shall 
 suspend the said C. G. M. from his official duties, 
 and notify the Y.-G. M. to take charge of the C. 
 G. M.'s official business. The I. C. G. M. shall 
 order a committee of three C. G. M.s to meet and 
 investigate the case. If this committee reports him 
 guilty, as charged, the I. C. G. M. shall suspend 
 him from the Order, and notify him to meet the 
 Triennial Session for trial. If the committee de- 
 cides that he is innocent in their report, the I. C. 
 G. M. shall restore him to his office and official 
 duties. The Grand Temple and Tabernacle that 
 has a case of this kind, must pay the traveling ex- 
 penses and per diem of the committee. The I. C. 
 G. M. must fix the place, and notify the accused 
 and the committee where to assemble. The com- 
 mittee shall have the authority to summons wit- 
 nesses for and against the accused. 
 
 Sec. 10.— The I. C. G. M. can confer the Tem- 
 ple and Tabernacle degrees on all persons of dis- 
 tinction, and assign them to any Temple or Taber- 
 nacle for membership. Such persons are to be en- 
 rolled without ballot, but they must obey the laws 
 and rules governing the Temple or Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 11. — The I. C. G. M. can give a dispensa- 
 tion to open a Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and 
 allow them to proceed with their business. When 
 their charter is lost or misplaced, the dispensation 
 will hold good until it is found or another one is 
 granted. 
 
 Sec. 12. — He can appoint as many International 
 Deputies as he desires. 
 
52 
 
 Sec. 13. — He cannot be disciplined for his official 
 acts after he has passed out of office. 
 
 AETICLE XVII. 
 
 IMPEACHMENT. 
 
 Section 1. — ^An International Chief Grand Mentor 
 can be impeached for the following offenses : First, 
 for violating the criminal laws, if he is arrested 
 and found guilty, and sentenced to prison ; second, 
 for immoral conduct ; and third, for imbecility. 
 
 Sec. 2. — ^When an I. C. G. M. is found guilty in 
 a criminal court and sentenced to prison, the 
 Chairman of the Board of International Grand 
 Judges must assemble the Board, and investigate 
 the case, and if they find that the evidence is 
 clear and that he was justly sentenced, they are 
 authorized to declare his seat vacant, and notify 
 the I. V.-G. M. to take charge of the I. C. G. M.'s 
 office and attend to all its duties. 
 
 Sec. 3.— If the I. C. G. M. is accused of im- 
 moral conduct, and it is notoriously the common 
 talk of his neighbors, a charge can be made by 
 three or more members of the Order, who must be 
 eye-witnesses of his immorality. The charge and 
 specifications, with the names of the witnesses 
 signed to it, must be given to the International 
 Board of Judges. It shall be the duty of the 
 Chairman to call his Board together, and examine 
 the witnesses in the presence of the I. C. G. M., 
 or, if he refuses to attend, the Judges shall proceed 
 with the examination. If they decide that it is a 
 case requiring a trial, the Judges must notify the 
 L C» G» S. to summons five C. G» M.s or Past C 
 
53 ^ 
 
 G. M.s to try the case. The I. C. G. S. shall fix 
 the day and date and the place of meeting, also to 
 notify the I. C. G. M. to be present. If the I. C. 
 G. M. is found guilty, he must be suspended and 
 ordered to meet the Triennial Session for trial. 
 The I. V.-G. M. takes charge of the office. 
 
 Sec. 4. — If the I. C. G. M. becomes weak- 
 minded or insane, so that he cannot attend to the 
 duties of his office, the I. C. G. S. must notify the 
 I. G. C. J.s, and they must meet and investigate. 
 If they find that the I. C. G. M. is incapable of at- 
 tending to the duties of the office, they shall declare 
 the office vacant and put the I. V.-G. M. in charge. 
 
 AETICLE XVIII. 
 
 AMENDMENTS. 
 
 Section 1. — The International Constitution can 
 be amended by submitting the amendment or 
 amendments to the International Grand Session. 
 If said amendment or amendments are recommen- 
 ded by a three-fourths vote, they must be printed 
 in the Proceedings, and submitted to every Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle at their First Annual 
 Session after the said amendment or amendments 
 have been recommended by the Triennial Session. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Grand Temples and Tabernacles 
 shall read the amendment or amendments in open 
 Session, and order them printed in the Annual 
 Grand Session Proceedings, with instructions that 
 each Temple and Tabernacle call a special meeting 
 to act on the amendment or amendments. 
 
 Sec. 3. — When a Temple is opened to act on the 
 amendments, the amendment or amendments should 
 first be carefully read, and then put to a vote. The 
 
54 
 
 C. S. shall thereupon record the names of the mem- 
 bers who voted for or against the amendment or 
 amendments, and shall forward the result to the 
 C. G. S. 
 
 Sec. 4. — Tabernacles shall proceed in the same 
 manner as Temples in regard to the reading of and 
 voting for the amendment or amendments, only 
 that the C. R. shall record each member who voted 
 yes or no, and shall forward the result to the C. G. S. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The C. G. S. shall report to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle Session the vote of each 
 Temple and Tabernacle. If three-fourths of the 
 Temples and Tabernacles approve of the amend- 
 ment or amendments, and the Grand Session 
 recommends the adoption by a two-thirds vote, the 
 C. G. S. shall forward the entire vote cast to the 
 I. C. G. S. If there is not the required number of 
 Temples and Tabernacles voting for the adoption 
 of the same, the C. G. S. shall inform the I. C. 
 G. S. that the amendment or amendments are re- 
 jected by the Grand Temple and Tabernacle for 
 the State of . 
 
 Sec. 6.— The I. C. G. S. shall report the vote 
 from all the Grand Temples and Tabernacles to the 
 Triennial Session. If seven-eighths of the Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles approve the amendment 
 or amendments, the I. C. G. M. shall announce 
 that the amendment or amendments have been 
 regularly adopted, and are a part of the Interna- 
 tional Constitution. If they have not been ap- 
 proved by the required number, the I. C. G. M. 
 shall declare that the amendment or amendments 
 have been rejected. 
 
KNIGHTSiTABOR'; 
 
 IRNATIONAL 
 
 Irderof 
 
 irWELVE 
 
 ^.-iMiiiiii 
 
 INTERNATIONAL GRAND OPPICERS' JEWEL 
 OP OFFICE. (Insert Initials of Each Officer.) 
 
 65 
 
CONTINUATION 
 
 OP 
 
 GENERAL LAWS 
 
 66 
 
GENERAL LAWS- CONTINUATION, 
 
 ARTICLE I. 
 
 Section 1. — The International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle shall have the authority to enforce the 
 General Laws of the International Order of Twelve, 
 of Knights and Daughter Priestesses of Tabor. 
 The General Laws cover and comprise the Consti- 
 tution and all Installing Ceremonies, all Funeral 
 Ceremonies, Corner-stone Laying, Dedicating Cere- 
 monies, Taborian Drill, Color of Regalia, Form of 
 Jewels and Badges, Duties of Grand Officers, and 
 General Taborian Rules and Instructions. The In- 
 ternational Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall be 
 an advisory and appellate body, whose decisions 
 shall be final. During the interim between the 
 Triennial Grand Sessions, the International Chief 
 Grand Mentor shall hear all appeals, and adjust all 
 differences occurring between Grand Temples and 
 Tabernacles. He shall also have authority to en- 
 force all of the General Laws. 
 
 (See Code, constituting part of the General Laws, 
 with the Law of Impeachment and Trials of I. C. G. 
 M.s and I. C. G. P.s, and Chief Grand Mentors 
 and Chief Grand Preceptresses.) 
 
 57 
 
58 
 ARTICLE II. 
 
 GRAND TEMPLES AND TABERNACLES. 
 
 Section 1. — A Grand Temple and Tabernacle of 
 the Knights and Daughters of Tabor can be organ- 
 ized within the boundaries of any State or Terri- 
 tory of the United States, also in any State, Prov- 
 ince or country in the civilized world. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Grand Temples and Tabernacles cannot 
 be organized with less than forty organizations, 
 composed of chartered and warranted Temples, 
 Tabernacles, Tents and Palatiums. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 and Tents are required to pay the expenses for or- 
 ganizing a Grand Temple and Tabernacle within the 
 boundaries of their State or Province. 
 
 Sec. 4. — When a State, Territory or Province 
 has forty organizations, composed of Temples, Tab- 
 ernacles, Palatiums and Tents, within its bound- 
 aries, a Grand Temple and Tabernacle must be or- 
 ganized. Two or more States adjoining each other 
 may, for the convenience of their organizations, 
 unite in forming a Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 5. — It is the duty of an International 
 Deputy, living within the boundaries of a State, 
 Territory or Province that has not organized, to in- 
 form the I. C. G. M. when there is a lawful num- 
 ber of Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents 
 within those boundaries willing to organize a Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle. The International Grand 
 Chief Mentor, when he receives this information, 
 shall notify the Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 and Tents to prepare to organize. He is required 
 
59 
 
 to give them at least three months to prepare for 
 organizing a Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 6. — The International Chief Grand Mentor 
 may give a dispensation to organize a Grand Tem- 
 ple or Tabernacle with less than forty organizations, 
 if he is satisfied that it will be for the best inter- 
 ests of the International Order of Twelve. 
 
 ARTICLE III. 
 
 POWER AND AUTHORITY. 
 
 Section 1. — A Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 shall have power and authority over all Temples, 
 Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents within the bound- 
 aries of the State, Territory or Province in which it 
 is organized. 
 
 Sec. 2. — A Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall 
 have authority to organize Temples, Tabernacles, 
 Palatiums and Tents in any State, Territory, 
 Province or country in the civilized world, where 
 there is no Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and have 
 jurisdiction over all of its organizations until a Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle is organized. 
 
 Sec. 3. — A Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall 
 have authority to enact laws and rules for its 
 government (but not to conflict with the Inter- 
 national General Laws) , grant charters and warrants, 
 suspend or revoke charters and warrants for cause, 
 receive and hear appeals, redress grievances and 
 complaints arising in Temples, Tabernacles, Pala- 
 tiums or Tents, and to provide for its support and 
 government. 
 
 Sec. 4. — A Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall 
 have an Annual Grand Session. A Special Grand 
 
60 
 
 Session can be called by the Chief Grand Mentor 
 at any time, if he finds it is necessary or when he is 
 requested to call a special Grand Session by two- 
 thirds of the Temples and Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 and Tents. 
 
 Sec. 5. — Grand Temples and Tabernacles shall 
 have exclusive jurisdiction within the boundaries of 
 the State, Territory or Province in which they are 
 organized, provided they do not conflict with the 
 International General Laws. 
 
 Sec. 6. — When a Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 organizes in any State, Territory or Province where 
 there is no Grand Temple and Tabernacle, their 
 organization does not give them exclusive juris- 
 diction over the State, Territory or Province ; their 
 jurisdiction extends only to their organization, 
 other Grand Temples and Tabernacles have the 
 same right to organize Temples, Tabernacles, Pa- 
 latiums and Tents in the same State, Territory or 
 Province, and have jurisdiction over their own 
 organizations. 
 
 AETICLE IV. 
 
 APPEALS. 
 
 Section 1. — Members who have been suspended 
 or expelled, and think that they have not received 
 justice, have the right to appeal to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle Session. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The method of making out an appeal 
 is as follows : First, give the day and date of the 
 trial, and the name and number of the Temple or 
 the Tabernacle ; second, give the character of the 
 offense upon which the charge and specifications 
 
61 
 
 are based; third, state the reason why you appeal; 
 fourth, tell in what manner you were unjustly 
 sentenced; and, fifth, give the names of witnesses. 
 If it is a Temple, a copy of the appeal must be 
 filed with the Chief Scribe ; if a Tabernacle, with 
 the Chief Recorder. The appellant must retain a 
 copy. The appeal must be filed with the C. G. S. 
 within ten days after the trial. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The C. S. or C. E. who receives an ap- 
 peal must retain a copy, and forward the original 
 appeal to the C. G. S. 
 
 Sec. 4. — When the Grand Session assembles, the 
 C. G. S. must read the appeal in open Session, and 
 the C. G. M. shall refer the same to the Board of 
 Grand Judges. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The Grand Judges shall examine the 
 complaint in the appeal and the witnesses, and de- 
 liver their decision to the Grand Session. If 
 adopted by a majority vote, their decision is sus- 
 tained. 
 
 Sec. 6. — If the appellant is not satisfied, an 
 appeal can be taken to the Triennial Grand Session, 
 by giving notice to the C. G. S. within ten days 
 after the Grand Session closes. The C. G. S. must 
 forward a copy of the appeal, with the other papers 
 pertaining to the same, to the I. C. G. S. 
 
 Sec. 7. — When the Triennial Grand Session as- 
 sembles, the I. C. G. S. shall read the appeal, and 
 the other papers that accompany it, in open Session. 
 The I. C. G. M. shall refer the appeal and papers 
 to the International Board of Grand Judges, who 
 shall investigate and examine witnesses, and render 
 their decision to the Session, If adopted, it settles 
 
62 
 
 the matter. If a majority refuse to adopt the de- 
 cision, the Triennial Session shall dispose of the 
 appeal by a majority vote. 
 
 AKTICLE V. 
 
 ANNUAL SERMONS. 
 
 Section 1. — The International Order of Twelve, 
 by the teachings of its Constitutions and Degrees, 
 shows the belief of its members in the Lord God, 
 the Supreme Ruler of Heaven and Earth. It is but 
 right and just that the Knights and Daughters of 
 Tabor should set apart one Sunday in each year to 
 unite their voices in prayer and thanks that He has 
 preserved our Order. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The third Sunday in the month of June 
 of each year is hereby fixed as the day for the 
 Knights and Daughters of Tabor to assemble and 
 have an Annual Sermon preached. The members 
 of Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents are 
 required to meet together that day, and make a 
 united service to God. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The members can turn out in full re- 
 galia, or in undress regalia, as may be decided by 
 their various Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and 
 Tents. 
 
 Sec. 4. — In large cities, where the members are 
 too numerous to all meet in one church, they can 
 divide and hold the services in two churches of 
 different denominations at the same hour. 
 
 ARTICLE VI. 
 
 Sec. 1. — Every Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 nau^t formulate a plan for building halls^ and iuajst 
 
63 
 
 that the Temples and Tabernacles working under 
 its jurisdiction build or buy a suitable hall to hold 
 their meetings in. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Every Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 must know that all Temples and Tabernacles take 
 care of their sick, distressed or disabled members, 
 and that the weekly benefits are paid regularly. 
 
 Sec. 3. — Every Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 must impress on the members that, when they start 
 on a journey, they must take traveling certificates 
 and monthly cards from Temples or Tabernacles, 
 to show that they are in good standing, and warn 
 all Temples and Tabernacles that they must not re- 
 ceive strangers without their certificates, cards and 
 Quarterly Pass. 
 
 Halls. 
 
 The halls used by the Knights and Daughters of 
 Tabor must be dedicated within three months after 
 they are occupied. Secret meetings in private 
 houses are positively prohibited. 
 
 International Deputies. 
 
 1. The business of the International Deputies is 
 to organize Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and 
 Tents in any part of the civilized world. 
 
 2. When they make an organization, they shall 
 report that organization, if it is within the borders 
 of a Grand Temple and Tabernacle, to the Chief 
 Grand Mentor for a charter. 
 
 3. When they make an organization in any State, 
 Territory or Province, where there is no Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle organized, the Deputy shall 
 
64 
 
 report to the International Grand Chief for a 
 charter. 
 
 4. An International Deputy Grand Mentor must 
 be a member in good standing in a Temple of the 
 Knights of Tabor, and is amenable to the laws the 
 same as any other member. When his membership 
 ceases, his commission is revoked. 
 
 5. An International Grand Deputy must be a 
 member in good standing in a Tabernacle of Saba 
 Meroe Priestesses, and is amenable to the laws the 
 same as any other member. When her membership 
 ceases, her commission is revoked. 
 
 6. — International Deputies, or Past International 
 Deputy Knights or Daughters, shall be members 
 of the International Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 as long as they remain in good standing in a Tem- 
 ple or Tabernacle. , 
 
 International Districts. 
 
 The International Grand Chief may, for the con- 
 venience of the members, organize and arrange 
 International Districts. These Districts shall not 
 conflict with the Grand Temples and Tabernacles, 
 or prevent them from making organizations in such 
 Districts. The Districts shall be represented in the 
 Triennial Grand Session by their District Grand 
 Mentor and District Grand Preceptress. These Dis- 
 tricts shall bo required to conform to the Laws and 
 Rules of the International Order of Twelve. 
 
 Suspensions and Expulsions. 
 
 When a member is suspended or expelled from a 
 Temple or Tabernacle by due process of law, the 
 
65 
 
 member s'lall remain suspended or expelled, as the 
 case may be, until restored to membership by the 
 same Temple or Tabernacle, or by the Grand Tem- 
 ple and Tabernacle; provided, however, that if the 
 Temple or Tabernacle becomes defunct before the 
 suspended or expelled member is restored, the 
 member can apply by petition to the Grand Session, 
 which is authorized to restore the member (if after 
 an investigation they are found worthy), and give a 
 transfer. 
 
 Members of the International Grand Temple 
 AND Tabernacle. 
 
 The membership of the International Grand Tem- 
 ple and Tabernacle shall be as follows: 
 1. — Chief Mentors and Past Chief Mentors. 
 2. — Chief Preceptresses and Past Chief Preceptresses. 
 3. — Presiding Princes and Past Presiding Princes. 
 4. — Vice-Princes3es and Past Vice-Princesses. 
 5. — Queen Mothers and Past Queen Mothers. 
 6. — International Deputy Grand Mentors. 
 7. — Past International Deputy Grand Mentors. 
 8. — International Grand Deputies. 
 9. — Past International Grand Deputies. 
 
 To continue their membership in the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle, they must be and 
 remain members in good standing in their Temples 
 or Tabernacles. 
 
 Members of Grand Temples and Tabernacles. 
 
 The members of Grand Temples and Tabernacles 
 shall be as follows : 
 
 1. — Chief Mentors and Past Chief Mentors. 
 2. — Chief Preceptresses and Past Chief Preceptresses. 
 (3— Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
66 
 
 3. — ^Presiding Princes and Past Presiding Princes. 
 
 4. — Vice-Princesses and Past Vice-Princesses. 
 
 5. — Queen Mothers and Past Queen Mothers. 
 
 6. — Deputy Grand Mentors and Past Deputy Grand 
 
 Mentors. 
 7. — Deputy Grand Preceptresses and Past Deputy Grand 
 
 Preceptresses. 
 To continue their membership in the Grand Tem- 
 ples and Taberhacles, they must be and remain 
 members in good standing in their Temples or Tab- 
 ernacles. 
 
 Honorary Members. 
 
 The only department in the International Order 
 of Twelve that has the authority to make honorary 
 members is the Temples and Tabernacles, and they 
 are permitted under the following instructions to 
 honor a member of their Temple or Tabernacle: 
 First, the member to receive this honor must be an 
 old member, for years in good standing, and one 
 who has been active in building up the Order. If a 
 Temple desires to invest one of their members with 
 this honor, it will require a unanimous vote of all 
 the members who are present at a regular meeting. 
 If a Tabernacle desires to honor a Daughter who is 
 a member of their Tabernacle, it can be done by a 
 unanimous vote of all the members present at a 
 regular meeting. An honorary member is entitled 
 to all the benefits and privileges of a contributing 
 member. 
 
 The Unity of the International Order of 
 Twelve. 
 
 The Ritualistic work of the Order is unchange- 
 able and uniform, the same everywhere; new de- 
 
67 
 
 grees cannot be added or new signs and tokens be 
 given, except it is so ordered by amending the 
 General Laws. To add to the Eitualistic work, or 
 to make a new degree or degrees for any of the 
 departments, will require the unanimous vote of 
 every Temple and Tabernacle in the affimative, and 
 the unanimous vote of every Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle, when in Grand Session. The Triennial 
 Grand Session may, when satisfactory evidence is 
 given that it is the unanimous desire of every mem- 
 ber of the International Order of Twelve to add new 
 degrees, signs, words and tokens to the Ritualistic 
 work, the Triennial Grand Session is authorized to 
 prepare such degrees, by appointing a committee 
 to draft the degrees, signs, words or tokens, and 
 submit their work to the next Triennial Grand 
 Session ; then, if approved by the unanimous vote 
 of the Triennial Grand Session, said degree or de- 
 grees, signs, words and tokens shall be lawful. 
 
 Full Uniform. 
 
 Within three months after the Uniform Rank of 
 Tabor or the Fourth Degree in the Temple is con- 
 ferred, the member must have his full uniform, as 
 follows : Helmet, sword and belt, gloves and gaunt- 
 lets, cap, cup and badges. A Knight failing to 
 comply with this law, shall be and stand suspended 
 until he has his full uniform. If a C. M. fails 
 to enforce this law, the C. G. M. is authorized to 
 remove him from office and appoint another C. M. 
 This law is to be enforced when the Temple is one 
 year old. The members of every Temple that is 
 one year old must have their full uniform. 
 
68 
 
 777— THE ORGANIZATION— 333. 
 
 The International Order of Twelve, of Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor, was organized in the City 
 of Independence, State of Missouri, August the 
 12th, A. D. 1872. This is the birthday of the 
 Order, and is hereby set apart as the proper day to 
 celebrate. It is the Taborian day — a day to be 
 remembered. 
 
INSTALLATION 
 
 OF 
 
 lNTE[[NAT10NjlL GRAp 0FFICEI|S. 
 
 FULL CEREMONIES. 
 
INSTALLING CEREMONY 
 
 OF 
 
 1NTEI[NATI01(AL GRAt(D OFFIGEI[S. 
 
 :o: 
 
 The installing ceremony is performed by a Past 
 International Chief Grand Mentor, or a Present or 
 Past Chief Grand Mentor. 
 
 When the time arrives to install, the I. G. Drill- 
 Master (or Marshal, who is appointed for that oc- 
 casion) receives the Jewels, or badges of office from 
 each officer, and places them on the altar. The 
 Marshal forms the officers elected and appointed in 
 a semi-circle around the altar, the International 
 Chief and International Preceptress elect in the cen- 
 ter of the circle, and the other officers on each side 
 of them, according to the roll of office. The band 
 plays until the installing ceremony is ready to com- 
 mence.) 
 
 The Marshal salutes the installing Grand Officer, 
 and says : Sir Grand, I have the high honor of pre- 
 senting to you these Sir Knights and Daughters of 
 Tabor, who have been regularly elected to fill the 
 several offices in the International Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle of the International Order of Twelve 
 /or the ensuing term. I also present to you the ap- 
 
 70 
 
71 
 
 pointed officers ; they nil have signified their readiness 
 to enter upon their official duties. 
 
 The Installing Grand to Marshal: — Sir Marshal, 
 please form the Sir Knights and Daughters in a cir- 
 cle around these elected and appointed officers. (A 
 doable circle is formed, the Daughters forming the 
 inner and the Knights the outer circle.) 
 
 Sir Grand to the officers elect: — Sir Knights and 
 Daughters of Tabor, you have been honored by 
 receiving the suffrage of the members of the In- 
 ternational Grand Temple and Tabernacle ; you have 
 been elected to the hiofhest offices that are in the 
 gift of the International Order of Twelve. We are 
 here to invest and entrust to your care the responsi- 
 bility of conducting the business and work of the 
 Knights and Daughters of Tabor. The honor, 
 stability and perpetuity of the Order are to be placed 
 in your charge. I admonish you to vigilantly guard 
 every avenue, and be ready to meet and repel any 
 danger that would deter or obstruct our Order in 
 fulfilling its mission for the benefit of mankind. It 
 becomes my duty to administer to you an obligation 
 that all International Grand Officers have taken be- 
 fore they were installed. If you are willing and 
 ready, place your right hands on your hearts and re- 
 peat your full names, and say after me: 
 
 Obligation . 
 
 I, , do solemnly promise that I 
 
 will defend and support the International Constitu- 
 tion and General Laws of the International Order 
 of Twelve. I will faithfully attend to the duties of 
 the office that I am about to be installed in. — In 
 8olo Deo jSalusf 
 
72 
 
 The Grand : — Sir Knights, uncover; let us Knights 
 and Daughters unite in prayer with the Grand 
 Orator. 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 Almighty and Everlasting God, in the name of 
 Jesus, Thine Only Begotten Son, our Savior, we 
 come unto Thee. We confess our many sins and 
 omissions of duty unto Thee, Thou who art full of 
 mercy and love to mankind, and have given to us 
 the inestimable privilege of coming unto Thee at all 
 times to plead for pardon and forgiveness. Hear 
 us at this hour and let the light of Thy Godly Pres- 
 ence illumine our hearts, and in the name of Jesus 
 fit us and prepare us that we may worship Thee in 
 the beauty of holiness. We come to Thee, our 
 Heavenly Father to ask Thy blessings for the mem- 
 bers of the International Order of Twelve, wherever 
 they are dispersed around the world. In an especial 
 manner bless these Knights and Daughters of Tabor 
 that are about to be invested with the governing 
 power of the International Grand Temple and Tab- 
 ernacle. Oh Lord, endow them with wisdom, that 
 they may be enabled to carry forward the business 
 of the Order to Thy honor and glory, and for the 
 best interests of its members and for the benefit of 
 humanity. Direct us in all our ways, and prosper 
 the work of the Order in the hands of these Grand 
 Officers. May Thy Godly and Fatherly care and pro- 
 tection accompany us all through life. This we 
 humbly beg, in the name of Thy Exalted Son, Jesus 
 Christ, our Lord, Redeemer and Savior. — In Solo 
 Deo Salusf 
 
73 
 
 Response by the members: Amen! Honor and 
 Glory to God ! One rap, and all are seated — Music. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knights, cover. 
 
 The Marshal then places the elected Grand Chief 
 in proper position, and says : 
 
 Sir Grand, I present to you Sir , 
 
 who has been elected International Chief Grand 
 Mentor, and is now ready for installation. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knight, you have been chosen 
 by the members of this Triennial Session to the 
 most exalted position in the gift of the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle. You have my con- 
 gratulations upon your elevation to that eminent 
 station; you will find your official duties in the 
 Constitution and General Laws of the International 
 Order of Twelve. I now invest you with the Jewel 
 of your office. Be faithful to the Taborian Knight- 
 hood. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badge to the left breast of 
 the Most Faithful Grand Chief, and conducts him to 
 the Grand Seat in the South. 
 
 Instructions to the International Chief Grand 
 Preceptress. 
 
 Marshal : — Sir Grand, I present to you Daughter 
 
 , who has been elected International 
 
 Chief Grand Preceptress, and is now ready to be 
 installed. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Most Faithful Daughter, you have 
 been elected by the members of this Triennial Ses- 
 sion to the most exalted position that is given to a 
 Daughter of the Tabernacle. Your duties in the 
 International Grand Temple and Tabernacle you 
 will find in the Constitution and General Laws of 
 
74 
 
 the International Order of Twelve. I now invest 
 you with the Jewel of your office. Be faithful to 
 every duty that is required of you in your eminent 
 station. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badge to her left breast, 
 and seats her at the left side of the I. C. G. M. 
 
 Sir Grand gives three raps, and all stand. He 
 then says : — By virtue of the power and authority 
 as Installing Officer, I now and here declare that 
 Sir is regularly installed Interna- 
 tional Chief Grand Mentor of the International 
 Order of Twelve, of Knights and Daughters of 
 Tabor. 
 
 All repeat after the Grand: We Declare/ and 
 give one clap. (This is repeated three times. ) 
 
 Sir Grand: — By virtue of the power and author- 
 ity as Installing Officer, I now and here declare 
 
 that Daughter is regularly installed 
 
 International Chief Grand Preceptress of the Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve, of Knights and Daugh- 
 ters of Tabor. 
 
 All repeat after the Grand: We Declare/ and 
 give one clap. (This is repeated three times. ) 
 
 All say after the Grand : We welcome our In- 
 ternational Grand Chief/ and clap three times 
 three. 
 
 All repeat after the Grand: We welcome our 
 International Grand Preceptress/ and clap three 
 times three. 
 
 The Grand gives one rap, and all are seated. If 
 the International Grand Chief and International 
 Grand Preceptress desire to make any remarks, 
 this is the proper time. 
 
75 
 
 International Vice-Grand Mentor, and Inter- 
 national Vice-Grand Preceptress. 
 
 Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the honor of present- 
 ing to you Sir , who has been elected 
 
 International Vice-Grand Mentor, and Daughter 
 
 , who has been elected International 
 
 Vice-Grand Preceptress. They are now ready to 
 be installed. 
 
 Sir Grand:— Eight Faithful Sir and Right 
 Faithful Daughter, you have been elected by the 
 members of this Triennial Session to fill the impor- 
 tant duties of International Vice-Grand Mentor and 
 International Vice-Grand Preceptress. These posi- 
 tions are next in rank to the Presiding Grand 
 Officers'. You will find your duties fully laid down 
 in the International Constitution. I congratulate 
 you on the high position to which you have been 
 called in the order. You are hereby invested with 
 the Jewel of office. 
 
 The Marshal attaches the badges of office to their 
 left breasts, and seats them properly in the Nbrth. 
 
 International Chief Grand Scribe and Inter- 
 national Chief Grand Recorder. 
 
 The Marshal: — Sir Grand, I take pleasure in in- 
 troducing to you Sir , who has been 
 
 elected I. C. G. S., and Daughter , 
 
 who has been elected I. C. G. R. They are now 
 ready to be installed. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knight and Daughter, you have 
 been elected by the members of this Triennial Ses- 
 sion, and it shows the confidence they place in your 
 ability to perform the duties of these very impor- 
 
76 
 
 tant offices. You will find your instructions in the 
 International Constitution. Eead it carefully. I 
 now invest you with the Jewel of office. 
 
 The Marshal attaches the badges, and seats them. 
 
 International Chief Grand Treasurer. 
 
 The Marshal: — Sir Grand, I take pleasure in 
 
 introducing to you Sir , who has 
 
 been elected I. C. G. T. He is now ready for in- 
 stallation. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Sir Knight, you have been elected 
 by the members of this Triennial Session to an of- 
 fice of trust and responsibility ; it is an honor con- 
 ferred on you, and an evidence that the members 
 have confidence in your integrity. You will find 
 your duties in the International Constitution. Read 
 it carefully. I now invest you with the Jewel of 
 office. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badge, and seats him. 
 
 International Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 The Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the pleasure of 
 
 introducing to you Daughter , who 
 
 has been elected I. G. Q. M. She is now ready to 
 be installed. 
 
 Sir Grand : — ^Daughter, you have been elected by 
 the members of this Triennial Session to the very 
 distinguished position of International Grand Queen 
 Mother. The office is one of great usefulness, and 
 you will find pleasure in attending to its several du- 
 ties. The International Constitution will give you 
 the full instructions regarding your position. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badge of office, and seats 
 her in the East. 
 
77 
 
 International Chief Grand Orator and Inter- 
 national Chief Grand Priestess. 
 
 The Marshal : — Sir Grand, I am pleased to intro- 
 duce to you Sir , who has been 
 
 elected I. C. G. 0., and Daughter , 
 
 who has been elected I. C. G. Ps. They are now 
 ready for installation. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knight and Daughter, you have 
 been elected by the members of this Triennial Ses- 
 sion to the honorable offices of I. C. G. O. and I. 
 C. G. Ps., these are high and sacred positions to 
 which you have been called ; may you be thoroughly 
 furnished and abundantly provided for the good 
 work. Your duties are found in the International 
 Constitution. I now invest you with the Jewel of 
 your office. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badges of office, and seats 
 them in the West. 
 
 International Grand Inner Sentinel. 
 
 The Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the pleasure of 
 
 presenting to you Daughter , who 
 
 has been elected I. G. I. St., and is now ready to 
 be installed. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Daughter , you have 
 
 been elected to the very important position of I. 
 G. I. St. I admonish you to be zealous in your 
 duties. You will find your instructions in the In- 
 ternational Constitution. I now invest you with 
 the Jewel of your office. Please be seated. 
 
 International Grand Drill-Master. 
 The Marshal: — Sir Grand, i^ gives me pleasure 
 to present to you Sir , who has 
 
78 
 
 been elected I. G. D.-M., and is now ready for in- 
 stallation. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knight, your election to the re- 
 sponsible office of I. G. D.-M. is proof of the con- 
 fidence that is reposed in your ability to discharge 
 the duties of the office. You will find your instruc- 
 tions in the International Constitution. I now in- 
 vest you with the Implements of your office and 
 the Jewel. Please be seated. 
 
 International Grand Color Bearer. 
 
 The Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 
 presenting to you Sir , who has 
 
 been appointed I. G. C. B., and now ready to be 
 installed. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knight, you have been ap- 
 pointed International Grand Color-Bearer. The 
 office is one of honor, and requires courage. Your 
 duties are fully laid down in the International Con- 
 stitution. I now invest you with the Jewel of 
 office. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badge, and seats him. 
 
 International Chief Grand Sentinel. 
 
 The Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the pleasure of 
 
 presenting to you Sir , who has been 
 
 appointed International Chief Grand Sentinel. He 
 is now ready to be installed. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Sir Knight, you have been honored 
 with the appointment of International Chief Grand 
 Sentinel. It is an office of great responsibility. I 
 admonish you to be vigilant in your several duties. 
 You will find your instructions in the International 
 
79 
 
 Constitution. Be faithful. I now invest you with 
 the Jewel of office and Sword of defense. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badge, and seats him. 
 
 International Chief Grand Guards. 
 
 The Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 presenting to you Sir Knights (gives each of their 
 names). They are now ready for installation. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knights, you have been ap- 
 pointed to the honorable position of International 
 Chief Grand Guards. Be punctual to the trust that 
 is given to you, that you may merit the approval of 
 the members of the International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle. You will find your instructions in the 
 International Constitution. I now invest you with 
 the Jewel of office. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badges, and seats them. 
 
 International Chief Grand Judges. 
 
 The Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 introducing to you Sir Knights (gives their names), 
 and Daughters (gives their names), who have been 
 appointed International Chief Grand Judges, and 
 are now ready to be installed. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Sir Knights and Daughters, you have 
 been appointed to the exalted office of International 
 Chief Grand Judges. This distinguished position 
 is one that requires a thorough knowledge of the 
 Laws governing the Order. You will find your in- 
 structions in the International Constitution and 
 General Laws. I now invest you with the Jewels 
 of office. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badges, and seats tkem. 
 
80 
 
 International Chief Grand Tribunes. 
 
 The Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 presenting to you Daughters (gives their names). 
 They have been appointed International Chief 
 Grand Tribunes, and are now ready to be installed. 
 
 Sir Grand : — I am pleased to hear that you are 
 appointed to the honorable offices of International 
 Chief Grand Tribunes. This high position is one of 
 dignity and usefulness. May you fill its duties with 
 honor. You will find your instructions in the In- 
 ternational Constitution. I now invest you with the 
 Jewels of office. 
 
 The Marshal affixes the badges, and seats them. 
 
 Singing, or music by the band. 
 
 After the music has finished, the Sir Grand gives 
 three raps ; all Knights and Daughters stand, except 
 those that have just been installed. 
 
 Closing Ceremony. 
 
 The Sir Grand gives three claps, and says : By 
 virtue of the authority in me vested as Installing 
 Grand Officer, I now and here declare that the Offi- 
 cers of the International Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle have been regularly installed and inducted into 
 their several official positions for the ensuing Inter- 
 national Grand Temple and Tabernacle term. 
 
 All the members repeat after the Sir Grand: We 
 Declare/ We Declare// We Declare/// 
 
 All give claps, three times four. 
 
 The Sir Grand gives one rap, and all are seated. 
 
 Singing or music by the band. 
 
81 
 
 Oration. 
 
 The I. C. G. M. gives three raps, and all stand. 
 He says : By virtue of the authority in me vested, 
 I now declare the International Triennial Grand Ses- 
 sion from work to rest, until the next Triennial Ses- 
 sion, unless special business makes it necessary to 
 call an Extra Session. If so, all the members will 
 be officially notified. 
 
 *'Home, Sweet Home,'* is sung or played by the 
 band. 
 
 The I. C. G. M. then gives one rap. 
 
Knights^Tabor 
 
 llllJI'ERMTlONAL 
 III BORDER OF 
 
 IIII B 
 
 BADGE OP KNIGHTS OF TABOR. 
 
 83 
 
FORM QF GRAND TEMPLES AND TABERNACLES. 
 
 I. G. Officers, 
 
 oooooooo 
 
 p. G. Officers. 
 
 C. G. J.s 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 OR 
 
 • 
 
 ® 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 • 
 
 T. 
 
 and 
 
 T. 
 
 • 
 
 5? 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 G. D.-M. 
 
 G. C. B, 
 
 !^ 
 
 C5 
 
 C. G. St. 
 
 bd 
 
GRAND TEMPLE AND TABERNACLE OFFICER'S 
 JEWEL. 
 
 Twenty-seven Grand Officers— Each Jewel with Initials 
 ol Office. 
 
 84 
 
85 
 
 AETICLE VII. 
 
 GRAND TEMPLE AND TABERNACLE OFFICERS. 
 
 Section. 1. — The official titles of the officers of 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall be as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 1.— Chief Grand Mentor.— C. G. M. 
 2.— Chief Grand Preceptress.— C. G. P. 
 3.— Vice-Grand Mentor.— V.-G. M. 
 4. — Vice-Grand Preceptress. — V.-G. P. 
 5.— Chief Grand Scribe,— C. G. S. 
 6.— Chief Grand Recorder.— C. G. R. I 
 
 7.— Chief Grand Treasurer.— C. G. T. 
 8.— Grand Queen Mother.— G. Q. M. 
 9.— Chief Grand Orator.— C. G. O. 
 10.— Chief Grand Priestess.— C. G. Ps. 
 11.— Grand Drill-Master.— G. D.-M. 
 12.— Grand Inner Sentinel.— G. I. St. 
 The above officers are elected and installed at 
 each Grand Session. ^ 
 
 Sec. 2. — The following officers are appointed by 
 the C. G. M., and installed with the other officers: 
 1.— Grand Color Bearer.— G. C. B. 
 2.— Chief Grand Sentinel.— C. G. St. 
 3.— Chief Grand Guard.— C. G. G. 
 4.— Chief Grand Guard.— C. G. G. j 
 
 5.— Chief Grand Guard.— C. G. G. 
 
 1.— Chief Grand Judge.— C. G. J. 
 2.— Chief Grand Judge.— C. G. J. 
 3.— Chief Grand Judge.— C. G. J. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The C. G. P. appoints the following 
 Beers — all D: 
 other officers : 
 
 officers — all Daughters — who are installed with the 
 
S6 
 
 1.— Chief Grand Judge.— C. G. J. 
 2.— Chief Grand Judge.— C. G. J. 
 3.— Chief Grand Judge.— C. G. J. 
 4.— Chief Grand Judge.— C. G. J. 
 
 1.— Chief Grand Tribune.— C. G. Te. 
 2.— Chief Grand Tribune.— C. G. Te. 
 3.— Chief Grand Tribune.— C. G. Te. 
 
 Sec. 4. — A Sir Knight must serve as Chief Men- 
 tor of a Temple one year, before he can be elected 
 and installed as Chief Grand Mentor. A Daughter 
 must serve as Chief Preceptress of a Tabernacle 
 one year, before she can be elected and installed as 
 Chief Grand Preceptress. A Daughter must serve 
 one year as Queen Mother of a Tent, before she 
 can be elected and installed as Grand Queen 
 Mother. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 must make a constitutional provision defining the 
 number of votes to be cast in each department, and 
 who shall have the right to vote. 
 
 Sec. 6. — A Sir Knight cannot be elected and 
 installed as C. G. M., unless he is a member in 
 good standing in a Temple. A Daughter cannot be 
 elected as C. G. P., unless she is a member in good 
 standing in a Tabernacfe. 
 
 Sec. 7. — All the officers in the Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle must be and remain members in 
 good standing during their terms of office, in a 
 Temple or Tabernacle. If they lose their member- 
 ship in either of these departments, they forfeit 
 their offices. 
 
ARTICLE VIII. 
 
 DUTIES OF GRAND OFFICERS. 
 
 Section 1. — TheChief Grand Mentor shall preside 
 at all Sessions of the Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle. He shall have authority to call Special Ses- 
 sions when he decides it is needed, or when re- 
 quested to call a Session by a two-thirds of the 
 Temples and Tabernacles. He must enforce the 
 laws, decide all questions of law or points of order, 
 and appoint officers pro-tem. in case of the ab- 
 sence or disqualification of the officer elected or 
 regularly appointed. He can give permission, by 
 dispensation, to Temples, Tabernacles and Pala- 
 tiums, to reduce the constitutional fee for receiving 
 members for thirty, sixty or ninety days. He can 
 give dispensations for public turn-outs and enter- 
 tainments, and for Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 and Tents to continue work when their charters or 
 warrants are lost. He can grant a charter or war- 
 rant upon proof that they are destroyed or lost. 
 He can organize Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 and Tents in person, or by commissioned Deputies. 
 He can constitute new Temples, Tabernacles, Pala- 
 tiums and Tents by charter or warrants. He can 
 install the officers, dedicate halls and lay corner- 
 stones, either in person or by deputy. He can 
 visit Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents at 
 any time when he deems it necessary. He must 
 appoint all committees not otherwise ordered. He 
 must open and close the Grand Session without a 
 motion. He must issue the Quarterly Pass to all 
 Temples and Tabernacles. He must make an 
 
ss 
 
 annual report to the Grand Session of the condition 
 of all the Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and 
 Tents. He must sign all warrants and other papers 
 that require his signature to make them legal. 
 
 Sec. 2. — He must furnish new Temples, Taber- 
 nacles, Palatiums and Tents with charters or war- 
 rants, and books and blanks. He must report 
 monthly, to the C. G. S., the names and numbers 
 of all new Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and 
 Tents, with the names and addresses of the C. M., 
 C. P., P. P. and Q. M., and with the monthly re- 
 port he must pay to the C. G. S. all moneys that 
 he has received for charters, warrants, books and 
 blanks. 
 
 Sec. 3. — He can suspend a Temple, Tabernacle, 
 Palatium and Tent, if he decides it is necessary for 
 the good of the order. He can revoke the suspen- 
 sion at any time, or order them to meet the Grand 
 Session for trial. 
 
 Sec. 4. — He can suspend a Chief Mentor, Chief 
 Preceptress, Presiding Prince or a Queen Mother 
 when a grave charge is made against either by two- 
 thirds of their members, and order them to trial 
 either before a committee of peers or before the 
 Grand Session. In the event that a presiding 
 officer is suspended, the C. G. M. must fill the 
 vacancy by appointment; provided j there is no Vice 
 to fill it. 
 
 Sec. 5. — He can give the Degrees of the Tem- 
 ple, Tabernacle and Palatium to any distinguished 
 person or persons at will, and have them enrolled 
 as members in any Temple, Tabernacle or Palatium 
 within the boundaries of his State and jurisdiction. 
 
89 
 
 This, however, will not constitute them honorary 
 members. 
 
 Sec. 6. — When he visits any Temple, Taber- 
 nacle or Palatium within his State and jurisdiction, 
 his traveling expenses and per diem must be paid 
 by the organization which he visits. He can pre- 
 side in any Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium and Tent 
 which he honors with a visit. 
 
 Sec. 7. — He shall decide all questions or points 
 of the State laws or rules. His decisions are final, 
 until reversed by his successor, or by the Trien- 
 nial Session. 
 
 Sec. 8. — He can appoint Special Grand Deputies 
 to represent him in any Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle, or for the transaction of any business in his 
 own State and jurisdiction. 
 
 Sec. 9. — He can appoint as many Deputy Grand 
 Mentors and Deputy Grand Preceptresses as he 
 may need for organizing. 
 
 Chief Grand Preceptress. 
 
 Sec. 10.— It shall be the duty of the C. G. P. to 
 assist the C. G. M. when he is presiding, and pre- 
 side during his temporary absence from the Chair. 
 She has the authority to organize and set up Taber- 
 nacles, Palatiums and Tents. She is authorized to 
 install the officers of Tabernacles and Palatiums. 
 She is authorized to make an annual visit to all 
 , Tabernacles in her State and jurisdiction that need 
 instruction, and have her traveling expenses and 
 per diem paid by the Tabernacles that she visits. 
 She must correspond with all the Chief Precep- 
 tresses in her State and jurisdiction, on the condi- 
 
90 
 
 tion and prospects of the Order. The commissions 
 of Deputy Grand Preceptresses must have her sig- 
 nature to make them legal. It is her duty to make 
 a full report to the Grand Session, annually, of her 
 -^flScial business, and with the report make such 
 recommendations as she believes to be for the best 
 interests of the Order, and the success of Taber- 
 nacles. 
 
 Vice-Grand Mentor. 
 
 Sec. 11. — In the absence of the C. G. M. and 
 the C. G. P., the Vice-Grand Mentor shall preside 
 over the business of the Grand Session. In case of 
 the death, mental inability or removal out of the 
 State and jurisdiction, or lawful disqualification of 
 the C. G. M. during the interim between the Grand 
 Sessions, the V.-G. M. shall attend to all the of- 
 ficial business of the C. G. M., until another is 
 duly elected and installed. 
 
 Vice-Grand Preceptress. 
 Sec. 12. — It shall be the duty of the Vice-Grand 
 Preceptress to perform the duties of the C. G. P. 
 in the absence of that officer from the Grand Ses- 
 sion ; and in case of the death or lawful disqualifica- 
 tion of the C. G. P. during the time between the 
 Grand Sessions, the V.-G. P. must attend to all the 
 business of the C. G. P., until another is duly 
 elected and installed. 
 
 Chief Grand Scribe. 
 
 Sec. 13. — The Chief Grand Scribe shall have the 
 
 custody and control of the records of the Grand 
 
 Temple and Tabernacle, and preserve all official 
 
 papers ; he shall also have authority to provide his 
 
91 
 
 office with all necessary books and stationery to 
 enable him to perform his duties ; he shall keep a 
 journal of the business of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle, and the proceedings of the Grand Ses- 
 sion; he shall keep a register of all Temples, 
 Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents, with date of 
 charter and warrant, name of the town or city, 
 county and State where they are situated ; he shall 
 keep a record of all members of the Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle ; he shall keep in his office a copy 
 of the seal of each subordinate Temple, Taber- 
 nacle, Palatium and Tent; he shall receive and 
 give notice to all the subordinate Temples and 
 Tabernacles of all rejected candidates, and of mem- 
 bers that have been suspended or expelled; he 
 shall attend to and carry on the correspondence of 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and give notice 
 to the Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents 
 when and where to meet the Grand Session; he 
 shall perform such other duties as are assigned to 
 him by the Grand Temple and Tabernacle; he 
 shall receive all moneys coming to the Grand Tem- 
 ple and Tabernacle, and pay them over to the Chief 
 Grand Treasurer without delay, taking his receipt 
 therefor; draw all warrants on the Grand Treas- 
 urer, and attest them ; keep his accounts ready for 
 examination at any time; he shall, at the expira- 
 tion of his term of office, deliver to his successor 
 all books, papers, warrants, charters, rituals, 
 blanks and other property belonging to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
92 
 
 Chief Grand Eecorder. 
 Sec. 14. — It is the duty of the C. G. R. to assist 
 the C. G. S. in taking the proceeding of the Grand 
 Session, and to help him in arranging the proceed- 
 ings for the printer, and to attend to such other 
 business as may be assigned to her by the Grand 
 Session. 
 
 Chief Grand Treasurer. 
 
 Sec. 15.— It shall be the duty of the Chief Grand 
 Treasurer to receive all moneys and valuables be- 
 longing to the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and 
 keep a correct account of the same ; he shall pay 
 all warrants when duly signed by the Chief Grand 
 Mentor, and countersigned by the Chief Grand 
 Scribe ; he shall make an annual report to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle of the business of his office ; 
 his books shall be open for the inspection of the 
 Chief Grand Mentor, or any committee that he may 
 appoint, at all times; he shall give to the Chief 
 Grand Scribe a receipt for all moneys he receives ; 
 his books shall show the amount of moneys re- 
 ceived and paid out; he shall give a statement, in 
 writing, at the Grand Session, exhibiting the 
 amounts of his receipts and the amounts of his dis- 
 bursements, and for what purpose the money was 
 drawn ; at the expiration of his term of office he 
 shall deliver all books, papers and moneys belong- 
 ing to the Temple and Tabernacle to his successor. 
 
 Grand Queen Mother. 
 Sec. 16. — It shall be the duty of the Grand Queen 
 Mother to correspond with all the Queen Mothers 
 in the State and jurisdiction, and receive their re- 
 
93 
 
 ports of the condition of their Tents, with the num- 
 ber of children in each Tent. It is her duty to visit 
 a Tent when requested by the Queen Mother, and 
 give needed instructions. It is also her duty to re- 
 port annually to tiie International Grand Queen 
 Mother the number of Tents, with the number of 
 children in the Tents. She shall report to the 
 Grand Session, and make any recommendation that 
 will be for the good of the Tents. She is author- 
 ized to organize Tents, and install the Officers of 
 Tents of Maids and Pai^^es of Honor. 
 
 Chief Grand Orator. 
 
 Sec. 17.— It shall be the duty of the Chief Grand 
 Orator to lead the devotional exercises of the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, and perform the functions 
 of a Chaplain on all public and private occasions. 
 It is his duty to preach the sermon at the Annual 
 Grand Session. 
 
 Chief Grand Priestess. 
 
 Sec. 18.— It shall be the duty of the Chief Grand 
 Priestess to assist the Chief Grand Orator during 
 the opening and closing of the Grand Session. 
 
 Grand Drill-Master. m 
 
 Sec. 19. — It shall be the duty of the Grand 
 Drill-Master to conduct the drill exercises during 
 the Grand Session, and to act as Marshal in the 
 public turn-outs of the Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle. He must arrange the hall for the Grand 
 Session, and shall give instructions to the Chief 
 Drill-Masters of Temples, when requested. 
 
94 
 
 Grand Inner Sentinel. 
 Sec. 20.— It is the business of the G. I. St. to 
 have charge of the Inner Door of the Grand Ses- 
 sion, and to admit none but members who are prop- 
 erly clothed and have' the Pass. She must report 
 to the Vice-Grand Mentor the names of all who de- 
 sire admittance. 
 
 Grand Color Bearer. 
 Sec. 21.— It shall be the duty of the Grand 
 Color Bearer to guard and protect the banner of 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and to unfurl 
 and carry it on all public turn-outs of the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Chief Grand Sentinel. 
 Sec. 22.— The Chief Grand Sentinel shall have 
 charge of the outer entrance of the Grand Session. 
 He shall admit none but members of the Order 
 during the Session. He is to inspect all who seek 
 admission, and see that they are properly clothed 
 and have the proper Pass. 
 
 Chief Grand Guards. 
 Sec. 23.— It is the duty of the Chief Grand 
 Guards to assist the Presiding Grand Officer in 
 keepmg order during the Grand Session. They 
 are the messengers of the Grand Session, and shall 
 attend to any business entrusted to them, under the 
 orders of the Presiding Grand Officer. 
 
 Chief Grand Judges. 
 Sec. 24.— The Board of Chief Grand Judges 
 shall consist of seven members — four Daughters 
 iind three Sir Knights— whose duty it is to examine 
 
95 
 
 all complaints and charges that come before the 
 Grand Session. They shall investigate the charges 
 and complaints when referred to them by the 
 Grand Session. They have authority to call wit- 
 nesses before them for examination. The C. G. S. 
 must place in the hands of this Board all the i)apers 
 and documents relating to any case coming before 
 them. This Board shall investigate all appeals 
 and grievances that come before the Grand Session, 
 and report to the Grand Session their findings in 
 all charges, complaints, appeals and grievances. 
 The first named on the Board is the Chairman. 
 The Board organizes by electing a Secretary. 
 
 Chief Grand Tribunes. 
 Sec. 25. — It is the business of the Chief Grand 
 Tribunes to assist the Chief Grand Guards in keep- 
 ing order during the Grand Session, and to attend 
 to the duties of messengers, under the direction of 
 the Presiding Grand Officer. 
 
 ARTICLE IX. 
 
 BOARD OF GRAND CURATORS. 
 
 Section 1. — The Board of Grand Curators shall 
 consist of the Chief Grand Mentor, Chief Grand 
 Preceptress, Chief Grand Scribe, Chief Grand Re- 
 corder and Chief Grand Treasurer. They shall be 
 the incorporators of the Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle. The incorporation shall be held in their 
 name. All donations, devises or gifts for the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle, or for the benefit of 
 any subordinate Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 pr Tents shall be made to them. The^ shall invest 
 
96 
 
 in such stocks, loans or securities, the funds of the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle, as the Grand Ses- 
 sion may direct. They shall call in, sell and realize 
 on such loans, stocks and investments, under the 
 orders of the Grand Session ; collect interest, div- 
 idends, rents and all money arising or accruing 
 from any investments belonging to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle ; pay all money that they 
 collect to the C. G. S., or, if for the benefit of a 
 subordinate Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium or Tent, 
 they shall pay to the C. S., C. K., P. P. or Q. M. 
 The C. G. M. shall be Chairman of the Board. 
 The Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall furnish the 
 Board with such books and stationery as they may 
 need. They shall make an annual report to the 
 Grand Session of all their business, and, at the ex- 
 piration of their term of office, shall deliver to their 
 successors all books, securities, deposits, stocks, 
 papers, deeds and moneys belonging to the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle, or to Temples, Tab- 
 ernacles, Palatiums and Tents. 
 
 ARTICLE X. 
 
 TRUSTEES. 
 
 Section 1. — The Vice-Grand Mentor, Grand 
 Queen Mother, Chief Grand Orator, Chief Grand 
 Priestess and Grand Drill-Master shall be the Trus- 
 tees of the Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Trustees shall audit the accounts 
 of the Board of Grand Curators, also the accounts 
 of the Chief Grand Scribe and Chief Grand Treas- 
 urer, at each Grand Session, and give a full report 
 to the Grand Session, 
 
97 
 
 Sec. 3. — All officers of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle, who are required to give bond for the 
 faithful discharge of their duties, shall deliver the 
 same to the Trustees and their successors. All 
 bonds must be drawn up in legal form, and when 
 approved by the Trustees of the Gi and Temple and 
 Tabernacle, they shall be of binding force during 
 the Temple and Tabernacle year. All bonds must 
 be renewed immediately after the closing of the 
 Grand Session. 
 
 ARTICLE XI. 
 
 BONDS. 
 
 Section 1. — The Chief Grand Scribe and Chief 
 Grand Treasurer shall, before entering upon the 
 duties of their offices, give a bond, with ample se- 
 curity, to the Board of Trustees, for the faithful 
 application of all moneys belonging to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, in accordance with the 
 laws or orders of the Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The amount of the bond shall be fixed 
 by the Grand Session, with such securities as may 
 be approved by tlie Board of Trustees. The bond 
 shall be secured by two or more persons, who own 
 unincumbered real estate of double the value of the 
 amount of the bond given. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall 
 have power to increase or diminish the bond at 
 every Grand Session. 
 
 (4 — Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
9S 
 ARTICLE XII. 
 
 WIDOWS AND ORPHANS. 
 
 Section 1. — A Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 shall create and sustain a fund for the benefit of 
 Sir Knights' widows and orphans, and the orphans 
 of Daughters of the Tabernacle. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Grand Session shall, within three 
 years after the organization of the Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle, form and set to work this depart- 
 ment, and place it under the control and manage- 
 ment of the Board of Grand Curators. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The assessment, against the Knights and 
 Daughters shall be liberal and sufficient to meet the 
 requirements of the good name of the Order. The 
 assessments shall be collected from each Temple 
 and Tabernacle quarterly. Temples and Taber- 
 nacles are hereby made responsible for the non- 
 payment of assessments of their members. 
 
 Sec. 4. — Payment to widows and orphans shall 
 be made quarterly, in accordance with the regula- 
 tions made by the Grand Session. These regula- 
 tions must be carefully drawn for the government of 
 this fund so as to insure the regular payment of the 
 quarterly allowances for the widows and orphans, 
 and for the collection of the assessments. 
 
 Sec. 5. — When a widow or orphan removes from 
 the jurisdiction of the Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle, the Board of Grand Curators can, for this 
 reason, refuse to pay the allowance, but if thev have 
 good reasons for paying it, and consider it for the 
 best interests of the Order, they may continue the 
 payment. 
 
99 
 
 Sec. 6. — When a widow marries, her allowance 
 ceases. When an orphan arrives at the age of fif- 
 teen years, the allowance is discontinued. 
 
 Sec. 7. — The above is submitted to the Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles only as a form to draw a 
 widows' and orphans' plan upon; provided, they 
 prefer this to the Taborian Endowment. 
 
 Sec. 8. — All Grand Temples and Tabernacles 
 must have some kind of a benefit — either a Widows' 
 and Orphans' Fund, or a Taborian Endowment. 
 
 ARTICLE XIII. 
 
 GRAND TEMPLES AND TABERNACLES. 
 
 Section 1. — The Grand Temples and Taber- 
 nacles are hereby invested with full authority to 
 make their own Constitutions, By-Laws and Rules 
 for their own Government, but they are not to con- 
 flict with the International Constitution or General 
 Laws. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Full power is given to the Grand Tem- 
 ples and Tabernacles to conduct their business. 
 The International Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 cannot interfere with I heir business in any form, so 
 long as they do not trespass upon or conflict with 
 the International Constitution or General Laws. 
 
 ARTICLE XIV. 
 
 membership of the GRAND TEMPLES AND TABER- 
 NACLES. 
 
 The membership of Grand Temples and Taber- 
 nacles shall be as follows : 
 
 1. — Chief Mentors and Past Chief Mentors. 
 
100 
 
 2. — Chief Preceptresses and Past Chief Pre- 
 ceptresses. 
 
 3. — Presiding Princes and Past Presiding Princes. 
 4. — Vice-Princessei^ and Past Vice-Princesses. 
 5. — Queen Mothers and Past Queen Mothers. 
 6. — Grand Deputies and Past Grand Deputies. 
 
 ARTICLE XV. 
 
 MEMBERSHIP VOTE. 
 
 Section 1. — The Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 Constitution must arransfe and blate the number of 
 votes each Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium and Tent 
 shall have, and what shall be a Past Officer's vote. 
 
 Sec. 2. — A majority of all votes cast shall be 
 Decessary to elect a Grand Officer. 
 
 ARTICLE XVI. 
 
 POWER, STRENGTH AND PERPETUITY. 
 
 Just as long as the International Order of Twelve 
 holds together, it will prosper and be a blessing to 
 its members. It is so jointed and arranged that no 
 part can be taken out without weakening the whole 
 fabric. It is just like a wheel. The International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle is the hub, the 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles are the spokes, 
 and the Constitution and General Laws are the 
 tires that bind the Order into one compact body, 
 and make the membership a unit. The Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve, of Knights and Daugh- 
 ters of Tabor, is not a monarchy, but it is a Republic, 
 and as it is governed by its members, it has a 
 Central and State Government. The Temples, Tab- 
 ernacles, Palatiums and Tents form the State Gov- 
 
101 
 
 ernments, and the Grand Temples and Tabernacles 
 form the Central Government. 
 
 ARTICLE XYII. 
 
 AMENDMENTS. 
 
 This part of the General Laws can be amended 
 or altered in the following manner: First, the 
 amendment or alteration must be read in the Trien- 
 nial Session. If three-fourths of the members 
 present vote for it, it is recommended; it is then 
 published in the Triennial Proceedings. Second, 
 it is read in each Grand Session of the Grand Tem- 
 ples and Tabernacles, and if all of the members of 
 the Grand Session vote for it, it is then published 
 in the Proceedings, and the Temples, Tabernacles 
 and Palatiums are ordered to vote on the amend- 
 ments or alterations. If three-fourths of the mem- 
 bers of the Temples, Tabernacles and Palatiums 
 vote for it, and it is so reported at the Grand Ses- 
 sions, then if all of the Grand Temples and Taber- 
 nacles adopt said amendments or alterations, and it 
 is so reported to the International Grand Session, 
 and, if adopted by an unanimous vote of the same, 
 the amendments or the alterations become a law. 
 
 PENALTY. 
 
 There is no effective law without a penalty. In 
 a trial of members and conviction, when the law 
 does not name the penalty, it shall be the duty of 
 the C. M., if it is a Temple, or the C. P., if it is a 
 Tabernacle, to name the penalty and declare the 
 sentence. 
 
102 
 
 For disobeying the laws of the Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle, when the law does not name the 
 penalty, the C. G. M. shall name the penalty and 
 declare the sentence. 
 
 For disobeying or neglecting to obey the General 
 Laws, when there is no penalty named in the law, 
 the International Chief Grand Mentor shall name 
 the penalty and declare the sentence. 
 
 Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents, dis- 
 obeying and failing to obey an edict or the laws, 
 shall be notified by the C. G. M. that if they do. 
 not comply with the edict or law within thirty days 
 after notice is given by him, that he will arrest 
 their charters and suspend their members, and fix 
 the duration of their suspension. 
 
 The I. C. G. M. is authorized to name the pen- 
 alty in case Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and 
 Tents, working under the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, fail to obey an edict or th« 
 laws. 
 
A KNIGHT'S FANCY BADGE, 
 
 103 
 
INSTALLATION CEREMONY 
 
 or THE 
 
 Gn_AND Temple ai^d Tabernacle Officeijs. 
 
 104 
 
INSTALLING CEREMONY 
 
 OF 
 
 GRAND OFFICKRS. 
 
 : o :- 
 
 The Grand Officers may be installed by any C. 
 G. O., C. G. M., Past C. G. M., I. C. G. M. or 
 Past I. C. G. M. 
 
 The Installing Officer shall be addressed as 
 Sir Grand. The Presenter or Introducer is ad- 
 dressed as Grand Marshal. 
 
 When ready to install, the Grand Marshal shall 
 form all the officers elected and appointed around 
 the altar. The Jewels are laid on the altar. The 
 officers to be installed are so placed that the Knight 
 and Daughter to be installed together will be side 
 by side. 
 
 When the Grand Marshal has everything in 
 readiness, he shall salute the Installing Officer and 
 say : — Sir Grand, I have the honor to present to 
 you these officers. They have been duly elected 
 and appointed to serve in the several offices of the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle for the ensuing 
 term. They have signified their willingness to 
 enter upon their official duties. 
 
 105 
 
10^ 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knights and Daughters, you are 
 about to be invested and inducted into the several 
 offices of the Grand Temple and Tabernacle. The 
 responsible positions to which you hav^e been elected 
 and appointed by the members, shows the con- 
 fidence they repose in your integrity^ and ability to 
 successfully conduct the business of the Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor. It becomes my duty to 
 administer to you an oath which all former Grand 
 Officers have taken previous to being installed. 
 Are you willing? 
 
 Answer: — We are ready. 
 
 Sir Grand: — You will now take the Manual in 
 your right hands, place it upon your breasts, and 
 repeat your names, and say after me : 
 
 Oath. 
 
 I , do sacredly promise that I 
 
 will sustain the laws of the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, of the Knights and 
 Daughters of Tabor, and the Constitution, By- 
 Laws and Rules of the Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle, I will attend to the duties of my office faith- 
 fully, and with all the ability I possess. Amen ! 
 
 Sir Grand — (Gives three raps, all stand): Sir 
 Knights and Daughters, we are about to commence 
 the business of the International Order of Twelve, 
 for another Taborian year. It is but meet and 
 right that we should implore the blessings of God 
 upon our work. Let us bow our heads, and unite 
 in prayer with the Chief Grand Orator. Sir 
 Knights, uncover. 
 
107 
 
 Pkayer. 
 
 Almighty God, who, through Thine Only Begot- 
 ten Son, Jesus Christ, hast overcome death, and 
 opened unto us the gate of everlasting life, we 
 humbly beseech Thee that, as by Thy special grace 
 helping us. Thou dost put into our minds good de- 
 sires, so by Thy continual help we may bring the 
 same to good effect. In particular, we implore 
 Thy grace and protection for the ensuing year. 
 Keep us temperate in our meats and drinks, and 
 diligent in our several callings. Grant us patience 
 under any afflictions Thou mayest see fit to lay upon 
 us, and let our minds always be contented with our 
 present condition. Give us grace to be just and up- 
 right in all our dealings, quiet and peaceable, full 
 of compassion, and ready to do good to all men, ac- 
 cording to our abilities and opportunities. Direct 
 us in all our ways, and prosper the works of our 
 hands in the business of our several stations. De- 
 fend us from all dangers and adversities, and be 
 graciously pleased to take us, and all things be- 
 longing to us, under Thy fatherly care and protec- 
 tion. These things, and whatever else Thou shalt 
 see necessary and convenient to us, we humbly beg, 
 through the merits and mediation of Thy Son, 
 Jesus Christ, our Lord and Savior. Amen ! 
 
 Response. — In Solo Deo 8alusl 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knights, cover (he gives one 
 rap, and all are seated. — Music or Singing. ) 
 
 Grand Marshal then places the C. G. M. and C. 
 G. P. elect in front of the altar, and says: — Sir 
 Grand, I have the honor to present to you Sir 
 
108 
 
 -^ , who has been elected C. G. M., and 
 
 Daughter , who has been elected C. 
 
 G. P. of the Grand Temple and Tabernacle for 
 
 and jurisdiction. Thej are now ready to 
 
 be installed. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Mentor. 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Sir, the evident 
 love you have for our beloved Order, and your in- 
 timate acquaintance with the duties of every de- 
 partment to work the laws, rules and regulations of 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, makes it unnec- 
 essary that I should repeat them at this time. The 
 high honor of this office has its weighty respon- 
 sibilities. Your authority will be respected by 
 every true Knight and Daughter; your commands 
 and orders will meet with ready obedience. Each 
 Taboiian Knight and Daughter will cheerfully sus- 
 tain you in your care over the interests of your 
 large jurisdiction. You will feel the necessity in 
 your daily life and actions to exemplify the excel- 
 lent teachings of our beloved Order — an example 
 that all Sir Knights will gladly follow. Be faith- 
 ful to the end. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Preceptress. 
 Sir Grand .-—Right Faithful Daughter, the Sir 
 Knights and Daughter Priestesses of the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle have expressed their con- 
 fidence in your ability to attend to the duties of C. 
 G. P., and your fidelity to the Order, by electing 
 you to the exalted position of Chief Grand Precep- 
 tress. You will find your duties and instructions in 
 the Constitution. Be faithful to the end. 
 
109 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Marshal, please invest theC. G. 
 M. and C. G. P. with their Jewels of office, and 
 seat them. 
 
 The Sir Grand gives three raps and all stand, ex- 
 cept the C. G. M. and C. G. P. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Sir Knights, Handle Swords ! Draw 
 Swords ! ! Present Swords ! ! ! Sir Knights and 
 Daughter Priestesses, let us salute our C. G. M. 
 and C. G. P. 
 
 The Knights lower and raise their swords, and 
 the Daughters raise and lower their right arms, as 
 they repeat the words after the Grand : We hail 
 our Chief Grand Mentor/// (This is repeated 
 three times. ) We hail our Chief Grand Pre- 
 ceptress// (This is repeated three times.) The 
 Knights, at the command of the Sir Grand, return 
 swords. All clap three times three. The Sir 
 Grand gives one rap, and all are seated. 
 
 Grand Marshal then places the V.-G. M. and V.- 
 G. P. elect in front of the altar, and says: — Sir 
 Grand, I have the honor to present to you Sir 
 
 , who has been elected Vice-Grand 
 
 Mentor, and Daughter , who has 
 
 been elected Vice-Grand Preceptress. They are 
 ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to the Vice-Grand Mentor. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Sir, the important 
 station to which the suffrage of your brother 
 Knights and Daughters has called you, demon- 
 strates the confidence that they have in your in- 
 tegrity and ability, nnd that you will faithfully dis- 
 charge the duties of the office. You are the near- 
 
110 
 
 est successor of the Chief Grand Mentor. Should 
 any unforeseen casualty happen to him, so as to 
 prevent him from fulfilling the duties committed to 
 his care, which the Lord forbid, you are to assume 
 the responsibilities and functions of that office. In 
 his presence, you are to assist him with counsel 
 and advice. I now invest you with the Jewel of 
 your office. Be faithful to duty. 
 
 Instructions to the Vice-Grand Preceptress. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Right Faithful Daughter, you have 
 been honored by the suffrage of the Knights and 
 Daughter Priestesses of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle with the honorable office of Vice-Grand 
 Preceptress. You will find your duties and instruc- 
 tion in the Constitution. Be faithful. I now in- 
 vest you with the Jewel of your office. Sir 
 Marshal, please seat the V.-G. M. and V.-G. P. 
 
 The Grand Marshal then places the C. G. S. and 
 C. G. E. in front of the altar, and says: — Sir 
 Grand, I take pleasure in introducing to you Sir 
 
 , who has been elected Chief Grand 
 
 Scribe, and Daughter , who has 
 
 been elected Chief Grand Recorder. They are now 
 ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Scribe. 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Sir, the useful and 
 honorable station that the voice of your brother 
 Knights and Daughters has called you to fill, shows 
 the confidence they repose in your ability to dis- 
 charge the duties of this most important office. 
 The position is one that recjuires prompt action and 
 punctuality, and a strict fidelity to matters and 
 
Ill 
 
 business appertaining to your several duties. I 
 have no doubt but that you will use due diligence 
 and correctness in the discharge of the important 
 duties committed to your care, so that benefit may 
 accrue to the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and 
 honor be awarded to you by the Sir Knights and 
 Daughters. I now invest you witli the Jewel of 
 your office. Be faithful to your duty. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Recorder. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Right Faithful Daughter, you have 
 been elected to the honorable office of Chief Grand 
 Recorder by the members of the Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle. You will find your duties and in- 
 structions in the Constitution. I now invest you 
 with the Jewel of your office. Be faithful to your 
 duty. Sir Marshal, you will please seat the C. G. 
 S. and C. G. R. 
 
 Grand Marshal: — Sir Grand, I now present to 
 
 you Sir , who has been elected Chief 
 
 Grand Treasurer. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Treasurer. 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Sir, the members of 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, in their choice 
 of you to the very responsible station of Grand 
 Treasurer, have proved the confidence they have in 
 your integrity and honor. The qualities that should 
 be found in the officer that fills this position are 
 honesty, accuracy and faithfulness. Be accurate 
 in keeping a fair account of all receipts and dis- 
 bursements, and be careful in preserving all the prop- 
 erty and moneys that may come into your hands, 
 with fidelity; render a just account of all your 
 
112 
 
 business with the Order, when called on by the 
 proper authority. I now invest you with the Jewel 
 of your office. Be faithful and prompt in the dis- 
 charge of the trust we now confide into your hands. 
 Sir Marshal, please seat the C. G. T. 
 
 Grand Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 
 introducing to you Daughter — , who 
 
 has been elected Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 Instructions to the Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Daughter, the mem- 
 bers of the Grand Temple and Tabernacle have en- 
 trusted to your care the important office of Grand 
 Queen Mother. You will find your duties and in- 
 structions in the Constitution. I now invest you 
 with the Jewel of your office. Take care of the 
 children of Mount Tabor. Sir Marshal, you will 
 please seat the Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 Grand Marshall: — Sir Grand, I have the pleasure 
 
 of presenting to you Sir Rev. , who 
 
 has been elected C. G. O. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Orator. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Sir; Reverend 
 Brother Knight, your high calling as a Christian 
 minister has prepared you for the duties to which 
 you have been elected. Your official duty is of the 
 highest importance to the Sir Knights and Daugh- 
 ters, and so interesting that it requires punctual 
 attendance at all meetings of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle. May you be thoroughly furnished and 
 abundantly provided for the good work. May you 
 be established and perfected in your holy order by 
 Him who presides and rules over the destinies of 
 
113 
 
 mankind, and sits as Supreme Grand Chief of the 
 Universe. I now invest you with the Jewel of your 
 office. Be thou faithful until your work is finished 
 on earth, and the Most Faithful Grand Chief of 
 the Heavenly Temple will give you a crown of life. 
 Sir Marshal, please seat the Chief Grand Orator. 
 Grand Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 
 presenting to you Daughter , who 
 
 has been elected Chief Grand Priestess. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Priestess. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Daughter, the hon- 
 orable office to which the Sir Knights and Daughter 
 Priestesses of the Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 have elected you, is one of highest dignity. You 
 will find your duties and instructions in the Con- 
 stitution. I now invest you with the Jewel of your 
 office. Be faithful to every duty. Sir Marshal, 
 please seat the Chief Grand Priestess. 
 
 Grand Marshal: — Sir Grand, I now present to 
 
 you Sir , who has been elected G. 
 
 D.-M. 
 
 Instructions to the Grand Drill-Master. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Right Faithful Sir, having been 
 elected to the important station of Grand Drill- 
 Master, you will find pleasure in the discharge of 
 your several duties. I admonish you to be zealous 
 and active in your teachings and instructions to the 
 Sir Knights, and take command of the Sir Knights 
 when on duty. I would remind you of the necessity 
 of diligence in the duties that devolve upon you. I 
 BOW invest you with the Jewel of your office. Be 
 thou a faithful soldier, and promptly discharge 
 
114 
 
 every command given to you. You will find your 
 duties and instructions in the Constitution. Sir 
 Marshal, please seat the Grand Drill-Master. 
 
 Grand Marshal: — Sir Grand, I take pleasure in 
 
 presenting to you Daughter , who 
 
 has been elected G. I. St. 
 
 Instructions to the Grand Inner Sentinel. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Right Faithful Daughter, you have 
 the high honor of being elected by the members of 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle to the important 
 station of Grand Inner Sentinel. You will find 
 you duties and instructions in the Constitution. I 
 now invenst you with the Jewel of your ofiice and 
 Staff of Defense. Guard the inner door faithfully. 
 Sir Marshal, please seat the G. I. St. 
 
 Grand Marshal : — Sir Grand, I present to you Sir 
 , who has been appointed G. C. B. 
 
 Instructions to the Grand Color Bearer. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Faithful Sir, your appointment to 
 the very important position of Grand Color Bearer 
 shows the confidence that is placed in your courage 
 and ability. You will find your duties in the Con- 
 stitution. I now invest you with the Jewel of your 
 office, and give into your care the Standard of the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle. Sir Marshal, please 
 seat the Grand Color Bearer. 
 
 Grand Marshal: — Sir Grand, I now present to 
 
 you Sir , who has been appointed 
 
 C. G. St. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Sentinel. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Right Faithful Sir, the responsibil- 
 ity of the station to which you have been appointed 
 
115 
 
 — ^that of Chief Grand Sentinel — cannot be over- 
 estimated. Holding the outpost, and guarding the 
 entrance of our sacred Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle, I admonish you to be vigilant and sleepless. 
 Look well to every avenue of approach. May you 
 have courage to keep every enemy at bay. Be kind 
 and courteous to all Sir Knights and Daughters 
 who hail the outer portals. I now invest you with 
 the Jewel of your office. Be thou faithful as a 
 watchman upon the outer lines, and give timely 
 warning of any approaching danger. Sir Mar- 
 shal, please seat the C. G. St. 
 
 Grand Marshal: — Sir Grand, I now present to 
 you Sir Knights (gives all their names), who have 
 been appointed C. G. G.s 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Guards. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Eight Faithful Sirs, you having been 
 appointed to the station of Chief Grand Guards, I 
 congratulate you upon the trust that is reposed in 
 your worthiness to attend to the important duties 
 pertaining to your office. You will, therefore, be 
 punctual in the observance of the several official 
 duties of the station, by which you will merit the 
 approval of your brother members, and the honor- 
 able commendation of all Sir Knights and Daugh- 
 ters. I now invest you with the Jewels of your 
 office. Be faithful to every duty. Sir Marshal, 
 please seat the Chief Grand Guards. 
 
 Grand Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 presenting to you Daughters (gives all their 
 names), who have been appointed C, G. Te.s 
 
116 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Tribunes. 
 
 Sir Grand : — Eight Faithful Daughters, the po- 
 sition that you have been appointed to requires the 
 closest attention to your duties. The Constitution 
 will give you full information. 1 now congratulate 
 you, and invest you with the Jewels of your office. 
 Be faithful to your trust. Sir Marshal, please seat 
 the Chief Grand Tribunes, 
 
 Grand Marshal : — Sir Grand, I now present to 
 you Sir Knights and Daughters (gives all their 
 names), who have been appointed C. G. J.s 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Grand Judges. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knights and Daughters, the 
 office that you have the honor of being appointed 
 to is one of great importance, and requires a close 
 study of the laws that govern the Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle. You will find your duties in the 
 Constitution. I now invest you with the Jewels of 
 your office. Be faithful to your official duties. 
 Sir Marshal, please seat the Chief Grand Judges. 
 
 Music or Singing. 
 
 Sir Grand gives three raps, and all stand, except 
 the officers that have just been installed. 
 
 Grand Marshal says: — Sir Knights, Daughter 
 Priestesses, Princes and Princesses, Maids and 
 Pages of Honor, Hear I Listen! ! and Receive the 
 Proclamation ! ! 1 
 
 Proclamation. 
 
 Sir Grand says : — By virtue of the authority in 
 me vested as Installing Grand Officer, I now and 
 here proclaim that the Grand Officers of the Grand 
 
117 
 
 Temple and Tabernacle, for the State of and 
 
 its jurisdiction, have been regularly installed into 
 their various official positions for the ensuing Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle year. 
 
 All the members that are standing, shall repeat 
 after the Sir Grand: We declare I We declare 1 1 
 We declare! ! ! and give claps three times four. 
 The Sir Grand then gives one rap, and all are 
 seated. 
 
 Music or singing. 
 
 Charge to Grand Officers. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Knights and Daughters, you have 
 been duly elected and installed, with the necessary 
 ceremonies, into the several stations of the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle. The duties of your various 
 positions you will find fully laid down in the Con- 
 stitution of the Order. While your work seems 
 separate and divided, it is really not so. In the erec- 
 tion of our Grand Temple and Tabernacle, a variety 
 of material is used. Workmen of separate callings 
 have their part to perform to make the building 
 complete. Just so we are building a Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle for the good and interests of human- 
 ity. The erection requires sundry talents and vari- 
 ous workmen, each in their several departments. 
 Collectively and individually you are to contribute 
 your part in the grand undertaking, so that, by a 
 union of action and a determination to do your 
 whole duty, our Order will continue to move for- 
 ward to power and usefulness. The past history of 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle is a gallant one. 
 Its record is clear and bright. That you will earn- 
 
118 
 
 estly strive to keep it so, I have no doubt. I ask 
 you to put your trust in the Lord of Hosts. He is 
 a tower of strength. By the faithful discharge of 
 your several duties, you will receive the hearty 
 approval of the Sir Knights and Daughters. May 
 God, the giver of every good and perfect gift, 
 guide and direct you in your labor of love. Take 
 the shield of faith and the sword of the spirit, and 
 the breast-plate of righteousness, which is the com- 
 mand of God. May peace and harmony, and faith 
 in the Lord Jesus Christ, be with you all forever. 
 Amen! 
 
 Kesponse; — In Solo Deo 8alusl 
 
 Music or singing. If there is any one who wishes 
 to deliver an oration, now is time for speaking. 
 
 C. G. M. gives three raps, and all stand; he then 
 says : — By virtue of the authority in me vested, I 
 now declare the Grand Session of the Grand Tem- 
 ple and Tabernacle from work to rest. **Home, 
 Sweet Homel" 
 

 No. 1. 
 
 No. 2. 
 
 No. 4. 
 
 No. 5. 
 
 No. 3. Palatium Tin. 
 
 KNIGHTS OP TABOR PINS AND EMBLEMS. 
 
 119 
 
TEMPLE HOUSE. 
 
 120 
 
OFFICERS 
 
 OF 
 
 Subordinate Temples 
 
 OF 
 
 KNIGHTS OF TABOK. 
 
 :o: 
 
 Section 1. — The Constitution of the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle must be strictly complied 
 with by all subordinate Temples. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The officers of the Temple shall be as 
 follows : 
 
 1. Chief Mentor, CM. 
 
 2. Vice-Mentor, V.-M. 
 
 3. Chief Scribe, C. S. 
 
 4. Assistant Scribe, A. S. 
 
 5. Chief Treasurer, C. T. 
 
 6. Chief Orator, CO. 
 
 7. Chief Drill-Master, C D.-M. 
 
 8. Chief Color Bearer, C C B. 
 
 9. Chief Guard, C G. 
 
 10. Chief Guard, C G. 
 
 11. Chief Guard, C. G. 
 
 12. Chief Sentinel, C St. 
 
 121 
 
TEMPLE OFFICERS' JEWELS-SILVER. 
 
 122 
 
^i ^^^M^tWSI^^ H^WWUt W ^'' 
 
 TABOBIAN ALTAR. 
 
 123 
 
'^«■3 
 
 INSTALLATION- CEREMONY 
 
 OF 
 
 TEMPLE OFFICERS 
 
 ■:o:- 
 
 The installation of the officers of a Temple can 
 be performed either in public or private. Any C. 
 M. or P. C. M., C. G. M. or P. C. G. M. shaU 
 have authority to install the officers. 
 
 PUBLIC INSTALLATION. 
 
 The Knights assemble in their hall. The Tem- 
 ple is opened in the Fourth Degree. The neces- 
 sary preparations are made, and instructions given. 
 After which the C. D.-M. forms the procession in 
 marching order, the Knights being in full dress and 
 regalia. If a Grand Officer or a Past Grand Of- 
 ficer is present, proper respect must be paid to him 
 or them. 
 
 The March 
 
 Shall be in the usual form, to the place where the 
 ceremony is to be performed. 
 
 The procession is marched three times around the 
 hall, the ranks are opened, and the officers are es- 
 corted through to the platform. 
 
 124 
 
125 
 
 The temple-house and altar are placed in front of 
 the Chief Mentor, in the center of the platform, 
 the officers to the right and left of the C. M. 
 
 The Sir Knights, if there is room for them, are 
 in the immediate rear of the officers. If there is 
 not sufficient room on the platform, they are placed 
 in the immediate front of the stage. 
 
 Ladies' Tabernacle. 
 
 If the Daughters join in the procession in the 
 hall, they march in the rear of the Sir Knights. 
 The Tribunes' place is in the rear of the Daughters. 
 
 The officers of the Tabernacle are seated on the 
 platform to the right and left of the Temple Of- 
 ficers. If there is room, the other Daughters are 
 seated immediately in the rear; if not, they are 
 seated in the rear of the Sir Knights in front of the 
 stage. All are seated. 
 
 The Ceremony. 
 
 Music; or, if there is no band, the following 
 hymn is sung: 
 
 OUR KING. 
 
 I. 
 
 The Lord Jehovah reigns; 
 
 His throne is built on high; 
 The garments he assumes 
 
 Are light and majesty. 
 His glories shine with beams so bright, 
 No mortal eye can bear the sight. 
 
 II. 
 The thunders of His hand 
 
 Keep the wide world in awe; 
 His wrath and justice stand 
 
 To guard His holy law; 
 And where His love resolves to bless, 
 Hi3 truth confirms and seals the grace. 
 
126 
 
 The Chief Mentor calls up the Knights and 
 Daughters, and the Sir Chief announces the bus- 
 iness that is to be transacted, and states that the 
 duties that devolve upon the officers about to be in- 
 stalled are so important, that it is of the greatest 
 concern that the guidance and blessing of our King, 
 the Mighty Jehovah, remain with them. Our Chief 
 Orator will now address the Almighty Father, our 
 Sovereign Commander, in prayer. 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 O Lord, Thy mercy, our sure hope, 
 
 The highest orb of heaven transcends; 
 Thy sacred truth's unmeasured scope 
 Beyond the spreading sky extends. 
 
 Thy justice, like the hills, remains; 
 
 Unfathom'd depths Thy judgments are; 
 Thy providence the world sustains; 
 
 The whole creation is Thy care. 
 
 Direct us, O Lord, in all our doings, with Thy 
 most gracious favor, and further us with Thy con- 
 tinual help, that in all our works begun, continued, 
 and ended in Thee, we may glorify Thy Holy Name, 
 and finally by Thy mercy obtain everlasting life, 
 through Jesus Christ, our Lord, who hath taught us 
 to pray unto Thee, O Almighty Father, in His pre- 
 vailing name and words. Amen I Amen ! I 
 
 All are seated. Music; or the following hymn is 
 sung. 
 
 THE THREE MOUNTAINS. 
 
 I. 
 
 When on Sinai's top I see 
 God descend in majesty, 
 To proclaim His holy law, 
 All vay spirits sink with awe» 
 
127 
 
 When in ecstacy sublime 
 Tabor's glorious mount I climb, 
 In the too transporting light, 
 Darkness rushes o'er my sight. 
 
 II. 
 When on Calvary I rest, 
 God in flesh made manifest 
 . Shines in my Redeemer's face, 
 Full of beauty, truth and grace; 
 Here I would forever stay, 
 Weep and gaze my soul away. 
 Thou art heaven on earth to rae, 
 Lovely, mournful Calvary. 
 
 The Chief Drill-Master, under the instructions of 
 the Sir Chief, forms all the Sir Knights that are 
 to be installed in line in front of the stage, and 
 says : — Faithful Sir, I have the honor to present 
 
 to you the officers elect of Temple, No. — . 
 
 They are now ready to be installed. 
 
 The Sir Chief will draw his sword, and order 
 the officer elect to draw and lay the sword across 
 their breast, with the point resting on the side of 
 the left shoulder, the left hand on the right breast, 
 and repeat the following 
 
 Oath of Office. 
 
 I, , do most solemnly and sincerely 
 
 promise, upon the word of a Taborian Knight, that 
 I will, to the best of my ability, faithfully discharge 
 and fulfill the duties of the office to which I have 
 been elected. I will support and maintain the Con- 
 stitution, By-Laws, Eules and Kegulations of this 
 Temple, and the Constitution and By-Laws, and 
 Regulations and Edicts of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle, and the Constitution and General Laws 
 of the International Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
128 
 
 Instructions. 
 The Sir Chief then says : — Sir Knights, you hav- 
 ing been elected to the important and responsible 
 duties of the several offices in this Temple, we with 
 pleasure enter upon the duty of installing you, be- 
 lieving that you will attend to the interests of the 
 Temple, and Conduct the business of your stations 
 with fidelity. You will study to improve the use- 
 fulness of our Order, realizing the importance of 
 the trust that is committed to your care by your 
 confiding brethren. A firm reliance on the teach- 
 ings, as you find them laid down in our laws, and 
 the practice of those virtues that are inculcated in 
 our rites, and an implicit confidence in the Lord of 
 Lords, will so d"rect you in the relation in wiiich 
 you are about to be inducted, that you will reflect 
 honor upon your Temple and credit to yourselves. 
 
 The Charter. 
 
 The charter is presented, and read by the C. O., 
 and its powers explained by ftie Sir Chief. The Sir 
 Knights are seated, and the C. D.-M. introduces the 
 C M. elect to be installed. 
 
 The C. D.-M. says .-—Faithful Sir, I take pleasure 
 
 in presenting to you Sir Knight , 
 
 who has been elected to the office of Chief Mentor 
 of Temple, No. — . He is prepared for in- 
 stallation. (His sword, cap and jewel are laid on 
 the altar. ) 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Mentor. 
 
 The Sir Chief says :— Sir Knight , 
 
 before you are inducted into this important office, 
 you will please answer the following questions rela- 
 
129 
 
 tive to the ofBce. If ^ ou object to any question, or 
 cannot comply with the request, frankly state your 
 objection, and it will relieve you from the respon- 
 sibilities of the office, and another must be found to 
 fill the station : 
 
 THE TEST. 
 
 Ques. — Do you solemnly promise, upon your ob- 
 ligation as a Knight of Tabor, that you will not 
 open the Temple for business unless the charter 
 and a constitutional quorum, not less than seven 
 members, is present? 
 
 Ans. — T do. 
 
 Ques. — Will you execute the Laws, Rules and 
 Regulations of the Temple with fidelity? 
 
 Ans. — I will. 
 
 Ques. — Will you support and obey the Constitu- 
 tion, By-Laws, Rules and Regulations, and Edicts 
 of the Grand Teinple and Tabernacle, under whose 
 authority you hold your office? 
 
 Ans. — I will. 
 
 Ques. — Will you endeavor to correct the irreg- 
 ularities, purify the morals, inculcate charity, teach 
 benevolence and true friendship, and promote 
 happiness and harmony in your Temple? 
 
 Ans. — I will. 
 
 Ques. — Will you preserve the Ritualistic work 
 unalterable, — the solemn ceremonies and instruc- 
 tions, — and continue them, as Chief Mentors have 
 done before you ? 
 
 Ans. — I will. 
 
 Ques. — Will you promise that you will not admit 
 into you Temple a man who has not been knighted 
 (5— Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
130 
 
 in {I n'izuliir Temple, nor one who has been ex- 
 pelled or su.<pended? 
 
 Ans. — I will. 
 
 Ques. — Do you acknowledge that it is impossible 
 to have intercourse with a Temple that does not 
 work under a charter from the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle of the International Order of Twelve? 
 
 Ans. — I do. 
 
 Ques. — Do you believe that every Sir Knight 
 has a right to his religious opinion, and that you 
 will promise not to permit any denominational dis- 
 cussions in the Temple ? 
 
 Ans. — I do. 
 
 Ques. — Will you support the Constitution, Rules, 
 Regulations and Ritualistic work of the Ladies' 
 Tabernacle? 
 
 Ans. — I will. 
 
 Ques. — Will you be careful upon whom you con- 
 fer the degrees, so that our Order may be com- 
 posed of good and true men only ? 
 
 Ans. — I will. 
 
 Ques. — Will you bind your successor in office to 
 observe the same test that you have taken ? 
 
 Ans. — I will. So help me God I 
 
 The Sir Chief then proceeds as follows: — You 
 will now permit me to cover your head with this 
 helmet, and present to you this sword. Its hilt ia 
 your hand reminds you that it is only to be dr.iwa 
 in defense of liberty, equality a id innocence. The 
 Jewel of your office I now invest you with. It is 
 composed <>f three perfect numbers. It is an appro- 
 priate emblem of our Order. It will continually 
 remind you of the great principles upon which our 
 
131 
 
 Order is perpetuated. I commit to your care the 
 charter of this Temple. You will carefully guard 
 it as a sacred power and authority that makes your 
 Temple legal. You will also transmit it to your 
 successor in office. I present to you the Constitu- 
 tion, the great instructor of the Knights. Open 
 this book in faith, and follow its teachings with- 
 out faltering or wavering, and you will exert an in- 
 fluence that will be an honor to yourself and a 
 blessing to the Knighthood. The Constitution of 
 the International Grand Temple and Tabernacle is 
 hereby presented to you, with the Constitution, 
 Kules and Regulations of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle. I admonish you to consult them dili- 
 gently, and cause them to be read in your Temple 
 frequently, so that all Sir Knights may be informed 
 of their duty. I now seat you in the official chair. 
 May the Lord, our King, protect and keep you in 
 the strict performance of your official dut}^ 
 
 THE SALUTE AND WELCOME. 
 
 The Sir Chief then says: — Sir Knights, I pre- 
 sent to you your Chief. 
 
 (The Knights rise, and present swords; salute, 
 and return swords. ) 
 
 Let us welcome our Chief. 
 
 (The Knights and Daughters give the honors, 
 and repeat the words ** We welcome, ^^ three times, 
 and give the clap seven times, with the words '^Be 
 faithful'') 
 
 The C. D.-M. presents the other officers in reg- 
 ular order, by saying: — Faithful Sir, I present Sir 
 Knight , who has been elected to the 
 
132 
 
 office of Vice-Mentor, and is now ready to be in- 
 stalled. 
 
 Instructions to the Vice-Mentor. 
 
 Sir Chief: — Sir Knight , you 
 
 have been elected to the office of Vice-Mentor of 
 
 Temple, No. — , and now invest you with the 
 
 Jewel of your office. Your duty is to fulfill the 
 duties of the Chief Mentor, when that officer is ab- 
 sent; and in his presence, you are to counsel and 
 aid him in the government of the Temple. You 
 will now be seated, and may you faithfully perform 
 your duty. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Scribe. 
 
 Sir Chief; — Sir Knight , you 
 
 have been honored by the suffrage of your breth- 
 ren to the very responsible office of Chief Scribe. 
 I take pleasure in presenting you with the Jewel of 
 your office. It is your duty to keep the books of 
 the Temple, as also the records and the roll of 
 members. You shall keep a regular account with 
 each member, and collect all dues, fines and other 
 moneys belonging to the Temple, and pay them 
 into the treasury. You shall record the doings of 
 each meeting plainly and neatly, and report to the 
 Temple, when called on, the condition of the treas- 
 ury. You shall draw all orders for money on the 
 treasury, and see that they are signed by the C. 
 M. and countersigned by yourself. It will be your 
 duty to make an annual report to the Grand Tem- 
 ple and Tabernacle, with a list of all the members. 
 You are also required to make a monthly report to 
 
laa 
 
 the Grand Chief of the condition of your Temple. 
 You will now be seated. Be thou faithful to duty. 
 
 Instructions to the Assistant Scribe. 
 
 Sir Chief : — Sir Knight — , you have 
 
 been elected Assistant Scribe, and I now invest you 
 with the Jewel of your office. It is your duty to 
 assist the Chief Scribe in the several duties of his 
 office, and in the absence of that officer you are to 
 perform his duties. You will be seated. May you 
 honorably fulfill the duties of your station. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Treasurer. 
 
 Sir Chief :— Sir Knight , by the 
 
 will of your brethren, you have been called to the 
 station of Treasurer of this Temple, and I now in- 
 vest you with the Jewel of your office. It is your 
 duty to receive all the moneys and valuables be- 
 longing to the Temple, and pay all warrants when 
 properly drawn. You shall keep a correct account 
 of all moneys received and paid out. You shall re- 
 port, when called upon by the C. M., the condition 
 of the treasury. You shall give a bond, to secure 
 the money of the Temple, to the C. M., C. O. and 
 C. S., for the faithful application of the Temple's 
 money, per Constitution — the amount of the bond 
 to be agreed upon at a regular meeting of the Tem- 
 ple. You shall give to your successor a written 
 statement of the condition of the treasury. You 
 shall, when your successor is qualified, turn over to 
 him all books, cash, papers and other property that 
 is in your possession. You will now be seated. 
 Let integrity, probity and faithfulness guide you. 
 
134 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Orator. 
 
 Sir Chief : — Sir Knight , you have 
 
 been elected to the high position of Chief Orator 
 of this Temple, and I now invest you with the 
 Jewel of your office. It is your duty to conduct 
 the devotional exercises of the Temple, to visit the 
 sick or disabled Knights and Daughters, and to at- 
 tend to the funeral ceremonies. , That you may be 
 thoroughly qualified for the work, I present you 
 this Holy Volume. Open and read it; it will give 
 you counsel and instruction. You will now be 
 seated. Be faithful. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Drill-Master. 
 
 Sir Chief : — Sir Knight , it is with 
 
 pleasure that I find that the brethren have honored 
 you by electing you to the station of Chief Drill- 
 Master. I now invest you with the Jewel of your 
 office and your Implement (sword) of duty. It is 
 your business to instruct the members in the march 
 and drill, and the Taborian sword exercise. Your 
 station is at the inner door, which I admonish you 
 to guard well during the time of business. You 
 will now be seated. Look well to your duty. 
 
 Instuctions to the Chief Color Bearer. 
 
 Sir Chief: — Sir Knight , I am 
 
 glad to know that the suffrage of your brethren 
 has placed you in the honorable position of Chief 
 Color Bearer of this Temple. I now invest you 
 with the Jewel of your office. I also present you 
 the Standard. It is the Banner of our Order. You 
 will carefully keep it, and defend it in the time of 
 danger. It is your duty to carry it on all public 
 
135 
 
 occasions, and in all processions. You will now be 
 seated. Guard well the Banner. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Guards. 
 Sir Chief: — Sir Knights, you have been elected 
 to the office of Chfef Guards, and the responsibility 
 of the position requires your constant attendance at 
 the meetings. I now invest you with the Jewels of 
 your office. It is your duty to assist the Chief 
 Mentor in giving the several degrees, and to pre- 
 serve order during the session of the Temple. You 
 will now be seated. Be faithful to every duty. 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Sentinel. 
 
 Sir Chief: — Sir Knight , you 
 
 have been elected to attend to the responsible duties 
 of Chief Sentinel, and I now invest you with the 
 Jewel of office. I also present to you this sword, 
 and admonish you to use it in defending the post 
 of duty. It is your duty to guard the outside door 
 of the Temple, under orders of the C. M. You 
 shall prepare and keep the Temple in proper order 
 for the meetings. You shall receive such compen- 
 sation for your services as may be awarded by the 
 Temple. You will now be seated. Look well to 
 your post. 
 
 Instructions to the Board of Attendants. 
 
 Sir Chief: — Sir Knights, you have been ap- 
 pointed a Board of Attendants. It shall be the 
 duty of the Board to have the oversight of all the 
 members of the Temple, and report to the C. M. 
 when a member is sick or disabled, and what at- 
 tendance the member needs. Your Board shall 
 
136 
 
 draw and pay the sick dues ; you shall notify, by 
 order of the CM., members who are detailed to sit 
 up with sick or disabled members. Your Board 
 shall arrange and prepare the funeral of a deceased 
 Knjorht. Your Board shall have the oversight of 
 Sir Knights' widows and orphans, and report their 
 condition to the Temple at every regular meeting. 
 Your Board shall keep a book and record its doings, 
 and it shall be your duty to report to the Temple 
 at the regular monthly meeting, what you have 
 done during the month. You will now be seated. 
 Be true to duty. 
 
 Instructions to the Board of Judges. 
 
 Sir Chief: — Sir Knights, you have been ap- 
 pointed a Board of Judges. This Is truly an im- 
 portant position, and one of great responsibility, 
 and requires that you should be well acquainted 
 with the laws of our Order. This Board shall con- 
 sist of five members, who shall be appointed by the 
 C. M. on the night he is installed. To this Board 
 shall be referred all matters of difference between 
 members, and all trials of members for any offense 
 whatsoever. This Board shall hold regular meet- 
 ings, and shall have the power to summons wit- 
 nesses for the plaintiff and defendant, and carefully 
 hear all sides, make up their decision, and report to 
 the Temple through their Secretary. The Temple 
 shall enforce their recommendation, and their action 
 shall be final when approved by the Temple. You 
 will now be seated. Let justice be your rule and 
 guide. 
 
137 
 
 The Sir Chief then makes the following pro- 
 clamation (all the Knights and Daughters standing, 
 except the installed officers) : 
 
 Proclamation. 
 
 By virtue of the power and authority in me vested, 
 
 I proclaim that the officers of Temple, No. — , 
 
 have been regularly installed, and are now ready 
 for duty for the ensuing term of office. (The seven 
 claps are given, with the words ^''Be faithfuL^^ 
 All are seated. ) 
 
 Music ; or the following him is sung : 
 
 GOLDEN HILL. 
 
 I. 
 
 Blest be the tie that binds 
 
 Our hearts in Christian love; 
 The fellowship of kindred minds 
 
 Is like to that above. 
 
 II. 
 
 Before our Father's Throne 
 
 We pour our ardent prayers; 
 Our fears, our hopes, our aims are one, — 
 
 Our comforts and our cares. 
 
 We share our mutual woes, 
 Our mutual burdens bear; 
 
 And often for each other flows 
 The sympathizing tear. 
 
 IV. 
 
 When we assunder part. 
 
 It gives us inward pain; 
 But we shall still be joined in heart, 
 
 And hope to meet again. 
 
138 
 
 V. 
 
 This glorious hope revives 
 
 Our courage by the way; 
 While each in expectation lives, 
 
 And longs to see the day. 
 
 VI. 
 
 From sorrow, toil and pain, 
 
 And sin, we shall be free; 
 And perfect love and friendship reign 
 
 Through all eternity. 
 
 If there is an oration to be delivered, this is the 
 proper time. After which the Knights and Daugh- 
 ters may partake of refreshments, and then the 
 Knights assemble, and march and drill. They then 
 march to their hall, close the Temple, and disperse. 
 
BURIAL SERVICE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 KNIGHTS OF TABOR, 
 
 139 
 
BURIAL SERVICE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 KNIGHTS ofTABOR 
 
 : o: 
 
 FORM OF rROCESSION. 
 
 Chief Sentinel. 
 Musicians. 
 Sir Knights. 
 M Chief Color Bearer. 
 
 -g Two Chief Guards, 
 
 g Yice-Mentor and Chief Orator. 
 ;=; Chief Treasurer. 
 
 p Past Chief Mentors. 
 
 'g Chief Guard. 
 
 g Chief Mentor. 
 
 Grand and Past Grand Officers. 
 Officiating Clergy. 
 
 
 03 
 PL, 
 
 Mourners. 
 
 Tabernacles. 
 140 
 
141 
 
 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 1. — A Sir Knight, to be buried with the full 
 honors, must be a Uniform Rank Knight, with the 
 T. D. P., and in good standing in his Temple. 
 
 2. — When notice of the death of a Sir Knight is 
 received, the Chief Mentor shall summons the Tem- 
 ple to convene, to prepare for the funeral. 
 
 3. — The Sir Knights must attend in full uniform, 
 with their sword-hilts and banner dressed in mourn- 
 ing, and Jewels of the officers in appropriate dress. 
 
 4. — On the casket of the deceased Sir Knight 
 will be placed his sword and helmet; if an officer, 
 his Jewel, clothed in black crape. 
 
 5. — The day on which the body is to be buried, 
 the Knights will assemble in their Temple and 
 march to the residence of the deceased, in the reg- 
 ular order, with swords reversed. The sword and 
 helmet of the deceased Knight is borne in the rear 
 of the Chief Mentor. On arriving at the house, 
 the lines open to the right and left. The bearer 
 passes to the casket, and places the sword and hel- 
 met on it. The pall-bearers (Sir Knights) take the 
 casket, and, led by the Chief Drill-Master, pass 
 down through the lines to the hearse. 
 
 6. — The procession is then formed, and marched 
 to the church or place of public worship. The 
 Knights will then enter in reversed order, preced- 
 ing the body, and the mourners following the body. 
 
 7. — The Chief Mentor presides during the serv- 
 ices, assisted by the Chief Orator. If Grand Of- 
 ficers or Past Grand Officers are present, they must 
 be placed in the procession according to their rank. 
 
142 
 
 8. — If the deceased be a Grand or a Past Grand 
 Officer, the Chief Mentor having jurisdiction will 
 invite the Grand Officers who are present to con- 
 duct the burial services. 
 
 9. — The pall-bearers should be. Sir Knights, se- 
 lected by the Chief Mentor. If the deceased was 
 a member of other secret orders, a portion of the 
 pall-bearers can be taken from them, per agree- 
 ment, they bearing a part of the funeral expenses. 
 
 10. — While the body is lying in state, there 
 should be two or more Sir Knights on duty near 
 the body, in full dress. 
 
 11. — The Temple of which the deceased was a 
 member must march nearest the body. If a so- 
 journer, then the Temple having charge of the 
 burial shall march nearest. Where more than one 
 Temple joins the procession, the youngest takes 
 the lead. 
 
 12. — When other civil and military societies 
 unite with the Knights in the burial, they shall 
 march in front of the Knights. 
 
 13. — When the head of the procession shall 
 arrive at the place of interment, the lines should be 
 opened, and the Chief Mentor, or the highest officer 
 in rank, preceded by the Chief Drill-Master, pass 
 through, followed by the others in order, into the 
 cemetery. On arriving at the grave or vault they 
 open ranks, and the casket is carried through to the 
 tomb or grave. The coffin is placed over the grave. 
 The Knights form a circle around it, with the 
 family at the foot, and the Chief Mentor, Chief 
 Orator, and clergy at the head. 
 
143 
 
 14. — At the church or place of worship, after 
 the church services over the body, the Temple's 
 services should begin, the Knights standing during 
 the service of prayer. 
 
 15. — The procession will return to the Temple in 
 the same order that it marched to the grave. A 
 Temple of Knights in procession is positively under 
 the rules of an open Temple; therefore, no Sir 
 Knight can enter or leave the ranks without per- 
 mission from the Chief Mentor, conveyed through 
 the Chief Drill-Master. 
 
 16. — Should the Tabernacle join the procession, 
 their carriages or vehicles will follow immediately 
 in the rear of the family. The Daughters shall 
 wear the same dress that they do at a Daughter's 
 burial. In the church, their seats are to the left of 
 the Knights. At the grave, they form around the 
 Knights, or at the foot of the grave. 
 
 17. — When the place of worship or church is not 
 convenient for a part of the services before going 
 to the grave, it may be performed at a more con- 
 venient place, or at the grave. 
 
 18. — The face of the deceased should be un- 
 covered, if possible, during the first part of the 
 ceremony, the Chief Mentor at the head of the 
 casket and the Chief Orator at the foot. The Sir 
 Knights must observe and attend to every command 
 given by the Chief Drill-Master or the Chief 
 Mentor. 
 
 The Funeral Service of Sir Knights at the 
 Church. 
 
 After the religious services are concluded, the 
 Sir Knio;hts will commence theirs. Present swords ! 
 
144 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 Chief Mentor: — Sir Knights, we are daily re- 
 minded of the great lessons of time and eternity. 
 We are mortal. Mortality is written upon all living 
 beings on earth. Man's days are short and fleet- 
 ing. One by one we pass the gates of death. We 
 are reminded to-day that we are born to die. The 
 great and unfailing truth that ded^h is sure, is de- 
 monstrated to our view at this sad and mournful 
 hour. The door of our Temple opened to receive a 
 messenger, and there was none to say: ''By what 
 right do you enter here?" A Brother Knight has 
 been summoned to appear before the Grand Chief 
 of the Universe. His light has been extinguished 
 in the earthly Temple. He lies mute before us. 
 No more will he meet us around the center square. 
 His voice, so ready in giving knightly greeting, is 
 silent. His hand cannot grasp his sword in defense 
 of innocence, justice and country. All that re- 
 mains of our beloved Brother Knight is his cold, 
 cold body, stilled in death. ( The Sir Knights rer 
 turn swords.) Sir Knights, let us attend, while 
 the Chief Orator reads to us from the lessons of the 
 Holy Scriptures. May the impressions fill us with 
 meekness and consolation, that we may be prepared 
 when the last of earth comes to us. 
 
 Chief Orator: — O Lord, remember the faithful 
 among the people, for the children of men fail on 
 earth. 
 
 Response: — Remember us, O Lord I 
 
 CO. : — There is not a just man on the earth who 
 doeth good and sinneth not. 
 
145 
 
 Res. : — Give ear, O Lord ! 
 
 C. O. : — Whatsoever God doeth, it shall be for- 
 ever; nothing can be put to it, nor anything taken 
 from it. 
 
 Res. : — Redeem us, O Lord! 
 
 C. O. : — Great are Thy tender mercies, O Lord; 
 quicken us according to Thy judgments. 
 
 Res. : — Redeem us, O Lord ! 
 
 C. O. : — We will lift our eyes unto the hills, from 
 whence cometh our help. Our help cometh from 
 the Lord, who made heaven and earth. He that 
 keepeth us will not slumber. 
 
 Res. : — The Lord is my keeper! 
 
 C. O. : — Give thanks unto the Lord, for He is 
 good ; because His mercy endureth forever. 
 
 Res. : — Give thanks unto the Lord ! 
 
 C. O. : — Lord, make us to know our end, and the 
 measure of our days, that we may know how frail 
 we are. There is but a step between us and death. 
 
 Res. : — Teach us, O Lord ! 
 
 C. O. : — God hath made of one blood all nations 
 of men, to dwell on the face of the earth, and hath 
 determined the times before appointed, and the 
 bounds of their habitation. 
 
 Res. : — Be nigh unto us, O Lord I 
 
 C. O. : — The righteous hath hope in his death. 
 Let me die the death of the righteous. Let my last 
 end be like his. 
 
 Res. : — Be merciful unto us, O Lord! 
 
 CO. : — I know that my Redeemer liveth, and that 
 He shall stand at the latter day upon the earth.. 
 
 Res. : — May we rest in hope ! 
 
146 
 
 CO. : — Christ died for us, whether we wake or 
 sleep. 
 
 Res.: — Lord, save us! 
 
 CM. : — Will the memory of our brother be for- 
 gotten among his brothers? 
 
 Res. : — We will never forget his manly form and 
 virtues. 
 
 C M. : — ShsAl his name be recorded in our Tem- 
 ple? 
 
 Res. : — It is recorded here (hand on heart). May 
 he have a clear record in the heavenly Temple. 
 
 C M. : — He was a true and trusted Knight, and 
 has passed from life's turmoils and struggles. May 
 his soul rest in peace I 
 
 Res. : — May he rest in peace and be happy ! ( The 
 Sir Knights cover.) 
 
 C M. : — Sir Knights, we are assembled to look 
 upon the last of our Brother Knight. No more 
 will our voices cheer him in this world of sorrow. 
 No more will he meet us in our pleasant retreat — 
 the Temple of our love on earth. Our swords 
 cannot now shield him from danger. The Chief 
 Sentinel's challenge will greet his ear no more. 
 He has hailed the entrance for the last time in our 
 Temple. To the Silent City of the Dead we all must 
 come at last. The manliest form, the bravest heart, 
 that surrounds this spot will be laid captive to 
 death, and bound in the chain of mortality. But he 
 who has been faithful to the teachings of the Chief 
 Mentor of Salvation — the Son of Righteousness — 
 can, by the will of the Sovereign Ruler of the 
 Universe, claim a place in the Eternal Temple of 
 Bliss, then mortality will only be laid aside to put 
 
147 
 
 on the glittering robe of eternal day, and dwell 
 with the royal, happy company in the Temple of 
 Eternal Light. Surely the sadness and solemnity 
 of this occasion are most forcibly felt by all present. 
 He who now sleeps in death was oar brother Knight. 
 With him we have met often around the hollow 
 square; with him we have formed the sacred chain 
 together; we have met life's trials and pleasures. 
 He is now gone beyond our protecting care. Him 
 whom we loved and honored, our presence here in 
 the dress of our Order proves that we revere his 
 memory. We are here to demonstrate our respect 
 for his many good qualities; over his errors and 
 faults, whatever they may have been, we cast the 
 mantle of forgetfulness. Sir Knights, each suc- 
 cessive death-call breaks the chain that binds us to 
 this lower world ; make us pause and reflect what 
 will be our future. If we would meet the Grand 
 Chief of Heaven and earth in peace and happiness, 
 we must have a clear passport from His hand. Then, 
 when the earthen vessel breaks, our souls will soar 
 away to blissful rest. 
 
 Response by the Knights: — In Solo Deo Salusf 
 
 This closes the ceremony in the church. After 
 taking a last look at the face of the deceased, the 
 benediction is pronounced. 
 
 The Drill-Master forms the Knights; they then 
 march out of the church to the place of interment 
 in the same order as before. 
 
 On arriving at the place, and having formed 
 around the grave (the casket resting over the 
 grave), the following hymn is sung: 
 
148 
 
 ^' My flesh also shall rest in hope.''^ . 
 I. 
 
 Rest for the toiling hand, 
 
 Rest for the anxious brow, 
 Rest for the weary, way-worn feet, 
 
 Rest from all labor now. 
 
 II. 
 
 Rest for the fevered brain, 
 
 Rest for the throbbing eye; 
 Through these parched lips of thine no more 
 
 Shall pass the moan or sigh. 
 
 III. 
 
 Soon shall the trump of God 
 
 Give out the welcome sound, 
 That shakes thy silent chamber-walls. 
 
 And breaks the turf-sealed ground. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Ye dwellers in the dust, 
 
 Awake! come forth and sing; 
 Sharp has your frost of winter been, 
 
 But bright shall be your spring. 
 
 V. 
 
 'Twas sown in weakness here ; 
 
 'Twill then be raised in power; 
 That which was sown an earthly seed, 
 
 Shall rise a heavenly flower! 
 
 The foUowiag prayer will then be made by the C. 
 C, or an extemporaneous prayer, if preferred by 
 him ; or a clergyman may be invited to pray. 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 Holy Lord God I Thou that presidest over the des- 
 tinies of man, in this hour of sorrow we humbly 
 lift our hearts to Thee. Thou hast mercifully pro- 
 claimed in Thy Holy Word that Thou wouldst com- 
 
■ 149 
 
 fort the mourner, and give consolation to the 
 troubled heart. We worship and adore Thee, 
 Maker of Heaven and Earth, for all things that 
 Thou hast given to us. Cleanse Thou the thoughts 
 of our hearts with the inspiration of Thy Holy 
 Spirit, that we may perfectly love Thee, and worth- 
 ily magnify Thy adorable name. Be Thou a father 
 to the fatherless, and a husband to the widow, and 
 as God administer consolation to those who are sor- 
 rowing this day. We have the evidence before us 
 how frail men are, and how uncertain our contin- 
 uance on earth is held. We are reminded that our 
 lives are but vapor. Oh, let the light of Thy di- 
 vine countenance shine upon us, and lead us by Thy 
 grace and spirit to turn our thoughts to things that 
 make our everlasting peace and happiness. 'May the 
 burning lamp of Thy pure love light our pathway 
 through the dark valley and shadow of death, that 
 we, by the commendation of Thy Beloved Son, our 
 Lord and Savior, may be enabled to gain admit- 
 tance to the Heavenly Temple above, and, in the 
 glorious presence of our Lord and Master, enjoy a 
 blissful immortality with the angelic host and the 
 redeemed of earth forever, through Jesus Christ, 
 our Lord. Amen ! 
 
 Response: — In God alone is safety! 
 
 The C. D.-M. removes the sword and cap from 
 the casket. The Knights present swords. It is 
 then lowered into the grave. 
 
 The CO. then says : — I am the resurrection and 
 the life. He that believeth in Me, though he were 
 dead, yet shall he live. Whosoever liveth and be- 
 lieveth in Me, shall never die. To the earth we 
 
150 
 
 commit the mortal remains of our deceased Brother. 
 May his soul rest in peace. Earth to earth. ( Cast 
 earth on the casket. ) Dust to dust. ( Cast again.) 
 Ashes to ashes. ( Cast again,) Until the morn of 
 the resurrection, when, like our risen Lord and 
 Savior, may he break every chain and bond of 
 death, and ascend to dwell forever in the sunshine 
 of heavenly beams. 
 
 Res. : — So may it be. Amen ! Amen ! ! 
 
 C. D.-M. : — Sir Knights, return swords. 
 
 The V.-M. then presents the sword of the de- 
 ceased to the C. M. 
 
 The C. M. then says : — Sir Knights, you will re- 
 member that our deceased Brother Knight was 
 taught while in life that this sword, in the hands of 
 a true and trusty Knight, was an emblem of manly 
 worth; in his grasp, he was to defend the innocent, 
 protect the weak, have mercy on the fallen, and aid 
 the distressed. Be true as steel to a Brother Knight. 
 Obey every order given from justice, and silently 
 admonish an erring Brother Knight. May the 
 sword of Divine Justice open the way, and permit 
 him to enter the blessed abode of saints and angels, 
 and, in their company and companionship, live for- 
 ever in the realms of eternal joy. 
 
 Res. : — Amen I So be it ! I Amen ! 1 1 
 
 The C. T. then presents the key to the C. O., 
 who says : 
 
 C. O. : — This symbol of truth reminds us of Him 
 who said: **I am the way. I am the door. No 
 man can come unto the Father but through Me. I 
 have the keys of death and the kingdom of heaven." 
 We place this upon the breast of our brother, there 
 
151 
 
 to remain as an evidence that he believed in the 
 Divine Being that has power to save to the utter- 
 most. May this hope of our brother in life safely 
 convey his immortal soul, and admit it to the 
 heavenly mansions, to rest forevermore. 
 
 Ees. : — Bless the Father ! Honor the Son ! ! 
 
 The C. O. casts the key into the grave. The 
 Knights uncover, and the C. O. repeats the follow- 
 ing prayer: — Our Father which art in heaven. 
 Hallowed be Thy name. Thy kingdom come. Thy 
 will be done on earth as it is in heaven. Give us 
 this day our daily bread ; and forgive us our tres- 
 passes, as we forgive those who trespass against us. 
 And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us 
 from evil. For Thine is the kingdom, and the 
 power, and the glory, forever. Amen ! 
 
 Res. : — In Solo Deo 8alus! 
 
 The Knights cover, and give the farewell salute 
 three times. Then they form the wall of steel, and 
 sing the following, or some other hymn, or the 
 band may play a solemn dirge : 
 
 Friend after friend departs. 
 
 Who hatii not lost a friend? 
 There is no union here of hearts 
 
 That finds not here an end; 
 Were this frail world our final rest, 
 Living or dying, none were blest. 
 
 II. 
 
 Beyond the flight of time, 
 
 Beyond this vale of death, 
 There surely is some blessed clime 
 
 Where life is not a breath, — 
 Nor life's affections transient fire, 
 Whose sparks fly upward to expire. 
 
15^ 
 
 III. 
 
 There is a world above, 
 
 Where parting is unknown, — 
 A whole eternity of love, 
 
 Formed for the good alone ; 
 And faiih beholds the dying here. 
 Translated to that happier sphere. 
 
 The C. O. pronounces the benediction, the lines 
 are formed, and they march back to their hall ; and, 
 after the business is finished, the Temple is closed. 
 
TABERNACLE HOUSE. 
 
 153 
 

 I DAUGHTERS OF j 
 [♦TABERNACLE-f I 
 
 TABERNACLE OFFICERS' JEWELS. 
 1S4 
 
A, 
 Q 
 
 No. 1. 
 
 No. 4— K Size. 
 
 No. 2. 
 
 No. 3. 
 
 No. 5. 
 
 No. 6. 
 
 DAUGHTERS' PINS AND EMBLEMS. 
 
 155 
 
INSTALLING CEREMONY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Officers of the Tabernacle 
 
 166 
 
ORKICERS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 LADIES' TABERNACLE. 
 
 :o: 
 
 Section 1. — The Constitution of the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle must be strictly complied 
 with by all subordinate Tabernacles. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The officers of the Tabernacle shall be 
 as f olloAVS : 
 
 1. Chief Preceptress, C. P. 
 
 2. Vice-Preceptress, V.-P. 
 
 3. Chief Recorder, C. R. 
 
 4. Vice-Recorder, V.-R. 
 
 5. Chief Treasurer, C. T. 
 
 6. Chief Priestess, C. Ps. 
 
 7. Inner Sentinel, I. S. 
 
 8. Outer Sentinel, O. S. 
 
 9. Chief Tribune, C. Te. 
 
 10. Chief Tribune, C. Te. 
 
 11. Chief Tribune, C. Te. 
 
 1. Board of Visitors, B. V. 
 
 2. Board of Visitors, B. V. 
 
 3. Board of Visitors, B. V. 
 
 1. Board of Examiners, B. E. 
 
 2. Board of Examiners, B. E. 
 
 3. Board of Examiners, B, E, 
 
 157 
 
INSTALLATION CEREMONY 
 
 OF 
 
 Tabernacle Officers. 
 
 :o: 
 
 The officers of the tabernacle may be installed 
 either in public or private. The ceremony can be 
 performed by any C. P., Past C. P., C. G. P., Past 
 C. G. P., C. M., Past C. M., C. G. M., or Past 
 C. G. M. 
 
 PUBLIC OR PRIVATE INSTALLATION. 
 
 The Daughter Priestesses assemble in a room or 
 place near the hall or room where the installation 
 ceremonies are to be performed, dressed in full 
 regalia, and march in the following order to the 
 place of installation, under the marshalship of one 
 of the Meroes. 
 
 THE PROCESSION. 
 
 c. p. 
 
 C. T. P. C. T. 
 
 V.-P. 
 
 C. R. V.-R. 
 
 C. Ps. 
 
 § O. S. I. S. 
 
 I C. Te.s 
 
 ^ B. V. B. V. 
 
 B. V. 
 
 [house.] 
 
 B. E. B. E. 
 
 B. E., with Banner. 
 
 P. C. P. P. C. P. 
 
 P. V.-P. P. V.-P. 
 
 Members by Twos. 
 
 Sir Knights, 
 158 
 
159 
 
 The Tabernacle House is borne by four Daugh- 
 ters. The procession marches three times around 
 the hall. The officers and past officers are seated 
 on the platform, and the members and Sir Knights 
 in front of the platform. The Tabernacle House is 
 placed in front of the Chief Preceptress, in the cen- 
 ter of the platform, the officers to the right and left 
 of her. 
 
 The Ceremony. 
 
 Music; or, if there is no band, the following 
 hymn is sung: 
 
 PRAISE TO GOD. 
 
 I. 
 
 Praise to God, the Great Creator; 
 
 Praise to God from every tongue; 
 Join my soul with every creature, — 
 
 Join the universal song. 
 II. 
 Joyfully on earth adore Him, 
 
 Till in heaven our song we raise; 
 Then, enraptured, fall before him, 
 
 Lost in wonder, love and praise. 
 III. 
 Praise to God, the 'Great Creator, — 
 
 Father, Son and Holy Ghost; 
 Praise Him, every living creature. 
 
 Earth and heaven's united host. 
 
 The Chief Preceptress gives three sounds, and all 
 the Daughters and Knights stand while the follow- 
 ing prayer is said by the C. O., or some one 
 appointed for that purpose : 
 
 Eternal God! Eternal King! 
 
 Ruler of heaven and earth beneath! 
 From Thee our hopes, our comforts spring; 
 
 In Thee we live, and move, and breathe. 
 Thy word brought forth the flaming sun, 
 
 The changeful moon, the starry host; 
 
160 
 
 In Thine appointed course they run, 
 
 Till in the final ruin lost. 
 We lift our hearts to Thee, 
 
 Thou Day-Star from on high I 
 The sun itself is but Thy shade, 
 
 Yet cheers both earth and sky. 
 Oh, let Thy rising beams 
 
 Dispel the shades of night; 
 And let the glories of Thy love 
 
 Come like the morning light! 
 
 Bless Thou the officers and members of the Tab- 
 ernacle wherever they may be located, and we give 
 Thee all honor and praise. Amen ! 
 
 Res. : — In God alone is safety ! 
 
 The C. P. gives one sound, and all are seated. 
 
 Music; or the following ( or any other) hymn is 
 
 Let all the earth their voices raise, 
 To sing the choicest psalm of praise; 
 
 To sing and bless Jehovah's name; 
 His glory let the heathen know. 
 His wonders to the nations show. 
 
 And all His saving works proclaim. 
 
 He framed the globe, He built the sky, 
 He made the shining worlds on high, 
 
 And reigns complete in glory there; 
 His beams are majesty and light; 
 His beantie=5, how divinely bright I 
 
 His Tabernacle, how divinely fair! 
 
 The Meroe lights the candles and places them on 
 the Tabernacle House, and places all the officeivs' 
 jewels on a stand. The officers elect stand in a 
 semi-circle. 
 
161 
 
 She then says: — Faithful (Here the title of the 
 Installing Officer is to be given), I have the pleasure 
 
 of presenting to you the officers elect of 
 
 Tabernacle, No. . They are now ready for in- 
 stallation. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — You will please open your Manuals, 
 and answer the following questions : 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Are you willing to serve in the ca- 
 pacity to which you have been elected? 
 
 Ans. : — I am willing to do the duties pertaining 
 to the office. 
 
 Inst. Off.: — Will you punctually attend to the 
 business of you office? 
 
 Ans. : — I am resolved to attend to all that is re- 
 quired of me under the laws of our Order. 
 
 The Installing Officer then requests them to link 
 their right and left hands together, whereupon they 
 repeat the following words after the Installing 
 Officer : 
 
 As we are joined together, hand in hand, so we 
 will sustain and support each" other in our official 
 duties. We promise to be present at every meeting 
 of the Tabernacle, unless detained at home by sick- 
 ness, or by absence from the city. 
 
 The Inst. Off. gives one sound, and all stand. 
 
 The Meroe then places the Chief Preceptress 
 elect in front of the Tabernacle House, and says : — 
 Faithful (give title of Installing Officer), I have 
 
 the honor of presenting to you Daughter 
 
 , who has been elected to preside in this Tab- 
 ernacle. 
 
 6 — Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
162 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Priestess. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Tharbis, you will please receive into 
 your hand the Constitution of the Order, and the 
 By-Laws of this Tabernacle. 
 
 Inst. Off. to the Chief Preceptress: — These are 
 the Laws of the Order. It is your duty to have 
 them executed promptly; have them read in your 
 Tabernacle at stated times. I now invest you with 
 the Jewel of your office, and I present you the Staff 
 of Power. You will please be seated, and listen. 
 It shall be the duty of the H. P. to preside at all 
 meetings of the Tabernacle, call special meetings 
 when the business of the Tabernacle requires it, 
 decide all questions of order or of the rules, sign 
 all money orders, preserve order, enforce the laws, 
 instruct the candidates in the several degrees, and 
 cause the members to learn well the Ritual. 
 (Gives one sound, and all are seated.) 
 
 Meroe: — I now present to you Daughter 
 
 , who was elected Vice-Priestess of 
 
 Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
 Instructions to the Vice-Priestess. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Amisis, I now invest you with the 
 Jewel of your office. You will please be seated. 
 It is your duty to be present at all meetings of the 
 Tabernacle, and assist the High Priestess in her 
 several official duties; and, in the absence of the 
 H. P., you are to preside in the meetings of the 
 Tabernacle, and attend to the duties of the office. 
 
 Meroe : — I now pi esent to you Daughter 
 
 , who was elected Chief Recorder 
 
 of Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
163 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Recorder. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Sesotheni, I now invest you with 
 the Jewel of your office. You will please be 
 seated. It is your duty to keep the proceedings of 
 each meeting, and the business, under proper 
 heads. You shall have the minutes, the roll, and 
 account books in your possession. You shall issue 
 all notices, draw all warrants on the Treasurer, re- 
 ceive and record all moneys received into the Tab- 
 ernacle, pay all moneys you receive into the treas- 
 ury, make an annual report in full to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle, and report, every three 
 months, the condition of the Tabernacle to the 
 members and the Grand Chief. You shall notify 
 the C. G. S., within five days, of the expulsion of 
 a member, and why she was expelled, and fill out, 
 sign and seal all certificates by order of the Taber- 
 nacle. 
 
 Meroe: — I now present to you Daughter 
 
 , who was elected Vice-Recorder of 
 
 Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
 Instructions to the Vice-Recorder. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — I now invest you with the Jewel of 
 your office. You will please be seated. It is your 
 duty to assist the C. R. in her several duties, and 
 attend to all the business of the office in the ab- 
 sence of the C. R. It is furthermore your duty to 
 correspond with other Tabernacles, and to conduct 
 the correspondence of the Tabernacle. 
 
 Meroe : — I now present to you Daughter 
 
 , who was elected Chief Treasurer of 
 
 Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
164 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Treasurer. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Seraphis, I now invest you with the 
 Jewel of your office. You will please be seated. It 
 is your duty to receive all funds coming into the 
 Tabernacle from the C. R., keep an accurate ac- 
 count, an 1 pay all warrants. You shall report the 
 condition of the treasury, every three months, to 
 the Tabernacle, or at the reguhir quarterly meet- 
 ing. Your further duties and instructions you will 
 find in the Constitution. 
 
 Meroe: — I now present to you Daughter 
 
 , who was elected Chief Priestess of 
 
 Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Priestess. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Hyerego, I now invest you with the 
 Jewel of your office, and present to you the Shep- 
 herdess' Crook. You will please be seated. It is 
 your duty to be present at every meeting, and open 
 it with devotional exercises, give counsel to the sick 
 or disabled members, and instruct candidates on the 
 sacredness of their obligation. Your office is one 
 of usefulness and benefit. Be true to duty. 
 
 Meroe: — I now present to you Daughter 
 
 and Daucrhter , who were 
 
 elected Inner and Outer Sentinels respectively of 
 Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
 Instructions to the Inner and Outer Sentinels. 
 Inst. Off. : — Abassine and Lybenus, I now invest 
 you with the Jewels of your office, and present to 
 you the Rods of your authority. You will please 
 be seated. It shall be your duty to guard the inner 
 and outer entrances of the Tabernacle, and perform 
 
165 
 
 such other duties as are found in the Ritual. Your 
 punctual and early attendance is absolutely re- 
 quired. Look well to your duty. 
 
 Meroe: — I now present to you Sir Knight 
 
 , Sir Knight , and Sir 
 
 Knight , who have been elected Tri- 
 bunes of Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
 Instructions to the Chief Tribunes. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Sir Meroes, I now invest you with 
 the Jewels of your office, and present to you the 
 Javelins of authority. You will please be seated. 
 It shall be the duty of the Meroes to assist the H. 
 P. in conferring the degrees, arrange the hall for 
 meetings, conduct all public business, and attend 
 every meeting. You will be members of the Tab- 
 ernacle only during your term of office. 
 
 Meroe : — I now present to you Daughter 
 
 , and Daughter , and 
 
 Daughter , who were appointed the 
 
 Board of Visitors of Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
 Instructions to the Board of Visitors. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Hespers, I now invest you with the 
 elewels of your office. You will please be seated. 
 It shall be your duty to visit the members in regu- 
 lar order, and report any who are sick, disabled, or 
 need aid and attendance. It will also be your duty 
 to attend, and report to the H. P. the condition of, 
 the members. You shall cause orders to be drawn 
 on the Treasury for all weekly benefits, and pay 
 them to the members. You shall report your busi- 
 ness to every regular meeting, in a written report? 
 signed by all the members of the Board. 
 
166 
 
 Meroe: — I now present to you Daughter 
 
 , and Daugfhter , and 
 
 Daughter , who were appointed a 
 
 Board of Examiners of Tabernacle, No. — . 
 
 Instructions to the Board of Examiners. 
 
 Inst. Off. : — Gyrenes, I now present to you the 
 Jewels of your office. You will please be seated. 
 It shall be your duty to examine any matter or busi- 
 ness of the Tabernacle that is referred to you. 
 You shall prepare candidates for the degrees, and 
 shall conduct visitors to their proper seats. ' You 
 shall make a written report to every regular meet- 
 ing, signed by all the members of the Board. 
 
 The Installing Officer then gives three sounds, 
 and all stand, except the installed officers. He then 
 says : — By virtue of the authority in me vested, I 
 
 declare the officers of Tabernacle, No. — , 
 
 installed and ready for duty for the ensuing Taberr 
 nacle year. 
 
 Response by the members: — We declare/ We 
 declare// 
 
 Meroe: — I now proclaim the officers of 
 
 Tabernacle, No. — , duly installed in regular form. 
 
 The Sir Knights and Daughters give five claps, 
 and say : '* We declare/'' This is given three times. 
 The last time they say : ''We declare the officers of 
 Tabernacle, No. — , regularly installed.'' 
 
 Inst. Off. gives one sound, and all nro seated. 
 
 Music or singing; after wliicli an oration may be 
 delivered, then they march three times around the 
 hall, and the Tabernacle closes in the usual form, 
 or, if in a public hall, the H. P. declares the Taber- 
 nacle at rest. 
 
TABERNACLE FURNITURE. 
 (For Balance of Tabernacle Furniture, see page 358.) 
 
 167 
 
TEMPLE FURNITUKE. 
 
 (For Balance of Temple Furniture, see 
 pages 359 and 360.) 
 
BURIAL SERVICE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 DAUGHTERS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 TABKRNACIvB 
 
 1G9 
 
FUNERAL CEREMONIES 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Daughters of the Tabernacle, 
 
 :o:- 
 
 The ceremonies which are observed at Tabernacle 
 funerals, and for the interment of the dead, are very 
 impressive and appropriate. They are performed 
 as an imperative, yet a sorrowful duty, and as a 
 token of affection and respect to the memory of a 
 departed Daughter. 
 
 Directions. 
 
 1. — No Daughter of the Tabernacle can be buried 
 with the formalities of the Tabernacle, unless she is 
 a Daughter Priestess in good standing ; nor without 
 the consent of her family. 
 
 2. — The Chief Priestess, having received notice 
 of the death of a Daughter (the deceased being a 
 Daughter Priestess in good standing), it shall be 
 her duty to issue orders to the Tabernacle to make 
 preparations to attend the funeral, and extend an 
 invitation to the Temples and other Tabernacles. 
 (Should the family of the deceased desire to arrange 
 for the funeral, their wishes must be complied with, 
 and it relieves the Tabernacle from all funeral ex- 
 penses.) 
 
 170 
 
171 
 
 3. — The whole arrangement for the burial of a 
 Daughter by the Tabernacle must be made by the 
 High Priestess and the Meroes. The ceremonies are 
 conducted by the C. O. or C. M. of the nearest 
 Temple, or any Grand Officer. 
 
 4. — Whenever other societies unite with the Tab- 
 ernacle in the burial of a Daughter, the body of the 
 deceased must be in charge of the Tabernacle hav- 
 ing jurisdiction. Other societies are permitted to 
 perform their ceremonies, but the services of the 
 Tabernacle must not be omitted. 
 
 5. — If a sojourner, in good standing, dies within 
 the jurisdiction of a Tabernacle, it shall be the duty 
 of the Tabernacle to inter her with all the formali- 
 ties of the Order, or attend to sending the body to 
 its home. Where there are two or more Tabernacles, 
 the oldest Tabernacle has precedence, unless other- 
 wise arranged. The Tabernacle of which the de- 
 ceased sojourner was a member shall pay all fune- 
 ral expenses incurred to the Tabernacle which 
 attended to this duty. 
 
 6. — The pall-bearers shall be Sir Knights of Tabor, 
 selected by the High Priestess. 
 
 7. — No Tabernacle can unite with other societies 
 in the burial of a person not a Daughter or a Knight 
 of Tabor, without a dispensation from the Chief 
 Grand Mentor, or the consent of the Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle having jurisdiction. 
 
 8. — The members of the Tabernacle shall attend 
 the funeral of a deceased Dauojhter either on foot 
 
172 
 
 or in vehicles. The H. Ps. and P. H. Ps. carry 
 their Staffs trimmed with crape. The I. S. and O. 
 S. carry their Eods trimmed with crape. 
 
 9. — A Sir Knight attending the funeral of a 
 Daughter shall wear a black suit, brown gloves, and 
 the regulation undress. The Meroes shall carry 
 their spears. The C. M.s and P. C. M.s carry their 
 swords trimmed with black. Should a C. G. M. or 
 P. C. G. M. attend, the C. G.s march in their rear 
 with swords reversed, the C. C. B., with two assist- 
 ants, in front of them. 
 
 10. — When two or more Tabernacles are in pro- 
 cession, the Tabernacle of which the deceased was 
 a member shall march nearest to the corpse. If the 
 deceased member was a member of other secret 
 societies, such society or societies shall bear a part 
 of the funeral expenses. 
 
 The Service. 
 
 11. — The Tabernacle shall assemble at their hall, 
 or some pUice that is proper near the residence of 
 the deceased. The H. Ps. shall declare the Taber- 
 nacle opened, and announce the business that has 
 called them together. The C. K. reads the name 
 and age of the deceased member, how long she has 
 been a member, the day and date of her death, and 
 gives the date when she was interred. It shall be 
 enrolled in the record-book. 
 
 Order of March. 
 
 12. — After the procession is formed, they march 
 to the residence of the deceased member, receive 
 
173 
 
 the corpse, and proceed in the following order to 
 the church or place appointed for the services ; 
 
 Two Meroes, with spears. 
 High Priestess. 
 Past High Priestesses, by twos. 
 ^ Inner and Outer Sentinels. 
 
 '^ Chief and Assistant Recorder. 
 
 g Vice-Priestess. 
 
 Chief Treasurer and Hyerego. 
 Members, two by two. 
 Other Tabernacles, in the same order. 
 Chief Orator and Clergy. 
 
 * H * 
 
 * % * 
 
 * X * 
 
 Family. 
 
 Knights, in their marching order. 
 
 Other Societies. 
 
 Carriages. 
 
 13. — A Tabernacle in procession is under the dis- 
 cipline of an open Tabernacle, and no one must 
 leave the ranks without positive permission from 
 the High Priestess, conveyed through one of the 
 acting Meroes. 
 
 At the Church. 
 
 14. — The Tabernacle and Sir Knights will open 
 ranks, and the corpse and family will pass into the 
 church. The Daughters and Knights will follow, 
 and take their seats. 
 
 After the church ceremony and sermon by a 
 minister or the Chief Orator, the Daughters and 
 Sir Knights shall rise, whereupon the Chief Orator 
 
174 
 
 repeats the following invocation, and the Daugh- 
 ters and Knights respond : 
 
 Chief Orator: — Almighty Father, may we realize 
 that Thine all-pervading presence is with us ; may 
 Thy spirit perfect us in truth and obedience to Thy 
 will. 
 
 Response: — May the Lord's will be done! 
 
 C. O. : — May we meet our Sister Daughter in the 
 fadeless lio^ht of God's kinsfdom. 
 
 Res. : — Into the Lord's hands we cbmmit our 
 souls ! 
 
 C. O. : — Behold, O Lord, we are in sorrow. O 
 Lord, let the light of Thy countenance shine upon 
 us in our distress. Comfort us, and turn our 
 mourning into joy. 
 
 Res. : — The Lord will hear and answer our 
 prayer; only trust Him! 
 
 C. O. : — Blessed is the Lord. From the rising to 
 the setting of the sun, praise the name of the Lord. 
 
 Res.: — Give thanks unto the Lord; his mercy 
 endureth forever! 
 
 C. O. : — Hear us, O Lord, and comfort our 
 mourning heaits. 
 
 Res.: — The Lord will meet us in our Taber- 
 nacles ! 
 
 C. O. :— Our God dwelleth in the Heavenly Tab- 
 ernacle; He hears the voice of our supplications. 
 
 Res. : — May He save us all with an everlasting 
 salvation ! 
 
 The Chief Orator (or the minister, if he is a 
 member), then reads the following prayer, the 
 Daughters and Knights holding up their joined 
 hands durins: the same: 
 
175 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 O Merciful God, the Father of our Lord Jesus 
 Christ, who is the resurrection and the life; in 
 whom whosoever believeth shall live, though he 
 die; and whomsoever liveth and believeth in Him, 
 shall not die eternally ; who also hath taught us, 
 by His holy Apostle St. Paul, not to be sorry, as 
 men without hope, for those who sleep in Him. 
 We humbly beseech Thee, O Father, to raise us 
 from the death of sin unto the life of righteous- 
 ness; that when we shall depart this life, we may 
 rest in Him, and that at the general resurrection on 
 the last day, we may be found acceptable in Thy 
 sight, and receive that blessing which Thy Well- 
 Beloved Son shall then pronounce to all who love 
 and fear Thee, saying: ''Come, ye blessed children 
 of my Father, receive the kingdom prepared for 
 you from the beginning of the world." Grant this, 
 we beseech Thee, O Merciful Father, through 
 Jesus Christ, our Mediator and Redeemer. Amen ! 
 
 Response. — In God alone is safety ! 
 
 Whereupon the following hymn is sung: 
 
 I. 
 
 Dear as thou wert, and justly dear, 
 
 We will not weep for thee; 
 One thought shall check the starting tear, — 
 
 It is, that thou art free. 
 
 II. 
 
 And thus shall faith's consoling power 
 
 The tears of love restrain ; 
 Oh, who that saw thy parting hour 
 
 Could wish thee back asrain! 
 
176 
 
 III. 
 
 Triumphant in thy closing eye 
 
 The hope of glory shone; 
 Joy breathed in thine expiring sigh, 
 
 When thou wert taken home. 
 
 The following exhortation is delivered by the 
 High Priestess : 
 
 Exhortation. 
 
 Daughters, this solemn scene tells us that our 
 Tabernacle has been visited by that dread messen- 
 ger — Death — against whose certain entrance sen- 
 tinels and closed doors offer no stay or stop. The 
 chain of our circle has been broken, and a link is 
 gone, never more to return. We mourn the loss 
 of a dear companion. The dead body of our be- 
 loved Sister, M N , is now before us in 
 
 its narrow house. This is the last of earthly Tab- 
 ernacles for her whom we have met so often in our 
 undisturbed retreat, away from the worldly-minded, 
 to enjoy a brief season of happiness; and now 
 we have assembled to bid our Sister a last, long 
 farewell. She sleeps with the unnumbered dead. 
 The storms and calms of life have passed over her 
 pathway. She is at rest. Her toils on earth have 
 ended. As it has pleased our Heavenly Father to 
 call the soul of our departed Sister from its earthly 
 Tabernacle, may she find joy and happiness in the 
 Tabernacles of that peaceful land where the eter- 
 nal light and love of the Eternal Father, Son and 
 Holy Spirit will shed their rays forever, and, in the 
 company of the angelic host and the redeemed of 
 earth, may we meet our loved Sister, to part no 
 more. Farewell, for \\ little while. 
 
177 
 
 The Daughters and Knights stand, with arms 
 folded across their breasts, during the reading of 
 the exhortation. When the H. P. says Farewell! 
 the Daughters and Knights drop their arms to 
 their sides and fold them across their breasts — this 
 is done three times — each time slowly repeating the 
 word, Farewell! 
 
 The Knights and Daughter Priestesses, the family 
 and friends, will march around and view the body, 
 while the choir chants a funeral anthem, or a hymn 
 is sung by the congregation. The Sir Knights and 
 Priestesses then form in front of the church, and 
 open ranks, when the casket is passed through to 
 the hearse. 
 
 MARCH TO THE CEMETERY. 
 
 Chief Meroes. 
 Chief Orator and Clergy. 
 
 * M * 
 
 * W * 
 
 Family Carriages. 
 
 Daughters in Vehicles. 
 
 Other Societies, 
 
 Sir Knights. 
 Other Vehicles. 
 
 AT THE GRAVE. 
 
 15. — The Daughters and Sir Knights form a 
 circle around the grave (the casket being placed 
 over the grave), with the family at the head, and 
 the C. O. and ministers at the foot. The Daugh- 
 ters and Sir Knights join hands, and while the 
 casket is being lowered, the following hymn is sung : 
 
178 
 
 I. 
 
 Unveil thy bosom, faithful tomb; 
 
 Take this new treasure to thy trust, 
 And give these sacred relics room 
 
 To slumber in the silent dust. 
 
 II. 
 
 Nor pain, nor grief, nor anxious fear, 
 
 Invade thy bounds ; no mortal woes 
 Can reach the peaceful sleeper here, 
 
 While angels watch the soft repose. 
 
 III. 
 So Jesus slept; God's dying Son 
 
 Passed thro' the grave, and blest the bed: 
 Kest here, blest saint, till from His throne 
 
 The morning break, and pierce the shade. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Break from His throne, illustrious morn I 
 Attend, O earth ! His sovereign word : 
 
 Kestore thy trust; a glorious form 
 Shall then ascend to meet the Lord! 
 
 The ceremonies may conclude with the church 
 order for the burial of the dead, or by the follow- 
 ing, read by the C. O. : 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 Forasmuch as it hath pleased Almighty God, in 
 His wise providence, to take out of this world the 
 soul of our deceased Sister, we, therefore, commit 
 her body to the ground — earth to earth, ashes to 
 ashes, dust to dust; looking for the general resur- 
 rection in the last day, and the life of the world to 
 come, through our Lord Jesus Christ; at whose 
 second coming in glorious majesty to judge the 
 world, the earth and the sea shall give up their 
 dead; and the corruptible bodies of those who sleep 
 in Him shall be changed, and made like unto His 
 
179 
 
 own glorious body, according to the mighty work- 
 ing whereby He is able to subdue all things unto 
 Himself. Amen ! 
 
 The services close, and the procession returns to 
 the place from whence it came; and after the 
 necessary business is finished, the Tabernacle is 
 closed. 
 
PALATINE GUAKDS' CHAPEAU, 
 
 Button No. 1. 
 
 Button No. 2. 
 
 Helmet 
 UNIFORM RANK HELMET. 
 
 ISO 
 
PALATIUM 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Royal House of Media, 
 
 NIliTH, TENTH AND ELEVENTH DEGREES 
 
 OF THE 
 
 I^nigM? aiid Daugh^erg of TaboP, 
 
 OF THE 
 
 International Order of Twelve, 
 
 181 
 
PALATIUM 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ROYAL HOUSE OF MEDIA 
 
 : o: 
 
 This is the highest department in the Interna- 
 tional Order of Twelve. It is the Koyal Social 
 House, where the Knights and Daughter Priestesses 
 meet as equals. The business of this House is to 
 exert a refining influence over the members of the 
 order. 
 
 1. — It is proposed to be a part of the Interna- 
 tional Order of Twelve, with all the rights and 
 privileges it confers. 
 
 2. — The Grand Temples and Tabernacles must 
 make a Code of Laws or Constitution for the Gov- 
 ernment of Palatiums. 
 
 3. — Our order is so constituted, that the benefits 
 for members are derived from Temples and Taber- 
 nacles; however, it is optional with Palatiums 
 whether or not they will adopt the beneficial 
 feature. 
 
 4. — Each Palatium may, if it desires to make By- 
 Laws, have its members pay monthly dues and 
 to give sick or distress benefits, and to aid the 
 Temple or Tabernacle in paying funeral expenses. 
 
 182 
 
183 
 
 5. — The Members of the Palatiums being a part 
 of the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, they must 
 pay grand dues, but not as much as is paid by the 
 Temples and Tabernacles. 
 
 6. — A Palatium is divided into two departments: 
 First, the Knightly Princes — that is, the Palatine 
 Guards. These are to be ready to march and drill 
 at any time. Special privileges are given to them 
 to accumulate funds to prepare their outfits, and 
 to get money into their treasury to pay travel- 
 ing expenses when they are called to a distant 
 point. They are permitted to have a Treasurer 
 independent from the one of the Palatium, and 
 shall be known as the Palatine Guards' Treasurer. 
 They may give entertainments for the purpose of 
 replenishing their Treasury. They must be ready 
 when the C. G. M. orders them to meet the Grand 
 Session for a Grand Parade. 
 
 Second^ the Princesses of Media. These are the 
 Ladies of the Palace. They shall have the same 
 rights and privileges that the Knights have in the 
 management of the Palatium. It is they who make 
 the meetings of the Palatium pleasant and sociable. 
 They shall aid the Palatine Guards in all their 
 efforts. In a parade the Princesses shall turn out 
 in carriages and in full dress. 
 
 7. — All Grand Officers should be members of the 
 Palatium. This is necessary, because the Palatium 
 is a department in the International as well as in the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and Grand Officers 
 cannot properly attend to all their duties, unless 
 they become members of all the various depart- 
 ments of the Order. 
 
184 
 
 8. — The Grand Temple and Tabernacle, in mak- 
 ing a Code of Laws for the Palatium, shall define 
 the duties of the officers. 
 
 9. — The C. G. M. may give a dispensation allowing 
 the Vice-Princess to preside in case the Presiding 
 Prince is required to act as Prince Marshal. 
 
 Officers of the Palatium. 
 
 1. — Presiding Prince, P. P. 
 
 2. — Vice-Princess, V.-P. 
 
 3. — Kecording Prince, R. P. 
 
 4. — Assistant Princess, A. P. 
 
 5. — Prince Banker, P. B. 
 
 6. — Princess Nonna, P. N. 
 
 7. — Prince Clericus, P. C. 
 
 8. — Princess Revista, P. R. 
 
 9. — Prince Marshal, P. M. 
 
 10. — Prince Gonfalonier, P. G. 
 
 11. — Princess Sentina, S. 
 
 12.— Prince Wardship, P. W. 
 
 The officers are elected at the regular meeting in 
 the month of March, and installed the fifth day of 
 April, or within twenty days thereafter. The in- 
 stallation may be either public or private. 
 
 The installation ceremony may be performed by 
 a Presiding Prince, Past Presiding Prince, Chief 
 Grand Mentor, or International Deputy Grand 
 Mentor. 
 
PALATIUM OFFICER'S JEWEL, 
 Twelve Jewels, with Initials of Office on Each Jewel. 
 
 186 
 
INSTALLING CEREMONY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Officers of the Palatium, 
 
 OR 
 
 Royal House of Media. 
 
 186 
 
INSTALLING CEREMONY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 OFFICERS OF THE PALATIUM. 
 
 : o: 
 
 The members of the Palatium shall assemble in 
 their hall (or some place near to where the instal- 
 lation is to be held, if it is to be public). The 
 Princes and Princesses shall appear in full dress. 
 The P. P. declares the Palatium open for work. 
 The Prince Marshal forms the procession. If a 
 Grand or Past Grand Officer is present, proper 
 respect must be shown him or her. 
 
 The March. 
 
 The procession marches around the hall four 
 times. The ranks are opened and the officers are 
 marched to the platform in the following order : 
 
 Tabernacle — Daughter Priestesses, in full dress. 
 
 Temple — Uniform Rank Knights, in full dress. 
 
 Grand and Past Grand Officers, in full dress. 
 
 Palatium — Princesses, in full dress. 
 
 Palatium — Palatine Guards, in full dress. 
 
 If the Maids and Pages take part in the cere- 
 mony, they shall march in front of the procession. 
 
 If there is room on the platform, the Grand and 
 Past Grand Officers, and the C. M.s, C. P.s and Q. 
 M.s are seated to the right and left of the officers 
 about to be installed. 
 
 187 
 
188 
 
 The Installing Officer shall be addressed as Sir 
 
 Grand, the Presenter or Introducer as Prince 
 
 Marshall. 
 
 Ceremony. 
 
 The Prince Marshal places all the officers' Jewels 
 on the altar. 
 
 Music; or, if there is no band, the following 
 hymn is sung : 
 
 S. M. 
 
 Through all the lofty sky, 
 
 Through all the inferior ground, 
 The Almighty Maker shines confessed, 
 
 And pours his blessings 'round. 
 
 II. 
 Each year the teeming earth, 
 
 With flowers and fruits is crowned; 
 And grass, and herbs, and harvests, grow, 
 
 And send their joys around. 
 
 III. 
 The world of waters yields 
 
 A rich supply of food. 
 And distant lands their treasures send 
 
 Upon the rolling flood. 
 
 IV. 
 
 To serve and bless our land 
 
 The elements conspire; 
 And mercies mix themselves with earth, — 
 
 With ocean, air, and fire. 
 
 V. 
 
 O that the sons of men 
 
 To God their songs would raise. 
 And celebrate his power and love 
 
 In never-ceasing praise ! 
 
 Sir Grand gives four raps and all stand ; he then 
 Bays : — We have assembled at this hour to install the 
 
189 
 
 officers of Palatium, No. — , of the Royal House of 
 Media. So important is the business which we are 
 about to transact, that before we go any further, it 
 is necessary to dedicate the work to God, our Ruler 
 and Preserver, and ask his guidance and blessing 
 upon the Palatium and its officers. Prince Clericus 
 will favor us by addressing Him who sits on the 
 throne of great grace. Palatine Guards and 
 Knights, uncover! 
 
 Prayer by Prince Clericus. 
 
 Prince Clericus : — Holy and Divine Father, it is 
 Thou that controls and rules in the world of man- 
 kind; Thou art the Supreme Dispenser of every 
 good and perfect gift. We come, asking and 
 pleading that Thou wouldst in mercy bless and 
 protect the Royal House of Media. Grant unto us 
 wisdom, that we may conduct the business of this 
 Palatium in a manner that all its membership may 
 be drawn to serve Thee and bless Thy holy name; 
 breathe into our hearts Thy life-giving word, and 
 save us with an everlasting salvation. Guide us in 
 our counsels, shield us by Thy love. Thou Prince 
 and Savior, bless -the nations, comfort the widows, 
 care for the orphans, and receive us all into Thy 
 favor. This is our prayer, and will be now, hence- 
 forth and forever. Amen ! 
 
 Response by all the members: — May the Lord 
 bless the Palatium ! 
 
 Sir Grand: — Palatine Guards and Sir Knights, 
 cover! (Gives one rap and all are seated.) 
 
190 
 
 Music; or the following hymn is sung: 
 
 C. M. 
 
 I. 
 
 Eternal Sovereign of the sky, 
 
 And Lord of all below, 
 We mortals to Thy majesty 
 
 Our first obedience owe. 
 
 II. 
 
 Our souls adore Thy throne supreme, 
 
 And bless Thy providence 
 For magistrates of meaner name, 
 
 Our glory and defense. 
 
 III. 
 
 The acts of pious rulers shine 
 
 With rays above the rest; 
 Where laws and liberties combine, 
 
 The people are made blest. 
 
 Prince Marshal to Sir Grand: — I have the honor 
 
 of presenting to you Prince , who 
 
 has been elected Presiding Prince of Pala- 
 
 tium, No. — , and is now ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to the Presiding Prince. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Prince, you have been elected 
 byj^ie members of your Palatium to preside over 
 its important work. I place in your hands the 
 
 charter — that makes Palatium, No. — , a 
 
 legal body. It must be present when the Palatium 
 is open for business. You will carefully guard it 
 as a sacred power. I present to you the Constitu- 
 tion of the Palatium, and the Laws of the Inter- 
 national Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and of the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle. It is your duty to 
 have these Laws enforced in vour Palatium. I 
 
191 
 
 present to you this sword, with the hilt in your 
 hand. You are to teach the Royal Palathie Guards 
 how to use it in the defense of their country when 
 assailed by an enemy, and to protect the innocent. 
 I now invest you with the Jewel of your office. Be 
 an example to the Princes and Princesses. Sir 
 Prince Marshal, please seat the Presiding Prince. 
 Prince Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 
 presenting to you Princess ^, who 
 
 has been elected Yice-Princess of Palatium, 
 
 No. — , and is now ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to the Vice-Princess. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Princess, I take pleasure in saying 
 to you that the members of the Palatium have ex- 
 pressed their confidence in your ability by electing 
 you to the important office of Vice-Princess. Your 
 duty is to assist the Presiding Prince by counsel 
 and advice in his several duties. You shall preside 
 during his absence from his seat. I now invest you 
 with the Jewel of your office. May you attend to 
 your duties punctually. Prince Marshal, you will 
 please seat the Vice-Princess. 
 
 Prince Marshal : — Sir Grand, I now present to 
 
 you Prince , who has been elected 
 
 Recording Prince of Palatium, No. — . He 
 
 is ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to the Recording Prince. 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Prince, you have been elected 
 to the position of Recording Prince by the mem- 
 bers of the Palatium. It is your duty to be pres- 
 ent at every meeting of the Palatium, and record 
 the business. You must keep a roll-book, and en- 
 
192 
 
 roll the names of every member. You are to make 
 a quarterly report to the C. G. M. on the condition 
 of the Palatium, receive all moneys paid into the 
 Palatium, and draw all warrants for money on 
 Prince Banker, and see that they are properly signed 
 by the Presiding Officer, and countersigned by 
 yourself. Pay all moneys that you receive for the 
 Palatium to Prince Banker, and take his receipt 
 therefor. You are the corresponding officer of the 
 Palatium. I now invest you with the Jewel of 
 your office. Be careful in your business. Prince 
 Marshal, please seat the Recording Prince. 
 
 Prince Marshal : — Sir Grand, I take pleasure in 
 
 introducing Princess , who has been 
 
 elected Assistant Princess of Palatium, No. 
 
 — , and is now ready for installation. 
 
 Instructions to the Assistant Princkss. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Princess, I congratulate you on the 
 honorable position which you have attained. It is 
 your duty to assist the Recording Prince in his sev- 
 eral duties, and to attend to his business during his 
 absence. I now invest you with the Jewel of your 
 office. May you have good success. Prince Mar- 
 shal, you will please seat the Assistant Princess. 
 
 Prince Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 
 presenting to you Prince , who has 
 
 been elected Prince Banker of Palatium, 
 
 No. — . He is now ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to Prince Banker. 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Prince, by the suffrage of the 
 members of this Palatium, you are called to the 
 very important position of Prince Banker. It is 
 
193 
 
 your duty 1o receive all moneys and valuables which 
 are the properly of the Palatium, and pay all war- 
 rants drawn on the Bank when tliey are signed by 
 the P. P. and countersigned by the R. P. You 
 ■must make a report lo the Palatium of the condi- 
 tion of the Bank, when requested by the Presiding 
 Officer. You must make a written statement to your 
 successor of the condition of the Bank, and turn over 
 to him all the moneys, valuables, books and other 
 property belonging to the Palatium when he is in- 
 stalled. I now invest you with the Jewel of your 
 office. Be true to your trust. Prince Marshal, please 
 seat Prince Banker. 
 
 Prince Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the pleasure 
 
 of introducing to you Princess , who 
 
 has been elected Princess Nonna of Pala- 
 tium, No. — , and is now ready for installation. 
 
 Instructions to Princess Nonna. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Princess, I congratulate you on the 
 very responsible office that the Palatium members 
 have entrusted to your care. The office requires 
 that you should promptly attend all meetings, and 
 be thoroughly versed in the Ritualistic work. I 
 now present to you the Jewel of your office. Be 
 active in your duties. Prince Marshall, please seat 
 Princess Nonna. 
 
 Prince Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 
 presenting to you Prince , he having 
 
 been elected Prince Clericus by Palatium, 
 
 No. — . He is now ready to be installed. 
 7 — Dicksons' New Manual.) 
 
194 
 
 Instructions to Prince Clericus. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Priace, you have been honored 
 by the members of the Palatium by their electing 
 you to the high office of Prince Clericus. It is 
 your duty to conduct the devotional exercises of the 
 Palatium, visit the sick or distressed Princes or 
 Princesses, and to perform the funeral ceremonies 
 of the Palatium. I now present to you the Jewel 
 of your office. May you be well instructed in the 
 Holy Scriptures. Prince Marshal, you will please 
 seat Prince Clericus. 
 
 Prince Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the pleasure 
 
 of introducing to you Princess , who 
 
 has been elected Princess Revista of Pala- 
 tium, No — , and is now ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to Princess Re vista. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Princess, the office to which you 
 have been elected is one that requires your closest 
 attention. Your duty is fully explained in the 
 Ritual. I advise you to carefully study your part, 
 so that you may be qualified in the business of your 
 office. I now invest you with the Jewel of your 
 office. May you honorably perform your duty. 
 Prince Marshal, please seat Princess Revista. 
 
 Prince Marshal: — Sir Grand, I have the honor 
 
 of presenting to you Prince , who 
 
 has been elected Prince Marshal of Palatium, 
 
 No. — . He is now rendy to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to Prince Marshal. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Prince, it is with pleasure I hear 
 that the members of the Palatium have elected you 
 
195 
 
 as Prince Marshal. It is your duty to instruct the 
 Palatine Guards in the march, drill and the sword 
 exercises, and conduct all public turn-outs of the 
 Palatine Guards. Your station is to guard the 
 inner door during the Session of the Palatium. I 
 now present to you the Jewel of your office and 
 this sword. You will find need for it in your duties. 
 Be courageous. Prince Marshal, please seat the 
 elected Prince Marshal. 
 
 Prince Marshal : — Sir Grand, I have the honor of 
 
 presenting to you Prince , who has 
 
 been elected Prince Gonfalonier of Palatium, 
 
 No. — . He is now ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to Prince Gonfalonier. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Prince, the members of the Pa- 
 latium have conferred on you the honorable- duty 
 of unfurling and carrying the Royal Banner of the 
 Royal House of Media. It is your duty to guard 
 the Gonfalon, and defend it in time of danger. I 
 now invest you with the Jewel of your office and 
 place in your care the Gonfalon of the Palatium. 
 Prince Marshal, please seat Prince Gonfalonier. 
 
 Prince Marshal : — Sir Grand, I take pleasure in 
 
 introducing to you Princess , who 
 
 has been elected as Princess Sentina, and is now 
 ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to Princess Sentina. 
 Sir Grand: — Princess, you have been honored by 
 the members of the Palatium by their electing you 
 to the very important office of Princess Sentina. 
 It is your duty to guard the inner entrance of the 
 Palatium during the hours of the Sessions. Your 
 
196 
 
 further duties you will find in the Ritual. I now 
 invest you with the Jewel of your office, and the 
 Poniard of defense. B3 prompt to every duty. 
 Prince Marshal, please seat Princess Sentina. 
 
 Prince Marshall: — Sir Grand, I have the pleas- 
 ure of introducing to you Prince , 
 
 who has been elected Prince Wardship. He is now 
 ready to be installed. 
 
 Instructions to Prince Wardship. 
 
 Sir Grand: — Sir Prince, you have been elected 
 Prince Wardship by the members of the Palatiuni. 
 It is a responsible office, and in entrusting you with 
 the position, the members have shown their confi- 
 dence in your integrity and ability. Your station 
 is at the outer post; you are to guard the entrance, 
 and report all who desire admittance. I now invest 
 you with the Jewel of your office, and present to 
 you this sword; use it in defense of your position; 
 may you perform your duties with honor. Prince 
 Marshal, please seat Prince Wardship. 
 
 Sir Grand gives four raps, and all stand, except 
 the newly installed officers. Prince Marsh d forms 
 a procession of the Palatine Guards, Princesses, 
 Uniform Rank Knights and Priestesses (if there is 
 room) who march four timos around the hall, while 
 the band is playing, or while some familiar hymn is 
 sung. 
 
 At the conclusion of the fourth round, the Prince 
 Marshal forms a circle around the installed officers — 
 the Palatine Guards and the Princesses in the inner 
 circle, and the Uniform Rank Knights and Priest- 
 esses on the outer circle. 
 
197 
 
 Prince Marshal : — Palatine Guards and Uniform 
 Rank Knights, Handle Swords ! Draw Swords ! ! 
 Present Swords ! ! ! Princesses, Handle Poniards ! 
 Draw Poniards ! ! Present Poniards ! ! ! 
 
 Sir Grand: — By virtue of the authority in me 
 vested as Installing Officer, I now and here an- 
 nounce that the officers of Palatium, No. — , 
 
 are duly installed and ready to perform the duties 
 of their several offices for the ensuing Palatium 
 year. 
 
 Prince Marshal: — Salute the installed officers. 
 (The salute with swords and poniards is given four 
 times.) Carry Swords! Return Swords and Po- 
 niards ! ! 
 
 The P. P. or Y.-P. (while all the officers stand) 
 says : — By virtue of the authority in me vested, I 
 
 announce that Palatium, No. — , is at rest 
 
 from work. Members of the Temples, Tabernacles 
 and Palatiums, I thank you for your assistance. 
 You are now disbanded. 
 
 Music or singing, after which addresses may be 
 delivered, followed by a drill and march. 
 
FUNERAL CEREMONY 
 
 :OF THE 
 
 PALATINE GUARDS, 
 
 198 
 
BURIAL CEREMONY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 PALATINE GUARDS 
 
 :0: 
 
 Instructions. 
 
 1. — A Palatine Guard, to be enterred with the 
 full honors, must be a member of the Uniform Rank, 
 and in good standing in the Palatium. 
 
 2. — At the summons of the Presiding Prince, 
 the Palatine Guards assemble to prepare for the 
 interment. 
 
 3. — The Guards must attend in full uniform, with 
 their sword hilts and banner draped in mourning, 
 the officers wearins^ their Jewels. 
 
 4. — On the day on which the remains are to be 
 interred, the Guards shall assemble in their hall, and 
 march to the residence, or wherever the remains 
 are, in Palatine order. The sword and chapeau is 
 borne in the rear of the P. P. On arriving at the 
 place were the remains are, the lines are opened to 
 the right and left, the pall-bearers pass through 
 the lines, and place the sword and chapeau on the 
 casket. The pall-bearers (Palatine Guards) take 
 the casket, and, conducted by Prince Wardship 
 pass through the lines and place it in the hearse. 
 
 199 
 
200 
 
 5. — The procession is then formed by Prince 
 Marshal and his Assistant Marshals, whereupon they 
 march to the church or place where the services are 
 to be held, in the following order: 
 
 Prince Wardship (on Foot or Horse). 
 
 Music. 
 
 Other Societies or Orders (Men). 
 
 Uniform Kank (Knights). 
 
 Palatine Guards. 
 
 CO Cm 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 p nps\ p 
 
 ? M 
 
 B 
 
 !— ! 
 
 ^ 1 ' 
 
 ^1 
 
 1 
 
 03 ? . 
 
 B 
 
 G- 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 1 || 
 
 1 
 
 P 
 •-J 
 
 ^~^ oj 
 
 H 
 
 CD 
 
 c3 Y 
 
 9 
 
 >-i 
 
 Ph i 
 
 W 
 
 GO 
 
 Family (in Carriages). 
 
 Princesses (in Carriages). 
 
 Priestesses (in Carriages). 
 
 Grand and Past Grand Officers. 
 
 Citizens (in Carriages). 
 
 6. — After arriving at the church, the Palatine 
 Guards and Knights shall enter in reversed order, 
 preceding the casket, followed by the Princesses, 
 Priestesses and Grand Officers. 
 
 7. — The P. P. shall preside during the ceremony, 
 assisted by Prince Clericus. After the sermon, the 
 Uniform Rank Knights open with their burial 
 ceremony, which is followed by the Palatine 
 Guards. The members of the order stand during 
 prayer and the ceremonies. 
 
201 
 
 8. — While the remaius are lying in state, there 
 shall be either two Uniform Rank Knights or two 
 Palatine Guards on duty. 
 
 9. — The march to the cemetery shall be in the same 
 order as the march to the church was. When the 
 head of the procession arrives at the "^lace of in- 
 terment, the P. P., preceded by the P. M., pass 
 through, followed by the Uniform Rank Knights and 
 then by the other orders. On arriving at the grave 
 or vault, they open ranks, and the casket is con- 
 veyed through to the grave, and placed over the 
 tomb. A circle is then formed around the casket, 
 with the family at the foot and the P. P., P. C, 
 C. M., C. O., and clergy at the head, the Uniform 
 Rank Knights then form the inner circle and per- 
 form their part of the ceremony without lowering 
 the casket. When they have finished, the Palatine 
 Guards take the inner circle, and they finish the 
 ceremony. 
 
 10. — The face of the deceased should be uncovered 
 during the ceremony in the church, if thought 
 proper. 
 
 11. — The funeral procession shall return from the 
 cemetery to the place of disbandment in the same 
 order in which it was originally formed. The P. 
 P., on arriving at the place of disbandment, shall 
 declare the Palatium at rest. 
 
 12. — Princesses and Priestesses shall wear their 
 Badges of membership, and officers their Jewels of 
 office, or full dress, if all the members decide to 
 appear in full regalia. 
 
202 
 
 Ceremony ix the Church. 
 
 After the sermon and church services, and after 
 the Uniform Rank Knights have performed their 
 part of the church ceremony and are seated, the P. 
 P. commands, in ak)W voice: — Guards, Stand and 
 Uncover! *The Guards fold their arms, with 
 chapcaus resting on their left arms. 
 
 Presiding Prince: — Palatine Guards, we are sad 
 to-day ; our ranks have been broken ; a true and 
 trusted Guard has passed through the gates of 
 death ; Prince is no more of earth ; he re- 
 ceived the summons that must be obeyed ; kind and 
 loving arms could not keep him here ; our swords, 
 so ready to be wielded in defence of every Palatine 
 Guard, remain in their scabbards, our blades could 
 not shield him in that dreadful hour, nor defend him 
 
 in his struggle with death. Prince has 
 
 passed the portals, and we to-day mourn his demise. 
 The Royal House of Media will no more hear his 
 Princely voice. He is silent; he is wrapped in life- 
 less mortality ; he will never meet the Guards again 
 in the Palatine. His hand will never wield his 
 sword. His feet will never tread the earth aijain 
 in the royal march and drill; all that remains of 
 Brother Prince and Guard is his lifeless body 
 stilled in the embrace of death. Palatine Guards, 
 Cover I Let us reverently attend to the lessons of 
 the Sacred Scriptures. 
 
 Prince Clericus: — In my distress, I called upon 
 the Lord and cried unto my God. He heard my 
 voice, and my cry came before Him. I will rejoice 
 in Thy mercy ! 
 
^203 
 
 Response r^Hear us, Lord, and in mercy save us. 
 
 P. C: — The Lord will give strength unto His 
 people; we trust in Thee, O Lord; shine upon Thy 
 servants. 
 
 Res. : — Hear, O Lord, have mercy upon us. 
 
 P. C. : — God is our refuge and strength, an ever 
 present help in trouble. 
 
 Res. : — Lord, remember us in love and mercy. 
 
 P. C. : — Help us, O God, of our salvation, for 
 the glory of Thy name, and deliver us and purge 
 away our sins, for Thy name's sake. 
 
 Res. : — Lord, let Thy tender mercies remain with 
 us. 
 
 P. C. : — Teach us to number our days, that we 
 may apply our hearts to wisdom. 
 
 Res. : — Bless the Lord, oh my soul. 
 
 P. C. : — Praise ye the Lord, O give thanks unto 
 the Lord, for He is good; His mercy endureth for- 
 ever. 
 
 Res.: — Save us, O Lord, we praise Thee, our 
 Savior. 
 
 P. C. :— Teach us, O Lord, to do They will, for 
 Thou art our God; lead us in the land of the up- 
 right. 
 
 Res. : — Deliver us, O Lord, and we will praise 
 Thy holy name. 
 
 P. P. : — One by one we pass from earth. Shall 
 we remember our Princely Brother ? 
 
 Res. : — We will revere his name and his many 
 virtues. 
 
 P. P. : — Shall his name be recorded in the Pala- 
 tium? 
 
204 
 
 Res. : — The record is made. It is^ written here, 
 (hand on heart). 
 
 P. P. : — He was loved and respected; may he be 
 enrolled in the heavenly land. 
 
 Res. : — May he rest in the never-fading light of 
 glory. 
 
 The following is then sung : 
 C. M. 
 
 I. 
 
 Teach me the measure of my days. 
 
 Thou maker of my frame : 
 I would survey life's narrow space, 
 
 And learn how frail I am. 
 
 A span is all that we can boast, 
 
 An inch or two of time; 
 Man is but vanity and dust, 
 
 In all his flower and prime. 
 
 III. 
 What shall I wish, or wait for then, 
 
 From creatures, earth and dust? 
 They make our expectations vain, 
 
 And disappoint our trust. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Now I forbid my carnal hope, 
 My fond desires recall; 
 
 I give my mortal interest up. 
 And make my God my all. 
 
 Whereupon the following prayer is read by Prince 
 Clericus : 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 Our Heavenly Father, in -the name of Jesus, our 
 Redeemer, in our sorrow we come unto Thee. Thou 
 art the heart's comforter, in mercy hear us. We 
 thank Thee for Thy providential care over us during 
 
205 
 
 our past life. Oh let the light of Thy divine coun- 
 tenance shine within us at this hour. We know- 
 that Thou hearest our prayer. Death has entered 
 our ranks. A Brother has passed through the dark 
 valley. We mourn his departure. We humbly 
 beseach Thee to give consolation to the bereaved 
 friends and relatives, and teach us, who are assem- 
 bled here, that we are but mortal, that we are frail, 
 and that our days on earth are uncertain. O Lord, 
 draw us unto Thee, that we may apply our hearts to 
 holy wisdom, which will in the end bring us to a 
 life of eternal joy and happiness, through the mer- 
 its of Thy Only Son, Jesus Christ, our Eedeemer. 
 Amen ! Amen ! I 
 
 Kesponse: — The Lord is merciful, and will hear 
 our prayer! 
 
 P. P. : — Princes, Handle Swords ! Draw Swords ! I 
 Present Swords ! ! ! Sir Princes of the Palatine 
 Guards, we are here to pay our last respects to a 
 
 Prince Palatine. All that remains of Prince 
 
 lies before us, wrapped in the cold embrace of 
 death. He will never meet us again in our pleas- 
 ant Pnlatium; his seat is vacant; his voice, which 
 mingled with ours in the Royal House of Media, is 
 silent. When the command is given to Fall in. 
 Guards^ his absence will be felt; no more will he 
 respond to his number at the call of the Prince 
 Marshal; his sword, which he was ever ready to 
 draw at the command, his hand will grasp it no 
 more; the Guards that were reaoly at all times to 
 defend him with their swords, and to protect him 
 in the time of danger by a wall of steel, were im- 
 potent when the enemy — Death — claimed him; our 
 
206 
 
 blades of steel could not shield our Princely Pala- 
 tine; the guarded doors of our Palatium could not 
 prevent the entrance of the "grim slayer;" the lov- 
 ing hands of the Princesses of Media would have 
 held their Princely brother to the earth, but smiles 
 and tears could jtht retain him, nor prevent the cold 
 touch of deatJj''^to the silent rest we h;ive brought 
 him; he sleeps with the unnumbered multitude; 
 canily he passed into the regions of the dead ; may 
 he find ^at rest which is given to the believer in the 
 Presicjfng Prince of the Heavenly Land ; may the 
 Son and Savior give him a place in the paradise 
 of^'bliss, and exchange his earthly armor for the 
 royal robes of eternal light; this sad and sorrow- 
 ful circle tells how well we loved our Prince Pala- 
 tine ; with him we cannot again meet on earth ; he 
 is gone, to return no more ; we will remember his 
 many good qualities, and over his faults cast the 
 mantle of forgetf ulness. Princes and Princesses of 
 the Royal House of Media, one by one we must pass 
 from earth; our names will be dropped from the 
 roll-books of the Palatium; may we so live that 
 our names will be enrolled in the Lamb's Book of 
 Life; that when the chill of death clogs our blood, 
 and our hearts cease to respond to the call of life, 
 our unfettered souls will have clear passports into 
 the realms of eternal bliss and happiness. 
 
 After the usual custom of reviewing the body has 
 been observed by the congregation, Palatine Guards, 
 Uniform Rank Knights, Princesses and Priestesses, 
 the procession will then form and march to the 
 place of interment. After the Uniform Rank 
 Knights have finished their ceremony, the Pala- 
 
207 
 
 tine Guards form a perfect circle around the casket, 
 witii the P. P. and P. C. at the head, and the fam- 
 ily of the departed at the foot of the grave. 
 
 P. P. : — Palatine Guards, salute Prince Palatine 
 for the last time. (Four salutes are given.) 
 
 If there is room, the Prince forms the Palatine 
 Guards in single file, and marches them around the 
 casket four times, each touching the head of the 
 casket with the point of his sword every time he 
 goes around, and says. Farewell. 
 
 Music ; or the following hymn is sung : 
 
 C. M. 
 I. 
 
 Thy mighty arm ! O God, was nigh 
 
 When we our foes assailed ; 
 'Tis Thou hast raised our honors high. 
 
 And o'er their host prevailed, 
 ir. 
 The thund'ring horse, the martial band, 
 
 Without Thine aid were vain; 
 And vict'ry flies at Thy command 
 
 To crown the bright campaign. 
 
 Their mounds, their camps, their lofty towers, 
 
 Into our hands are given; 
 Not from desert or strength of ours, 
 
 But through the grace of Heaven. 
 
 IV. 
 
 The faithful tablet of our heart 
 
 These mercies shall record. 
 And never thence shall they depart, 
 
 Nor we forget the Lord. 
 
 V. 
 
 To our young race will we proclaim 
 
 The mercies God has shown; 
 That they may learn to bless His name. 
 
 And choose Him for tUejr o\vn. 
 
208 
 
 VI. 
 
 Thus, while we sleep in silent dust, 
 
 When threat'ning dangers come, 
 Their fathers' God shall be their trust. 
 
 Their refuge, and their home. 
 
 After the circle is formed, Prince Marshal gives 
 the command to reverse swords and uncover. (The 
 Guards stand with folded arms, their chapeaus 
 resting on their right arms over the hilts of their 
 swords.) The Prince Marshal removes the chapeau 
 and sword from the casket, whereupon it is lowered 
 into the grave. 
 
 The Prince Marshal points the deceased Prince's 
 sword over the grave, and says: — Sir Princes, this 
 is an emblem of defense and attack. Our deceased 
 Palatine Brother was instructed that with the hilt 
 in his hand he was to defend the innocent and 
 protect the weak, and be true to every trust. The 
 sword is a symbol of the Sword of the Spirit. He 
 who possesses that symbolized sword has the pass 
 into the holy presence of the Master Commander 
 of Heaven and Earth. May the spiritual sword of 
 love permit us to meet our Palatine Brother in the 
 Heavenly Mansions. 
 
 Prince Marshal: — Palatine Guards, Cover! Ke- 
 turn Swords ! I Hear and Assist Prince Cleri- 
 
 cus 
 
 T ' T 
 
 P. C. : — I am the resurrection and the life. He 
 that believeth in Me, though he w^ere dead, yet 
 shall he live. Whosoever liveth and believeth in 
 Me, shall never die. To the earth we commit the 
 mortal remains of our deceased Brother. May his 
 soul rest in peace, Earth to eurtU, {Oast earth 
 
209 
 
 on the casket.) Dust to dust. (Oast again.) 
 Ashes to ashes. (Cast again.) Until the morn 
 of the resurrection, when, lii^e our risen Lord and 
 Savior, may he break every chain and bond of 
 death, and ascend to dwell forever in the sunshine 
 of heavenly beams. 
 
 Response: — In Solo Deo Salusf 
 
 The P. M. gives the command to uncover (the 
 Guards stand with folded arms and bowed heads. ) 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 Our Father which art in Heaven, hallowed be 
 Thy name. Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done 
 in earth as it is in heaven. Give us this day our 
 daily bread; and forgive us our trespasses as we 
 forgive those who trespass against us. Lead us 
 not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. For 
 Thine is the kingdom, and the power, and the 
 glory, forever. Amen ! 
 
 Response : — Amen ! Amen ! I Amen ! I ! 
 
 P. M. : — Palatine Guards, Cover! 
 
 Prince Clericus, or a clergyman, gives the bene- 
 diction. The lines are formed and they march 
 back to the hall, or the P. P. announces the Pala- 
 tiUm at rest, and they disperse. 
 
TABORIAN CADET JAVELINS. 
 
 210 
 
CAPS OF UNIFORM RANK KNIGHTS, PALATINE 
 GUARDS AND TABORIAN CADETS. 
 
 211 
 
General Laws 
 
 GOVERNING 
 
 TENTS OF MAIDS 
 
 AND 
 
 PAGES OF HONOR, 
 
 212 
 
GENERAL LAWS 
 
 GOVERNING 
 
 Tehjs of Maids a^d Pages of Honoi}. 
 
 Instkuctions. 
 
 1. — The membership of Tents shall consist of 
 children rano^ing: from the as^es of six months to 
 eighteen years. 
 
 2. — A Girl must join a Tabernacle when she 
 arrives at the age of sixteen years. She cannot re- 
 main a member of the Tent after that age. 
 
 3. — A Boy must join a Temple when he becomes 
 eighteen years of age. He cannot remain a mem- 
 ber of the Tent after that age. 
 
 4. — The only adult members of a Tent shall be the 
 Queen Mother, Vice-Queen Mother, and Father of 
 the Tent; and they, to hold these offices, must be 
 members in good standing in their respective Tab- 
 ernacles or Temples. 
 
 5. — The Grand Temple and Tabernacle shall 
 frame a Constitution for the government of Tents. 
 
 6. — The Boys of the Tent shall be known as 
 Taborian Cadets. 
 
 7. — The Tent is one of the four departments in 
 the International Order of Twelve. It is governed 
 
 213 
 
214 
 
 by its own laws, and is subject to neither the Tem- 
 ple nor the Tabernacle Constitutions. 
 
 8. — The Queen Mother shall have full control or 
 management of the Tent, and will be held account- 
 able to the Grand Body, under which its charter is 
 held, for the manner in which she administers the 
 laws. 
 
 9. — The Queen Mother shall represent her Tent 
 in the Grand Session, and make a full report of the 
 work and business during the previous Tent year. 
 
 10. — Tents shall elect their own officers. After 
 a Maid or Page moves to place a candidate in nomi- 
 nation — and being duly seconded — a standing vote 
 is taken, and a majority of the votes given will 
 elect. The Queen Mother, assisted by the Father 
 of the Tent, shall conduct the election. 
 
 11. — The Tent has no secret degrees. The only 
 secrets being the Password and Saluting Sign. 
 
 12. — When a Maid arrives at the age of sixteen 
 years, she choses the Tabernacle which she desires 
 to join. The Queen Mother gives her a transfer, 
 recommending her to the Tabernacle which she de- 
 sires to join, giving her age and stating how long 
 she has been a member of the Tent, and shall cer- 
 tify as to her moral character, good deportment, 
 and that she is in perfect health. A Tabernacle 
 shall not receive a member from any Tent, unless 
 acceptable as regards morality and good deport- 
 ment, and is in perfect health. 
 
 13. — When a Taborian Cadet arrives at the age 
 of eighteen years, he must choose the Temple 
 which he desires to join. The Queen Mother gives 
 him a transfer, stating how long he has been a 
 
215 
 
 member of the Tent, recommending him, giving 
 his age, deportment, and general health. A Tem- 
 ple shall not receive a member from a Tent, unless 
 his deportment is good, and he is in sound health. 
 
 14. — A Maid cannot remain a member of a Tent 
 after she becomes sixteen years of age. A Taborian 
 Cadet cannot remain a Page in the Tent after he 
 arrives at the age of eighteen years. 
 
 15. — The Tabernacle to which the Maid is trans- 
 ferred, must confer all the degrees upon her, and 
 enroll her name. (The Maid shall pay one dollar 
 when her name is enrolled.) 
 
 16. — The Temple to which the Page is transferred, 
 shall give him all the degrees. (He shall pay one 
 dollar on being enrolled.) 
 
 GENERAL LAWS. 
 
 ARTICLE I. 
 
 REGALIA. 
 
 Section 1. — The regalia of the Maids shall con- 
 sist of a white dress; white gloves; a pink sash, 
 four inches wide, worn from either right or left 
 shoulder ; a wreath of leaves and flowers for head- 
 wear, and a Tent badge. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Taborian Cadets shall be neatly 
 dressed in dark blue suits; knee pants and scarlet 
 stockings; coat buttoned up in front; brown 
 gloves; scarlet belt; Tent badge, to be worn on 
 left breast; iron or tin-pointed javelin, five feet 
 long, one inch and a half in thickness, of scarlet 
 color; black cadet cap, with silver band, and letters 
 T. C. thereon. 
 
216 
 
 ARTICLE II. 
 
 Section 1. — The banner shall be two by three 
 feet, one side deep scarlet, with the name of the 
 city and State thereon. The other side light green, 
 with the name and number of the Tent. The ban- 
 ner is trimmed with silver lace and fringe. 
 
 ARTICLE III. 
 
 Section 1. — The regalia of the Queen Mother 
 shall be a white dress and a dark pink robe, en- 
 train; a golden coronet, ornamented with white 
 stones; pink gloves; emerald green belt, with sil- 
 ver clasps, and figures 333 ; a scepter, made to suit 
 the taste. When she does not wear the robe, the 
 regalia is an emerald green collar, trimmed with 
 twelve silver stars and silver lace, and the letters 
 Q. M. thereon. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Vice-Queen Mother wears the 
 same, excepting the robe and scepter. 
 
 Sec. 3.— The Father of the Tent shall wear the 
 Uniform Rank dress and regalia. 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 Section 1. — The officers of the Tent may be in- 
 stalled by any Past Q. M., Grand Deputy, or G. 
 Q. M. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The manner of installing is as follows: 
 All the officers are seated in their proper stations. 
 Their individual duties are read to them from the 
 Constitution, commencing with the Queen Mother, 
 and so on until all the officers are installed. When 
 this is finished, the Installing Officer calls up all 
 those present, except the officers who have just 
 
217 
 
 been installed; he then declares the officers in- 
 stalled, and all give the twelve claps — four times 
 three. 
 
 Sec. 3. — At the conclusion of the installing cere- 
 mony, the Taborian Cadets may drill, or have other 
 exercises, under the orders of the Queen Mother. 
 Every Page over the age of six years is a Cadet. 
 The Father of the Tent is required to give full in- 
 structions to the Tent Marshal in the drill and 
 march. 
 
 ARTICLE V. 
 
 Section 1. — The Queen Mother must carefully 
 instruct the children in deportment and politeness, 
 and teach them to respect persons older than them- 
 selves, to love the members of the Tent, and to 
 meet at the Sessions of the Tent punctually at the 
 appointed hour. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Queen Mother must not permit 
 noisy and unruly children to remain members of 
 the Tent. The Queen Mother has the authority to 
 admit and enroll as many children in her Tent as 
 she desires. She must have the Constitution and 
 By-Laws read in open session at least once in every 
 quarter. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The Queen Mother must report quar- 
 terly the condition of her Tent to the Grand Queen 
 Mother, as also the number of members. 
 
 Sec. 4. — Every new member is introduced to the 
 Tent, and received with twelve claps — four times 
 three — and instructed in the Password and Salut- 
 ing Sign, and impressed that they shall keep them 
 secret from all who are not members of the Tent. 
 
218 
 
 ARTICLE YL 
 
 TENT TREASURER. 
 
 Section 1. — The Queen Mother shall be the 
 Treasurer of the Tent. She shall receive all moneys 
 and valuables belonging to the Tent, and shall re- 
 port monthly, at a regular meeting of the Tent, 
 the amount of money received and paid out during 
 the month. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The Yice-Queen Mother shall receive 
 all money paid into the Tent, and account for it in 
 a book kept for that purpose. She shall also keep 
 an account of all money drawn from the Treasurer. 
 
 Sec. 3.— Money can only be drawn from the 
 Treasurer on a warrant signed by the Y.-Q. M., 
 and countersigned by the C. R. K. 
 
FORM OF THE TENT. 
 
 c. c. 
 
 Q.M.Ms. 
 
 Q. M, P. Q. Ms. 
 C. M. P. 
 
 Tisitors. 
 
 C. B. B. 
 
 C. T. K. 
 
 TENT. 
 
 F. T. 
 
 C. T. M. 
 
 219 
 
'iJJ».../»^l..t«a» 
 
 AND PAGES 
 
 820 
 
 THE TENT BADGE. 
 
N«!t,H 
 
 >^r"*^ 1f^' ^\k]i 
 
 221 
 
222 
 
 Officers of the Tent. 
 
 l._Queen Mother (Adult) Q. M. 
 
 2._Vice-Queen Mother (Adult) V.-Q. M. 
 
 3.— Father of the Tent (Adult).. . . . . .F. O. T. 
 
 4.— Chief Maid Presiding (Girl) CM. P. 
 
 5.— Chief Page Vice (Boy) C. P. V. 
 
 6._Chief Record Keeper (Girl) C. R. K. 
 
 7. — Vice-Record Keeper (Boy) V.-R. K. 
 
 8.— Chief of the Chest (Girl) C. O. C. 
 
 9.— Chief Tent Marshal (Boy) C. T. M. 
 
 lO.—Chief Banner Bearer (Boy) C. B. B. 
 
 11.— Chief Cup Bearer (Girl) C. C. B. 
 
 12.— Chief Cup Bearer (Girl) C. C. B. 
 
 13.— Chief Cup Bearer (Girl) C. C. B. 
 
 14.— Chief Mace Bearer (Boy) C. M. B. 
 
 15.— Chief Mace Bearer (Boy) CM. B. 
 
 16.— Chief Mace Bearer (Boy) C M. B. 
 
 17.— Chief Tent Keeper (Girl) C T. K. 
 
 18._0uter Tent Keeper (Boy) O. T. K. 
 
 19. — Queen Mother's Messenger (Girl).Q. M. M. 
 20. — Queen Mother's Messenger (Boy).Q. M. M. 
 
 General Regulations. 
 
 1, — The Queen Mother shall represent her Tent 
 at the Grand Session of the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle, and at the THennial Grand Session. 
 
 2. — The Tent is a department in the International 
 Order of Twelve, and the government of the Tent 
 is under the control of the Queen Mother. She is 
 responsible for any violation of the laws of the 
 Order. 
 
 3. — The Taborian Cadets shall be commanded by 
 the Chief Tent Marshal. He must instruct them ia 
 
223 
 
 the drill and march. The Cadets must drill regu- 
 larly. 
 
 4. — The Queen Mother shall instruct the Maids 
 and Pages in mannerly behavior, the use of polite 
 language, obedience^ to parents, teachers and 
 elderly persons, enforce cleanliness in dress and 
 person, and inculcate a love for home and the 
 Order. 
 
 5. — A Tent may make its own By-Laws, but they 
 shall not conflict with the Constitution. The By- 
 Laws may regulate the fees for membership, the 
 monthly dues, the sick dues and burial benefits, and 
 the day and hour of the regular meetings. 
 
 6. — Queen Mothers will be held responsible should 
 they fail to enforce the general laws respecting 
 Tents. All Tents must have precisely the same 
 kind of dress, regalia and badges as the General 
 Laws direct. 
 
FUNERAL CEREMONY 
 
 OF 
 
 •t*XENXSi^ 
 
 OF 
 
 MAIDS AlfD PAGES OF M^ 
 
 \ 
 
 224 
 
FUNERAL CEREMONIES 
 
 OF 
 
 Tents of Maids and Pages of Honoh_. 
 
 Instructions. 
 
 When the death of a member of the Tent is re- 
 ported to the Queen Mother, it is her first duty to 
 consult the parents or guardians of the child re- 
 garding the arrangements for the funeral. The 
 Tent is not expected to pay the entire expense ; it 
 pays only the sum allowed by the By-Laws of the 
 Tent. If the parents desire to have the child 
 buried according to the ceremonies of the Tent, the 
 Queen Mother proceeds to make all the needed pre- 
 paration. The members of the Tent are called to 
 meet, the children instructed, and other Tents are 
 invited to attend. 
 
 The Funeral Dress. 
 
 The dress of the Maids shall be black, with a 
 small white collar ; on the left breast they shall wear 
 the Badge of the Tent ; on their heads a wreath of 
 white flowers is placed, and white gloves are worn. 
 
 The Tabor i an Cadets shall wear the reo:ulation 
 dress, cap and white gloves; their javelins have a 
 crape bow near the spear. 
 
 (8— Dickson's New Manual.) 225 
 
226 
 
 The Queen Mother shall wear the Tabernacle 
 funeral dress and her Jewel of oflSce; her scepte'r is 
 to be craped. 
 
 The Vice-Queen Mother shall wear the Tabernacle 
 dress and her Jewel of office. 
 
 The Father of the Tent shall wear a black suit, 
 white gloves, and his Jewel of office. 
 
 The Pall-bearers — either Maids or Cadets — shall 
 wear, in addition to their other dress, white sashes. 
 
 The Banner of the Tent shall be trimmed with 
 white and black crape. 
 
 The March. 
 
 The Maids and Pages shall assemble at a desig- 
 nated place near the residence of their deceased 
 member, and form in line of march, as follows : 
 
 ^ Father of Tent. 
 
 2 Queen Mother and Vice-Queen Mother. 
 g Cadets, by twos. 
 
 -g Banner. 
 
 ^ Maids, by twos. 
 
 CO 
 
 Family, in Carriages. 
 Citizens, in Carriages. 
 
 The Knights and Daughters will show their re- 
 spects by wearing their Jewels or Badges during 
 the ceremony. 
 
227 
 
 Ceremony at the Church. 
 
 If the remains are conveyed to a church, when 
 the procession arrives there the lines are opened, 
 and the casket is conducted by the Father of the 
 Tent to the door of the church, where the minister 
 meets it. They then enter in the following order; 
 
 Minister and Father of the Tent. 
 
 Family. 
 Queen Mother and Vice-Queen Mother. 
 Maids, by twos. 
 Cadets, by twos. 
 
 When the casket is rested, the C. M. P. sits at 
 the head of casket, and the C. P. V. at the foot. 
 The Q. M., V.-Q. M. and F. of T. in front of the 
 altar, and the Maids and Pages in the rear of the 
 family 
 
 The minister then opens the services, and preaches 
 the sermon. After which the Queen Mother or 
 Father reads the following (all stand) : 
 
 Maids and Pages, we assemble at this hour, in 
 obedience to a solemn duty which we owe to the 
 
 memory of one who was a loving member of 
 
 Tent, No. — . We mourn the loss of a near and 
 dear child. A golden link in the chain that formed 
 
228 
 
 around our Tent is broken, and a precious name is 
 transferred from our roll-book to the roll-call in 
 the Land of Eternal Bliss. Children of Tabor, we 
 who are in life now are reminded that, though 
 young in years, we may be called away at any hour. 
 Let us trust and have faith in God, our Savior. 
 To-day we bid farewell to (give the name), and 
 pray that it may be our happy lot to meet her (or 
 him) in the Paradise of Eternal Rest. Mothers, 
 Fathers, Brothers and Sisters, remember that one 
 by one we depart from earth. Let us pray to our 
 Heavenly Father, that he may unite all the family 
 in the Kingdom of Heaven, where there will be 
 no more separation. 
 
 The following is then sung by the Maids and 
 Pages : 
 
 ** When blooming youth is snatched away.^'' 
 
 I. 
 
 ■ When blooming youth is snatched away 
 By death's resistless hand, 
 Our hearts the mournful tribute pay 
 Which pity must demand. 
 
 II. ; 
 
 While pity prompts the rising sigh, 
 
 Oh, may this truth, impressed 
 With awful power, **I, too, must die," 
 
 Sink deep in every breast I 
 III. 
 Let this vain world engage no more: 
 
 Behold the opening tomb! 
 It bids us seize the present hour; 
 
 To-morrow, death may oome. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Oh, let us fly — to Jesus fly I 
 
 Whose powerful arm can save; 
 Then shall our hopes ascend on high, 
 
 And triumph o'er the gravel 
 
229 ^ 
 
 V. 
 
 Great God ! Thy sovereign grace impart, 
 
 With cleansing, healing power; 
 This only can prepare the heart 
 
 For death's surprising hour. 
 
 The Queen Mother then gives one rap, and all are 
 seated. 
 
 The Chief Record Keeper reads from the record 
 of the Tent the name and age of the decea-ed, how 
 long he (or she) was a member of the Tent, and 
 the date of birth and death, parents' names, and date 
 of burial. (This record must be carefully written 
 in the record book, before the funeral takes place.)* 
 
 The Queen Mother gives three raps, and all the 
 Maids and Pages stand, with their arms folded 
 across their breasts. The Queen Mother then leads 
 the invocation, and the children respond. 
 
 Invocation. 
 
 Queen Mother: — Lord Jesus, Thou hast said: 
 
 Response : — Suffer little children 
 
 Q. M. : — To come unto me, 
 
 Res. : — ^And forbid th<;m not, 
 
 Q. M. : — For of such is the Kingdom of Heaven. 
 
 Res. : — O Lord, teach our hearts to praise Thee. 
 
 Q. M. : — Thou art full of love and kindness. 
 
 Res. : — Lord Jesus, bless and save our parents. 
 
 Q. M. : — O Lord, bless the officers and children 
 of the Tents. 
 
 Res. : — God, in mercy hear our prayers. 
 
 Q. M. : — Lord, save the world, and bless all man- 
 kind. 
 
 Res. : — Lord Jesus, bless Thy church and people. 
 
 Q. M. : — In God alone there is safety. 
 
230 
 
 Res. : — Lord, hear our prayer, and bless and 
 comfort all that mourn. 
 
 Q. M. : — Lord, dismiss us with Thy blessing. 
 
 Closing of the Church Service. 
 
 The Doxology is sung (the congregation stand- 
 ing). The minister then dismisses them, and re- 
 quests the congregation to be seated until the Tent 
 marches out. 
 
 While some familiar hymn is sung, the children 
 of the Tents march around and view tlie remains, 
 they then pass out and form in open ranks on the 
 outside. The congregation is then permitted to 
 view the remains, whereupon they pass out. The 
 family bids a last farewell, and the casket is carried 
 out in the following order: First, the minister; 
 second, the Queen Mother and Vice-Queen Mother; 
 third, the Father of the Tent; and fourth, the cas- 
 ket, with the family following. All pass through 
 the lines to the hearse. 
 
 The March to the Cemetery. 
 Q. M. V.-Q. M. F. of T., and Pastor. 
 
 cc h1s\ 
 
 hj 
 
 u KiJ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 11 
 
 
 ^ mm 
 
 cr 
 
 '^ IH 
 
 o 
 
 ^ U B 
 
 » 
 
 1 wl JgE 
 
 i-j 
 
 ^ W Jg 
 
 o 
 
 ^ vm 
 
 •-s 
 
 P^ W 
 
 r/i 
 
 Family. 
 
 The Children of the Tents. 
 
 The Friends of the Family. 
 
 (All of the above in carriages or vehicles.) 
 
231 
 
 Ceremony at the Grave. 
 
 At the grave the children of the Tents open 
 ranks, and the casket is conveyed through in the 
 same manner in which it left the church, and is 
 placed over the grave. The children form a circle 
 around the casket, with the Q. M., V.-Q. M. , F. of 
 T. and the minister at the head, and the family at 
 the foot. 
 
 The children join hands, and the following, or 
 some other familiar hymn, is sung: 
 
 CM. 
 
 '■''It is appointed unto men once to die.'''* 
 I. 
 If I must die, Lord let me die 
 With hope in Jesus' blood — 
 The blood that saves from sin and guilt, 
 And reconciles to God. 
 
 II. 
 If I must die, then let me die 
 
 In peace with all mankind, 
 And change these fleeting joys below 
 
 For pleasures all refined. 
 
 III. 
 If I must die — and die I shall — 
 
 Let some kind seraph come. 
 And bear me on his friendly wing 
 
 To my celestial home. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Of Canaan's land, from Pisgah's top, 
 
 May I but have a view, 
 Though Jordan should o'erflow its banks, 
 
 I'll boldly venture through. 
 
 Prayer by the minister or the Father of the Tent. 
 The casket is then lowered into the grave. The 
 children forming the chain raise their hands until 
 
232 
 
 the casket arrives at the bottom of the grave, they 
 then drop their hands and break the chain, they 
 then fold their arms across their breasts until the 
 ceremony is ended. 
 
 The minister or the Father of the Tent concludes 
 the ceremony, as follows : 
 
 Forasmuch as it hath pleased Almightv God, in 
 His wise providence, to take out of this world the 
 soul of our deceased child, we therefore commit its 
 body to the ground — earth to earth, ashes to ashes, 
 dust to dust; looking for the general resurrection 
 in the last day, and the life of the world to come, 
 through our Lord Jesus Christ, at whose second 
 coming in glorious majesty to judge the world, the 
 earth and the sea shall give up their dead; and the 
 corruptible bodies of those who sleep in Him shall 
 be changed, and made like unto His own glorious 
 body, according to the mighty workings whereby He 
 is able to subdue all things unto Himself. 
 
 An appropriate hymn is sung, and the ceremony is 
 closed by the Lord's Prayer : Our father who art in 
 heaven, hallowed be Thy name ; Thy kingdom come ; 
 Thy will be done on earth, as it is in Heaven; give 
 us this day our daily bread ; and forgive us our tres- 
 passes, as we forgive those who trespass against 
 us; and lead us not into temptation, but deliver us 
 from evil. Amen! 
 
 Benediction, and all return to their homes. 
 
CEREMONY 
 
 OP 
 
 AYING CopEIi-STOp. 
 
 233 
 
CEREMONY 
 
 OP 
 
 Laying Corner-Stone. 
 
 : o : 
 
 The laying of corner-stones of churches, public 
 buildings and bridges, is a part of the duty of the 
 International Order of Twelve. 
 
 The ceremony of laying the corner-stone shall 
 be under the control of the International Grand 
 Temple and' Tabernacle, or of tlie Grand Temple 
 and Tabernacle. 
 
 Parties desiring the Order to lay their corner- 
 stone, must make application to the Chief Mentor 
 of the nearest Temple, stating the time and place 
 at which they wish the ceremony to. be performed. 
 This petition must be signed by the committee that 
 has charge of the building. A Chief Mentor, when 
 he receives the petition, must lay the matter before 
 the Chief Grand Mentor, with any recommendation 
 that he and the other Chief Mentors ( if there are 
 other Temples in the city or town) have to make. 
 The Chief Grand Mentor, when he receives the pe- 
 tition and the recommendation (if favorable), issues 
 an official notice to the Chief Mentors to prepare 
 for a procession, and to assist in laying the corner- 
 stone. 
 
 234 
 
235 
 
 On the day on which the ceremony is to be per- 
 formed, the Uniform Rank Knights and Palatine 
 Guards shall assemble in their hall in full dress 
 regalia. The Chief Grand Mentor (if present) 
 opens the Grand Temple and Tabernacle, and ap- 
 points Grand Officers pro-tem., if the regular offi- 
 cers are not present. (If the C. G. M. cannot at- 
 tend, he shall appoint a Deputy to represent him. ) 
 
 If the Daughter Priestesses take part in the pro- 
 cession, they shall wear full dress regalia, or they 
 may wear their Jewels and Badges. 
 
 The Vice-Grand Mentor carries the ewer with 
 earth (sand). 
 
 The Chief Grand Scribe carries the ewer with 
 corn. 
 
 The Chief Grand Treasurer carries the ewer with 
 pure water. 
 
 The procession is under the command of the 
 Grand Drill-Master and his aides. 
 
 Form of Procession. 
 
 Chief Sentinel. 
 
 Music. 
 
 Taborian Cadets. 
 
 Uniform Rank. 
 
 Palatine Guards. 
 
 Past Chief Mentors. 
 
 Chief Mentor. 
 
 Banner. 
 
 C. G. St. 
 
 C. G. S. C. G. T. 
 
 y.-G. M. 
 Grand Officers. 
 
236 
 
 Past Grand Officers. 
 
 « Past Chief Grand Mentors. 
 
 Chief Grand Mentor. 
 
 Guard, Guard, 
 
 (with Drawn Sword.) (with Drawn Sword.) 
 
 I. C. G. Sentinel. 
 
 I. G. Officers. 
 
 I. C. G. M. 
 
 Three Guards, with Drawn Swords. 
 
 Maids of Honor, in Vehicles. 
 
 Priestesses, in Carriages. 
 
 When the procession arrives at the place where 
 
 the stone is to be laid, the ranks are opened, ^nd 
 
 the officer who is delegated to lay the stone, marches 
 
 through, followed by those who were in the rear; 
 
 they march around the stone four times, and then 
 
 form a circle around it. The Daughter Priestesses 
 
 form around the Knights; the following hymn is 
 
 then sung : 
 
 L. M. 
 
 Laying the foundation. 
 
 I. 
 
 When to the exiled seer was given 
 A rapt'rous foregaze into Heaven, 
 All glorious though the visions were, 
 Yet he beheld no temple there. 
 
 II. 
 The new Jerusalem on high 
 Hath one pervading sanctity; 
 No sin to mourn, no grief to mar — 
 God and the Lamb its temple are. 
 
 III. 
 But we, frail sojourners below, 
 The pilgrim-heirs of guilt and woe. 
 Must seek a tabernacle, where 
 Our scattered souls may blend iu prayer. 
 
237 
 
 IV. 
 
 Oh Thou ! who o'er the ch«rubini 
 Didst shine in glories veiled and dim, 
 With purer light our temple cheer. 
 And dwell in unveiled glory here. 
 
 The Grand Chief: — Sir Knights, Uncover! Let 
 us bow our heads, while our Chief Grand Orator 
 invokes the blessings of our Heavenly Father. 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 Almighty and Everlasting Ruler of Heaven and 
 Earth, Thou most Holy and Eternal Father, in the 
 name of our Lord and Savior, hear our prayers and 
 grant our petitions this day. In love and mercy 
 let Thy presence be felt. Bless the multitude as- 
 sembled here. Gracious Father, accept the work 
 which the Knights and Daughers of Tabor have as- 
 sembled to perform in Thy name. Grant us the 
 power of quickening grace to prepare us, that we 
 may receive Thy approval in laying this corner- 
 stone. Bless the builder and workmen, protect them 
 from danger, guide and direct them by Thy unerring 
 counsel, so that this house may be completed to Thy 
 glory, and be a benefit and blessing to all who may 
 enter within its doors. Unto Thee, the Only Eter- 
 nal God, and to Thine Only Begotten Son, Jesus 
 Christ, our Lord and Redeemer, we will give honor, 
 glory and praise now and forever. Amen ! 
 
 C. G. M. :— Sir Knights, Cover! 
 
 A select piece of music, appropriate for the occa- 
 sion, is rendered by the band. 
 
 C. G. M. : — Ladies and gentlemen, we have as- 
 sembled to-day as members of the International 
 Order of Twelve, to lay the foundation stone of a 
 
238 
 
 building to be occupied for a (give the purpose for 
 which the house is to be built). One of the doc- 
 trines of our Order is to encourage all and any un- 
 dertakings which have for their object the palliation 
 of the sufferings of the human race. In obedience 
 to the commands of our Order, we have assembled 
 here to-day to take part in laying the corner-stone 
 of this building. We feel honored at our being in- 
 strumental in laying the stone that is to firmly bind 
 the building together. We apply the secret lock 
 to the four corners and find them true, having passed 
 upon every square. The large attendance here 
 bespeaks the amount of interest which the friends and 
 citizens share in the erection of this building. May 
 it be an honor and benefit to this community, and may 
 success crown every effort for good that has its 
 origin in this house. 
 
 G. D.-M. :— Attention, Sir Knights. Handle 
 Swords ! Draw Swords ! ! Present Swords ! ! ! 
 
 The C. G. M. places the box in the cavity, and 
 the stone is lowered to its resting place and then 
 fixed firmly by the architect (the band in the mean- 
 time rendering some appropriate music). 
 
 G. D.-M. : — Attention, Sir Knights. Carry, Com- 
 rades ! 
 
 C. G. M. Let us now listen to the C. G. O., who 
 will read from the-Holy Scriptures: 
 
 Thus saith the Lord of Hosts: Consider your 
 ways. 
 
 Go up to the mountain, and bring wood, and build 
 the house; and I will take pleasure in it, and I will 
 be glorified, saith the Lord. 
 
239 
 
 Ye looked for much, and, lo, it came to little; 
 and when ye brought it home, I did blow upon it. 
 Why?saiththe Lord of Hosts. Because of Mine 
 house that is waste, and ye run every man unto his 
 own house. 
 
 Therefore the heaven over you is stayed from 
 dew, and the earth is stayed from her fruit. 
 
 And I called for a draught upon the land, and 
 upon the mountains, and upon the corn, and upon 
 the new wine, and upon the oil, and upon that 
 which the ground bringeth forth, and upon men 
 and upon cattle, and upon all the labor of the land. 
 
 Then Zerubbabel, the son of Shealtiel, and Joshua, 
 the son of Josedech, the high priest, and all the 
 remnant of the people, obeyed the voice of the 
 Lord, their God, and the words of Haggdi, the 
 prophet, as the Lord, their God, had sent him, and 
 the people did fear before the Lord. 
 
 Then spake Haggai, the Lord's messenger in the 
 Lord's message, unto the people, saying, I am with 
 you, saith the Lord. 
 
 And the Lord stirred up the spirit of Zerubbabel, 
 the son of Shealtiel, governor of Judah, and the 
 spirit of Joshua the son of Josedech, the high priest, 
 and the spirit of all the remnant of the people ; and 
 they came and did work in the house of the Lord of 
 Hosts, their God. 
 
 In the four and twentieth day of the sixth month, 
 in the second year of Darius, the king. 
 
 In the seventh month, in the one and twentieth 
 day of the month, came the word of the Lord by 
 the prophet Haggai, saying; 
 
240 
 
 Speak now to Zerubbabel, the son of Shealtiel, 
 governor of Judali, and to Joshua, the son of Jose- 
 dech, the high priest, and to the residue of the 
 people, saying: 
 
 Yet now be strong, O Zerubbabel, saith the 
 Lord; and be strong, O Joshua, son of Josedech, 
 the high priest ; and be strong, all ye people of the 
 land, saith the Lord, and work: for I am with you, 
 saith the Lord of Hosts : 
 
 According to the word that 1 covenanted with 
 you when ye came out of Egypt, so My spirit re- 
 maineth with you : fear ye not. 
 
 For thus saith the Lord of Hosts : Yet once, it 
 is a little while, and I will shake the heavens, and 
 the earth, and the sea, and the dry land. 
 
 And* I will shake all nations, and the desire of all 
 nations shall come ; and I will fill this house with 
 glory, saith the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 The silver is Mine, and the gold is Mine, saith 
 the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 The glory of this latter house shall be greater 
 than of the former, saith the Lord of Hosts : and 
 in this place will I give peace, saith the Lord of 
 Hosts. 
 
 G. D.-M. : —Attention, Sir Knights. Carry 
 Swords ! 
 
 Music by the band. 
 
 C. G. M.:— Sir Chief Grand Orator, you will 
 please mark the Taborian signs and the perfect 
 figures on the top of the stone. (''777—333—12" 
 is marked on the stone with green chalk.) 
 
 G. D.-M. : — Attention, Sir Knights. Present 
 Swords ! 
 
241 
 
 C. G.-M. : — The emblematic figures **333 convey 
 a deep significance, and prove the faith the Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor have in an overruling 
 Providence. We believe in a triune God — the 
 Father, Son and Holy Ghost. May He bless this 
 building and the inhabitants of this city. 
 
 G. D.-M.:— Attention, Sir Knights. Salute! 
 (They salute three times.) 
 
 C. G. M. :— The mystic ««777" emblematizes the 
 triple perfection of the International Order of 
 Twelve, founded upon the solid principles of justice, 
 equity, benevolence, prudence, loyalty, unity and 
 impartiality. May these principles govern the 
 business of this building. 
 
 G. D.-M.: — Attention, Sir Knights. Salute! 
 (They salute four times.) 
 
 C. G.-M. : — We place the symbolized number 
 **12" on this stone to express our unwavering 
 confidence and trust in the motto of our Order: 
 In God alone is safety I 
 
 G. D.-M.: — Attention, Sir Knights. Form a 
 Wall of Steel! 
 
 C. G. M. : — Sir Vice-Grand Mentor, we will now 
 consecrate this stone with earth. (The V.-G. M. 
 scatters the earth over the stone. He stands by 
 the side of the Chief . ) May the building to be erected 
 upon this stone be plentifully endowed with the 
 riches of this earth. 
 
 C. G. M. :— Sir Chief Grand Scribe (the C. G. 
 S. stands by the side of the Chief), we will now 
 set apart this house that is to be erected on this 
 stone (he states the purpose, and then the C. G. S. 
 scatters the grains of wheat or corn over the stone.) 
 
242 
 
 May there be gathered within these walls the golden 
 harvest of success ; may the seeds of eternal 
 happiness be planted here and grow up to the glory 
 of God and be garnered in the heavenly rest, to live 
 forever. 
 
 C. G. M. :— Sir Chief Grand Treasurer (the 
 C. G. T. stands by the side of Chief), with this 
 pure water we consecrate the house to be erected 
 upon this stone to Purity, Peace and Harmony. 
 (The C. G. T. pours the water around the outside 
 of the stone, touching the four sides.) Water is 
 an emblenj of purity. May all who enter this house 
 live a pure life ; may they inherit the waters of re- 
 generation, and by a life in the service of the Lord 
 be enabled to drink from the fountain of eternal life 
 in the building not made with hands eternal in the 
 Kingdom of Bliss and Glory. 
 
 C. G. M. strikes the stone four distinct times 
 with his mallet, and says: — By virtue of the 
 authority in me vested, I now and here announce that 
 this foundation stone is truly laid and firmly laid 
 and tried ; may the Lord bless the work. 
 
 G. D.-M. : — Attention, Sir Knights. Present 
 Swords I Return Swords! I (If there is a collection 
 to be made, now is the time to announce it.) 
 
 Music by the band. The Knights and Daughters 
 of Tabor form a procession and march by the stone 
 slowly, and contribute what they may want to give 
 on the stone. The strangers and citizens follow. 
 
 The return march to their hall is made in the 
 same manner in which they marched out. On ar- 
 riving: in the hall the C. G. M. then declares the 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle at rest. 
 
"B Kig.y *»w n 
 
 p§M7frwrrr¥¥¥: 
 
 P3 3 
 
 ill 
 
 ^4i 
 
 
 Belt Clasp— X Size. 
 SABA MERGE CORONETS AND BELT CLASP. 
 
 243 
 
BADGE OF DAUGHTER PRIESTESSES. 
 
 244 
 
In Solo Deo SalusI 
 
 DEDICATING CEREMONY 
 
 OF 
 
 \miW ^i Daughter? of TaboP 
 
 HKLLS. 
 
 245 
 
DEDICATION CEREMONY 
 
 OF 
 
 KnjGHTS AND Daughters of Tabor Halls. 
 
 The dedication ceremony of Temple and Taber- 
 nacle halls may be either public or private. 
 
 Instructions. 
 
 1. The hall, before it is dedicated, must be fur- 
 nished with all the necessaries for the work and 
 business of the Knights and Daughters of Tabor. 
 
 2. The ceremony must be performed by a C. G. 
 M.,P. C. G. M., oraD. G. M. 
 
 3. The Temple and Tabernacle Houses within 
 the square, with their full furniture in sight, and 
 candles burning. 
 
 4. The Daughters are marched into the hall, in 
 full dress and regalia; the officers in their stations, 
 and seated. 
 
 5. The Knights, in full dress and regalia, as- 
 semble in the ante-rooms, or some place near the 
 hall, and march into and around the hall three 
 times, and are seated; officers in their stations. 
 Music; or the foNowing hymn is sung: 
 
 246 
 
U7 
 I. 
 
 How lovely are Thy dwellings fair, 
 Oh, Lord of Hosts! How dear 
 
 The pleasant Tabernacles are, 
 Where Thou dost dwell so near. 
 
 II. 
 
 My soul doth long, and fainting, sigh 
 
 Thy Temples, Lord, to see; 
 My heart and flesh aloud do cry, 
 
 O, living God, for Thee! 
 
 III. 
 
 Happy, who in Thy house reside, 
 Where Thee they ever praise; 
 
 Happy, whose strength in Thee doth bide, 
 And in their hearts Thy ways. 
 
 They journey on from strength to strength, 
 
 With joy and gladsome cheer. 
 Till all before our God, at length. 
 
 In Zion do appear. 
 
 The C. M. of the Temple gives three raps, and 
 all stand. He then says: — We have assembled for 
 the purpose of dedicating this hall to the work and 
 business of the Knights and Daughters of Tabor. 
 
 I now take pleasure in introducing Sir 
 
 , the Dedicating Officer. 
 
 The C. M. then presents the gavel to the Dedi- 
 cating Officer. 
 
 The Dedicating Officer gives one rap, and all are 
 seated. He then reads, as follows : — Sir Knights 
 and Daughters, the solemn duties of the hour, and 
 the importance of the business that has called us 
 together, cannot be overestimated in an Order like 
 ours, fulfilling a high and holy duty in this Chris- 
 tian age. We are banded together for mutual aid 
 
248 
 
 and protection; to help each other in sickness; to 
 comfort each other in distress; to support disabled 
 members; to care for the lonely orphans of 
 Knights or Daughters, and make glad the heai ts of 
 mourning widows. This is the misssion of our be- 
 loved Order. Then, how necessary it is that we 
 should, in all our work and business, remember an 
 overruling Providence, and ask that He may pre- 
 side over our counsels, and give us wisdom to suc- 
 cessfully conduct and guide the affairs of our Or- 
 der, that it may continue a blessing for all time to 
 come. Let us not only dedicate our hall to the 
 Lord God, but give ourselves unto His keeping. 
 The Ceremony. 
 The Dedicating Officer gives three raps, and all 
 stand. He then gives the following commands: — 
 
 1. Sir Knights, Form a Hollow Square ! (The C. 
 M., C. O. and C. P. in the center of the square, 
 near the Temple House.) 
 
 2. Sir Knights, Handle Swords I 
 
 3. Sir Knights, Draw Swords I 
 
 4. Sir Knights, Present Swords ! 
 
 5. Sir Knights, Deposit Swords ! (The swords 
 are laid down pointing to the Temple and Tabernacle 
 Houses.) 
 
 6. Sir Knights, To the Right About Face I 
 (Turn, face out.) Deposit Helmets! ! 
 
 7. Sir Knights, To the Left About Face! (Turn, 
 face in. ) 
 
 8. Let us pray. 
 
 The Knights will kneel on their right knees, with 
 their arms across their breasts, the Daughters stand- 
 
249 
 
 The C. O., standing, will read the following 
 
 prayer :. — 
 
 Prayer. 
 
 O, Eternal God, mighty in power, and majesty 
 incomprehensible, whom the heaven of heavens 
 cannot contain, much less the walls of Temples 
 made with hands, and who yet hast been graciously 
 pleased to promise Thy especial presence wherever 
 two or three of Thy faithful servants shall assemble 
 in Thy name to offer up their praises and supplica- 
 tions unto Thee ; vouchsafe, O Lord, to be present 
 with us, who are here gathered together, with all 
 humility and readiness of heart, to consecrate this 
 place to the honor of Thy great name. Accept, O 
 Lord, this service at our hands, and bless it with 
 such success as may tend most to Thy glory, and 
 the furtherance of our happiness, both temporal 
 and spiritual, through Jesus Christ, our blessed 
 Lord and Savior. Amen I 
 
 All respond: — In God alone is safety ! 
 
 The Dedicating Officer gives one rap, and all 
 stand. 
 
 The Chief Mentor reads the following lesson : 
 Lesson. 
 
 Lord, what is man, that Thou takest knowledge 
 of him ! or the son of man, that Thou makest ac- 
 count of him ! 
 
 Man is like to vanity ; his days are like a shadow 
 that passe th away. 
 
 Bow Thy heavens, O Lord, and come down ; 
 touch the mountains, and they shall smoke. 
 
 Cast forth lightning, and scatter them ; shoot out 
 Thine arrows, and destroy them. 
 
250 
 
 Send Thine hand from above, rid me, and deliver 
 me out of great waters, from the hand of strange 
 children. 
 
 Whose mouth speaketh vanity, and their right 
 hand is a right hand of falsehood. 
 
 I will sing a new song unto Thee, O God ! upon 
 a psaltery and an instrument of ten strings will I 
 sing praises unto Thee. 
 
 It is He that giveth salvation unto kings ; who 
 delivereth David, His servant, from the hurtful 
 sword. 
 
 Rid me, and deliver me from the hand of strange 
 children, whose mouth speaketh vanity, and their 
 right hand is a riorht hand of falsehood. 
 
 That our sons may be as plants grown up in their 
 youth ; that our daughters may be as corner-stones 
 polished after the similitude of a palace. 
 
 That our garners may be full, affording all 
 manner of store ; that our sheep may bring forth 
 thousands and ten thousands in our streets. 
 
 That our oxen may be strong to labor; that there 
 be no breaking in, nor going out; that there be no 
 complaining in our streets. 
 
 Happy is that people, that is, in such a case ; yea, 
 happy is that people, whose God is the Lord. 
 
 The Dedicating Officer, standing near the Temple 
 House, says: — Attention, Sir Knights. Form the 
 Living Chain ! (The Knights clasp hands all around, 
 so as to form a continuous chain. The command 
 is then given to the Daughters to form a living 
 chain around the Knights.) 
 
 The Chief Preceptress reads from Judges, chap- 
 ter IV : 
 
251 
 
 And the children of Israel again did evil in the 
 sight of the Lord when Ehud was dead. 
 
 And the Lord sold them into the hand of Jabin, 
 king of Canaan, that reigned in Hazor, the captain 
 of whose host was Sisera, which dwelt in Harosheth, 
 of the Gentiles. 
 
 And the children of Israel cried unto the Lord ; 
 for he had nine hundred chariots of iron; and 
 twenty years he mightily oppressed the children of 
 Israel. 
 
 And Deborah, a prophetess, the wife of Lapidoth, 
 she judged Israel at that time. 
 
 And she dwelt under the palm tree of Deborah, 
 between Ramah and Bethel, in Mount Ephraim ; and 
 the children of Israel came up to her for judgment. 
 
 And she sent and called Barak, the son of Abinoam, 
 out of Kedesh-naphthali, and said unto him ; Hath 
 not the Lord God of Israel commanded, saying: 
 Go, and draw toward Mount Tabor, and take with 
 thee ten thousand meu of the children of Naphthali, 
 and of the children of Zebulon? 
 
 And I will draw unto thee, to the river Kishon, 
 Sisera, the captain of Jabin's army, with his chariots 
 and his multitude, and I will deliver him into thine 
 hand. 
 
 And Barak said unto her, if thou wilt go with me, 
 then I will go ; but if thou wilt not go with me, 
 then I will'not go. 
 
 And she said, I will surely go with thee ; notwith- 
 standing the journey that thou takest shall not be 
 for thine honor; for the Lord shall sell Sisera into 
 the hand of a woman. And Deborah arose, and 
 went with Barak to Kedesh. 
 
252 
 
 And Barak called Zebulon and Naphthali to Ke- 
 desh ; and he went up with ten thousand men at his 
 feet; and Deborah went up with him. 
 
 Now Heber, the Kenite, which was of the children 
 of Hobab, the father-in-law of Moses,, had severed 
 himself from the Kenites, and pitched his tent unto 
 the plain of Zaanannim, which is by Kedesh. 
 
 And they shewed Sisera that Barak, the son of 
 Abinoam, was gone up to Mount Tabor. 
 
 And Sisera gathered together all his chariots, 
 even nine hundred chariots of iron, and all the 
 people that were with him, from Harosheth, of the 
 Gentiles, unto the river of Kishon. 
 
 And Deborah said unto Barak: Up, for this is the 
 day in which the Lord hath delivered Sisera into 
 thine hand ; is not the Lord gone out before thee ? 
 So Barak went down from Mount Tabor, and ten 
 thousand men after him. 
 
 And the Lord discomfited Sisera, and all his 
 chariots, and all his host, with the edge of the 
 sword before Barak ; so that Sisera lighted down off 
 his chariot, and fled away on his feet. 
 
 But Barak pursued after the chariots, and after 
 the host, unto Harosheth of the Gentiles ; and all 
 the host of Sisera fell upon the edge of the sword ; 
 and there was not a man left. 
 
 All give three claps, and say, **Well Done! Well 
 Done!! Well Done! !1 
 
 The C. M. says: — Attention, Sir Knights. To 
 the Right About Face I Recover Helmets ! To 
 the Left About Face I Recover Swords I Present 
 Swords I Return Swords I Form Procession I 
 March Around the Hall, Daughters in front! 
 
253 
 
 They march around the hall four times while the 
 band renders some appropriate music; or, in lieu 
 thereof, the following hymn may be sung : 
 
 I. 
 
 The spacious earth is all the Lord's, 
 
 The Lord's her fulness is ; 
 The world, and they that dwell therein, 
 
 By sovereign right are His. 
 
 II. 
 
 He framed and fix'd it on the seas; 
 
 And His almighty hand 
 Upon inconstant floods has made 
 
 The stable fabric stand. 
 
 III. 
 But for Himself this Lord of all 
 
 One chosen seat design'd ; 
 Oh! who shall to that sacred hill 
 
 Deserved admittance find? 
 
 IV. 
 
 The man whose hands and heart are pure, 
 Whose thoughts from pride are free; 
 
 Who honest poverty prefers 
 To gainful perjury. 
 
 V. 
 
 This, this is he, on whom the Lord 
 
 Shall shower His blessings down; 
 Whom God, His Savior, shall vouchsafe 
 
 With righteousness to crown. 
 
 The Dedicating Officer gives three raps, and 
 says : — Sir Knights and Daughters, please form a 
 living circle around the Temple and Tabernacle 
 Houses. ( The Dedicating Officer, C. M. , and C. P. 
 in the center.) 
 
 The Dedicating Officer gives two raps on the 
 Temple and Tabernacle Houses, and says: — In the 
 name of the Lord God of Heaven, Earth and the 
 
254 
 
 Universe, in whom is all glory and power, I do 
 solemnly dedicate this hall to the work of the 
 Knights and Daughters of Tabor. 
 
 All give one clap, and pronounce: May He bless 
 the work ! 
 
 The Dedicating Officer gives fo«r raps on the 
 Temple and Tabernacle Houses, and says : — In the 
 name of Barak, the son of Abinoam, I do solemnly 
 dedicate this hall to Charity and Friendship. 
 
 All give two claps, and pronounce : May we hear 
 and obey! 
 
 The Dedicating Officer gives six raps on the 
 Temple and Tabernacle Houses, and says: — In the 
 name of Deborah, the prophetess, I do solemnly 
 dedicate this hall to Honor and Virtue. 
 
 All give three claps, and say : May we remem- 
 ber! All join hands, and the C. O. offers the fol- 
 lowing invocation : 
 
 O, Most Glorious Lord, we acknowledge that we 
 are not worthy to offer unto Thee anything belong- 
 ing unto us; yet we beseech Thee, in Thy great 
 goodness, graciously to accept the dedication of this 
 place to Thy service, and to prosper this, our under- 
 taking. Receive the prayers and intercessions of all 
 those who shall call upon Thee in this house, and 
 give them grace to prepare their hearts to serve 
 Thee with reverence and godly fear ; affect them 
 with an awful apprehension of Thy divine majesty, 
 and a deep sense of their own unworthiness; that, 
 so approaching Thy sanctuary with lowliness and 
 devotion, and coming before Thee with clean 
 thoughts and pure hearts, with bodies undefiled, 
 and minds sanctified, they may always perform a 
 
255 
 
 service acceptable to Thee, through Jesus Christ, 
 our Lord. Amen ! Amen ! ! Amen ! ! ! 
 
 Dedicating Officer gives one rap, all are seated. 
 
 Any Chief Preceptress present may then read 
 
 the following : 
 
 I. 
 Ye boundless realms of joy, 
 Exalt your Maker's fame; 
 His praise your song employ 
 Above the starry frame : 
 Your voices raise, 
 Ye Cherubim 
 And Seraphim, 
 To sing His praise. 
 II. 
 Thou moon, that rul'st the night, 
 
 And sun that guid'st the day, 
 Ye glitfriug stars of light, 
 To Him your homage pay : 
 
 His praise declare. 
 Ye heavens above, 
 And clouds that move 
 In liquid air. 
 III. 
 Let them adore the Lord, 
 
 And Praise His holy name. 
 By whose almighty word 
 They all from nothing came; 
 And all shall last, 
 From changes free; 
 His firm decree 
 Stands ever fast. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Let earth her tribute pay : 
 
 Praise Him, ye dreadful whales, 
 And fish that through the sea 
 Glide swift with glitt'ring scales; 
 Fire, hail, and snow, 
 And misty air. 
 And winds, that where 
 He bids them blow. 
 
256 
 
 The Dedicating Officer gives four raps, and all 
 stand; he then says: — The dedicating of halls is 
 legally set apart for the business and work of the 
 Temples of Knights of Tabor, Tabernacles of 
 Daughter Priestesses of Tabor, the Royal House of 
 Media, and Tents of Maids and Pages of Honor. 
 May success attend their efforts. (He gives one 
 rap, and all are seated.) 
 
 If there is an oration to be delivered, or if the 
 Uniform Rank Knights or Palatine Guards desire to 
 drill, now is the time, after which the ceremony 
 closes. 
 
'In Solo Deo Salus!" 
 
 SWO[[D T/CTICS jl!(D ^li 
 
 OF THE 
 
 NiFORM Rank Rights, 
 
 AND 
 
 PALATINE GUARDS, 
 
 ALSO THE 
 
 JAYELIN DRILL OF TABORIAN CADETS. 
 
 (9— Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
 257 
 
INSPECTION DIAGRAM. 
 
 258 
 
DIAGRAM No. 2. 
 
 CM 
 
 Open Order 
 
 g 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 C.S.B. 
 
 Cross 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CSB 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 259 
 
DIAGRAM No. 3. 
 
 Perfect Nninber 
 
 u 
 
 □ 
 
 Perfect Letter 
 
 
 Open wall 
 
 
 
 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 
 
 
 
 C.{$,B, 
 
 - 
 
 Triangle 
 
SWORD TACTICS AND DRILL 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIFORM RANK KNIGHTS, 
 
 AND 
 
 PAIvATTINK OUARDS. 
 
 . :o: 
 
 Command. 
 
 1. Cautionary, which is : Attention, Sir Knights ! 
 
 2. The preparatory, which indicates the move- 
 ment. 
 
 3. The command of execution, which causes the 
 movement. 
 
 Position. 
 
 1. Heels on the same line, as near as possible. 
 
 2. The feet turned out equally; stand easy. 
 
 3. The knees straight. 
 
 4. The body erect, inclining a little forward. 
 
 5. Shoulders square, and falling naturally. 
 
 6. The arms hanging, with elbows near the body. 
 
 7. The head erect and to the front. 
 
 8. The chin drawn in. 
 
 9. The eyes fixed straight to the front. 
 
 10. The tallest man to the right of the line. 
 
 11. The smallest man to extreme left of the line. 
 
 12. Sir Knights will fall in, with swords in scab- 
 bard. 
 
 261 
 
262 
 
 To Form the Lines. 
 To form the lines, the C. D.-M. will command : — 
 
 1. Attention, Sir Knights. Fallln ! 
 
 (The Knights will form in one rank, face to the 
 right.) 
 
 2. Front Face! 
 
 (Raise the right foot slightly and turn on the 
 left heel half around, shoulders slightly touching.) 
 
 3. Right Dress ! 
 
 (Each Knight will turn his head to the right and 
 place himself on a line with the Sir Knight next to 
 him on his right. The '*left dress" is executed by 
 the same movements reversed.) 
 
 4. Front I 
 
 (The head will resume the natural position.) 
 
 5. From the Right, Count Twos I 
 
 (At this command the Sir Knights will count 
 from right to left in a distinct voice, *'One, Two; 
 One, Two;" until through the ranks.) 
 
 6. Form Divisions, Right Face! 
 
 (The Sir Knights will all face to the right; Divi- 
 sion No. 2 will place itself on the right of Division 
 No. 1, thus forming the Sir Knights into files of 
 two abreast. No. 1 constituting the first Division 
 and No. 2 the second.) 
 
 7. Officers in Ranks ! 
 
 (At this command the V.-M. will take his place 
 to the right of the Second Division, the C. S. to 
 the right of the First Division, the C. S. B in the 
 center. ) 
 
 8. Form Lines, and Receive the C. M. (or P. 
 
 p.)! 
 
 The V.-M. will command: — 
 
263 
 
 9. Second Division, By File Left, March! 
 
 (At tliis command tlie Second Division will march 
 promptly to the left.) 
 
 10. By File Left, March ! 
 
 (Until they arrive opposite the First Division, 
 the V.-M. will command. After placing his divi- 
 sion exactly opposite the First Division by ''right or 
 left dress," he will resume his place to the right of 
 his division. While this movement is being ex- 
 ecuted, the C. S. will command the First Division.) 
 
 11. (1) Mark Time! (2) Front! 
 
 12. First Division, Front ! Right Dress! Front! 
 (The Sir Knights will thus be formed in two 
 
 parallel lines, facing inward. The C. D.-M. ad- 
 vances to the C. M.'s station, salutes, and says: 
 Sir Chief, the lines are now ready for inspection.) 
 The C. M. takes his place to the right between 
 the two divisions, standing firm. The C. D.-M. 
 then commands: — 
 
 13. Attention, Sir Knights ! Handle Swords ! 
 Draw Swords! Carry Swords! Salute the C. M. 
 (or P. P.) ! Present Swords! 
 
 The C. M. passes down through the lines, then 
 takes his place on the extreme left, and com- 
 mands: — 
 
 14. Sir Knights, Carry Swords! 
 
 15. Sir Knights, Form Wall of Steel ! 
 
 16. Sir Knights, Take Taborian Position! 
 
 17. Sir Knights, Carry Swords! 
 
 18. Sir Knights, Present Swords ! 
 
 19. Sir Knights, Guard the Head! 
 
 20. Sir Knights, Guard the Body ! 
 
 21. Sir Knights, Form Wall of Steel I 
 
264 
 
 22. Sir Knights, Carry Swords! 
 
 23. Sir Knights, Present Swords I 
 
 24. Sir Knights, Carry Comrade! 
 
 25. Sir Knights, Give the Taborian Rest! 
 
 26. Sir Knights, Salute! 
 
 27. Sir Knights, Carry Swords! 
 The C. D.-M. commands: — 
 
 28. Sir Knights, Present Swords! 
 
 (The C. M. passes up through the lines and takes 
 his seat. ) 
 
 29. Sir Knights, Return Swords ! 
 
 Marching Drill. 
 
 The C. D.-M. commands: — 
 
 30. Second Division, Left Face ! 
 
 31. First Division, Right Face ! 
 
 32. Second Division, By File Right, March! 
 (They march until they reach the proper place at 
 
 the right of the First Division.) 
 
 33. Second Division, Halt ! 
 
 34. Sir Knights, Mark Time ! 
 
 (In stepping off, always begin with the left 
 foot.) 
 
 35. Sir Knights, By File Right, March ! 
 
 (At each turn that is made, repeat command: 
 By File Right ! ) 
 
 36. March Down the Center of the Hall! 
 
 37. First Division, File Right; Second Division, 
 File Left, March ! 
 
 (This movement separates the divisions — and 
 unites them — in their march and counter-march 
 around the hall.) 
 
 38. First Division, By File Left, March I 
 
'265 
 
 39. Second Division, By File Right, March! 
 (As they march around the hall and pass each 
 
 other, they present swords. ) 
 
 40. First Division, By File Right, March ! 
 (This movement places the First Division by the 
 
 side of the Second Division. ) 
 
 41. Form Taborian Cross ! 
 
 (This is formed by the odd numbers 15, 17, or 
 21. It will take some practice, and every man must 
 know his place. When the command is given, ten 
 Knights in the Second Division form across the hall, 
 and eleven Knights of the First Division march in, 
 thus forming the Cross. See diagram. ) 
 
 42. Form Taborian T! 
 
 (The same twenty-one Knights form the T — the 
 Second Division horizontal, and the First Division 
 perpendicular. See diagram.) 
 
 43. Form Taborian A ! 
 
 (Nine of the Second Division form the left line, 
 and ten of the First Division form the right line, 
 and one from each division form the center. They 
 march with arms folded. See diagram.) 
 
 44. Divisions, Form in Open Order! 
 (See diagram.) 
 
 45. Sir Knights, Form in Single File ! 
 
 (The Second Division marches around and falls 
 in the rear of the First Division, — the First Divi- 
 sion marking time.) 
 
 46. Sir Knights, Halt! Front Face! Right Dress! 
 
 To Form Three Divisions. 
 
 47. Sir Knights, Count by Threes! 
 
 (At this command, the Knights will count from 
 
266 
 
 right to left: '*One, Two, Three; One, Two, 
 Three" — thus along the line.) 
 
 The C. D.-M. will now command: — 
 
 48. Sir Knights, Form Divisions ! Right Face I 
 (The Sir Knights will face to the right, and No. 
 
 2 will take position to the right of No. 1, and No. 
 
 3 will take position to the right of No. 2. Mark 
 time.) 
 
 49. Forward, March I 
 
 50. Open Order! 
 
 (At this command the Knights will take positions 
 from three to seven feet apart, to the right and 
 left.) 
 
 There are several fancy positions which may be 
 taken by these divisions, but care must be had that 
 each Knight knows his proper place. Do not at- 
 tempt them in public, until you can go through 
 them perfectly in the hall. 
 
 51. Form the Perfect Number — 777 ! 
 
 (The Three Sevens cannot be formed with less 
 than twenty-seven Knights. When the order is 
 given, three Knights from each division, by one 
 backward step, from the right or left, take position 
 to the left. See diagram. ) 
 
 52. Sir Knights, Resume your Place in Divisions I 
 
 53. Sir Knights, Form the Perfect Letter N ! 
 (To form this letter properly, the divisions must 
 
 be seven feet apart. The Second Division will rest 
 their right upon the right of the First Division, 
 and their left upon the left of the Third Division. 
 See diagram. ) 
 
 54. Sir Knights, Resume Places and Close Up 
 Ranks I 
 
267 
 
 There are several other beautiful positions that 
 can be taken by these divisions : 
 The Triangle— A . 
 TheOpen Wall— n. 
 The Letter Z. 
 (^8ee diagram.) 
 
 To Form Four Divisions. 
 
 55. Attention, Sir Knights. Fall In! 
 (Always fall in with face to the right.) 
 Th« C. D.-M. commands : — 
 
 56. Front Face ! 
 
 57. Right Dress! 
 
 58. From the Eight, Count by Fours! 
 
 59. Form Divisions I Right Face I 
 
 (No. 2 will quickly take place to the right of No. 
 1; No. 3 to the right of No. 2; No. 4 to the right 
 of No. 3.) 
 
 These divisions may be thrown into many fancy 
 positions, and the C. D.-M. can exercise his skill in 
 maneuvering the Sir Knights. (1) Open Columns; 
 (2) Two Divisions; (3) Three Divisions ; (4) Four 
 Divisions ; ( 5 ) The Hollow Square ; ( 6) The Double 
 Square TL; (7) The letter **M," and various 
 other fancy positions. 
 
 Notice. 
 
 To become perfect in the Tactics and Drill, we 
 must practice regularly, and all must attend if they 
 would perform well. One balk will throw the entire 
 divisions into confusion. 
 
268 
 
 Sword Exercise. 
 
 60. Draw Swords ! 
 
 (First Motion. — At the word *'draw/' seize the 
 scabbard with the left hand and grasp the sword 
 with the right hand, and draw it out two inches. 
 
 Second Motion. — At the word *'swords," draw 
 the sword from the scabbard and extend the right 
 hand to the front, and drop the sword in the hollow 
 of the elbow. 
 
 Third Motion. — Bring the right hand to the 
 thigh, the elbow a little bent, holding the sword 
 between the thumb and two fingers, the blade per- 
 pendicular, being position of **Carry Swords.") 
 
 61. Present Swords! 
 
 (Raise the sword perpendicularly, the flat of the 
 blade opposite the right eye, the guard at the height 
 of the shoulder, and the elbow supported on the 
 body.) 
 
 62. Carry swords! 
 
 (Extend the hand to the front, and replace the 
 sword, as in the second and third motions of 
 «*Draw Swords.") 
 
 63. Taborian Position ! , 
 
 (First Motion. — Same as **Present Swords!" 
 Second Motion. — Drop the point of the sword 
 by extending the arm, so that the right hand will 
 rest on the right side of the thigh, the point of the 
 sword resting on the floor or ground, about eighteen 
 inches from the right foot; the Knight to your 
 right takes position, his left foot touching the 
 sword. ) 
 
 64. Guard the Head ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Same as ** Present Swords.** 
 
269 
 
 Second Motion. — Hold the sword in a horizontal 
 position above the head, about six inches in front of 
 the forehead.) 
 
 65. Guard the Body ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Same as ''Present Swords," 
 except in this case the blade is outward. 
 
 Second Motion. — Cut downward, and bring the 
 sword to carry.) 
 
 66. Form a Wall of Steel ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Same as "Present Swords.'* 
 Second Motion. — Bring your sword down hori- 
 zontally, the right hand resting on the center of the 
 breast, the point of your sword resting on the breast 
 of the Knight to your left. ) 
 
 67. Carry Comrade ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Same as "Present Swords." 
 Second Motion. — Lay you sword across your 
 shoulders and grasp the point with your left hand.) 
 
 68. Taborian Rest! 
 
 (First Motion. — Same as "Present Swords." 
 Second Motion. — Rest the sword in the hollow 
 
 of the elbow joint, and grasp the blade near the 
 
 guard with the left hand.) 
 
 69. Salute! 
 
 (First Motion. — Same as "Present Swords." 
 Second Motion. — Drop the point of the sword by 
 extending the arm, so that the right hand may be 
 brought to the side of the right thigh, the nails up, 
 the elbow well back from the body. ) 
 
 70. Return Swords ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Bring the sword to the position 
 of "Present," and seize the scabbard with the left 
 hand near its mouth. 
 
270 
 
 Second Motion. — Drop the point; turn the head 
 to the left, and return the sword ; bring your head 
 to front, and drop the hands to their natural posi- 
 tion by the side.) 
 
 71. Sir Knights, Disperse! Return to Quarters! 
 
 The Uniform Rank Knights and Palatine Guards 
 may practice all the various sword exercises, maneu- 
 vers and drills. 
 
 When the Palatine Guards drill, instead of ad- 
 dressing them as Sir Knights, say Sir Guards. 
 The Prince Marshal is styled Captain Marshal. 
 
In Solo Deo Salus!" 
 
 JAVELIN EXERCISES 
 
 AND 
 
 '^lDRII-1-4^ 
 
 OF THE 
 
 TABORIAN CADETS, 
 
 2T1 
 
jAVELifi Exercises >nd D[[ill 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Taborian Cadets. 
 
 :o: 
 
 The javelins are made about five feet in length, 
 steel-pointed, and one inch in diameter. 
 
 The ranks are formed in the same manner as 
 designated in the Inspection Diagram. 
 
 Inspection. 
 
 The Chief Tent Marshal addresses the Chief 
 Mentor: — Sir Chief, the Cadets are ready for in- 
 spection. 
 
 The Chief steps to the right front. The C. T. 
 M. then commands : — 
 
 1. Attention, Taborian Cadets! Form Arch! 
 (First Motion. — Present javelins, holding them 
 
 about one foot from the heel of the javelin. 
 
 Second Motion. — Carry the right foot about 
 eighteen inches to the front; extend the javelin 
 arm, and cross the head of the javelin, about three 
 inches from the point, with that of the Cadet 
 opposite. ) 
 
 The C. T. M. passes down through the ranks 
 slowly. On arriving at the extreme left, he turns 
 and faces to the right, whereupon he commands: — 
 
 2. Cadets, Ground Javelins I / 
 (First Motion. — ^Present javelins, aod bring the 
 
 feet together. 
 
 27^ 
 
273 
 
 Second Motion. — Let the javelin slide down the 
 right side until the heels rest on the ground (or 
 floor), holding it between the thumb and two 
 fingers ; arm extended down, javelin resting against 
 the right shoulder. ) 
 
 3. Cadets, Repel «Tavelins ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Grasp the javelin about the cen- 
 ter, and present. 
 
 Second Motion. — Drop the javelin hand to the 
 right hip, and let it firmly rest there, the point of 
 the javelin to the front, and the heel to the rear — 
 the point about one foot higher than the heel. Ad- 
 vance the left foot about eighteen inches.) 
 
 4. Carry Javelins ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Present javelins, grasping the 
 javelin about one foot above the heel. 
 
 Second Motion. — Drop the hand behind, so that 
 it will rest on the right small of the back, nails out ; 
 arm over the javelin point, above the head; javelin 
 near the right side of the face.) 
 
 5. Take Position, Right and Left ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Grasp the javelin about the 
 center, and present. 
 
 Second Motion. — Bring the hand to the breast, 
 so that the javelin will extend horizontally across 
 the breast. The First Division will side-step to the 
 right, and the Second Division will side-step to the 
 left, until the point and heel just touch the Cadets 
 on either side.) 
 
 6. Poise Javelins ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Present, grasping the center of 
 the javelin. 
 
 Second Motion. — Rest the javelin in the hollow 
 between the thumb and forefinger; raise the hand 
 
274 
 
 until it is on a level with the right eye, and point 
 front. ) 
 
 7. Ascend Mount Tabor ! 
 
 (First Motion. — Bring the javelin into a position 
 with the right hand about eighteen inches from its 
 heel. 
 
 Second Motion. — -Gra^sp the javelin with the left 
 hand, near the center, and let the right hand rest 
 on the hip ; elevate the point about one foot. Keep 
 time, or imitate walking.) 
 
 8. Division, Rest! 
 
 (First Motion. — Bring the javelin to a present. 
 Second Motion. — Rest the heel, and lean the 
 
 point, on the right shoulder, and grasp the javelin 
 
 with both hands.) 
 
 9. Present Javelins I 
 
 10. Right Face I 
 
 11. Mount Javelins ! 
 
 (Throw the javelin across the shoulders, and 
 grasp it with both hands.) 
 
 12. Present Javelins I 
 
 13. Front Face I 
 
 14. Right About Face I 
 
 15. Repel Javelins I 
 
 16. Present Javelins ! 
 
 17. Left About Face I 
 
 18. Form Arch I 
 
 The C. T. M. may exercise in the various maneu^ 
 vers, and marching or division drills. The Taborian 
 Cadets shall appear' in full regulation uniform on 
 all public occasions. Due respect must be paid to 
 the Queen Mother or Grand Officers, by opening 
 ranks to receive them. 
 
In Solo Deo SalusI" 
 
 GENERAL RULES 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 GOVERNMENT OF THE BUSINESS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 INTERNATIONAL 
 
 ORDER OF TWELVE, 
 
 275 
 
RULES OI= ORDER. 
 
 : o :■ 
 
 1. The Presiding Officer, at the proper hour, 
 takes his (or her) seat, and gives one rap; the offi- 
 cers and members clotlie themselves in proper 
 regalia, and take their respective seats. The 
 Temple, Tabernacle or Palatium is then opened in 
 regular order. 
 
 2. The regular business of the Order shall be 
 attended to without a motion, as prescribed in the 
 **Rules of Business." 
 
 3. During the reading of the minutes, communi- 
 cations or other papers, silence shall be observed. 
 After the minutes are read, if they are found cor- 
 rect, and if no objections are interposed as to their 
 correctness, they shall stand approved; if, however, 
 there is a question as to their correctness, the mem- 
 ber who questions their correctness shall state what 
 is not correct, and move that the correction be made. 
 
 4. Members and visitors must come to the hall 
 cleanly dressed, wearing the working regalia, and 
 white gloves. 
 
 5. A member, when addressing the Temple, 
 Tabernacle or Palatium, shall stand and address 
 the Presiding Officer (giving title of office). 
 
 6. During the time that the Temple, Tabernacle 
 or Palatium is open and doing business, no refresh- 
 
 276 
 
277 
 
 ments, smoking or chewing tobacco will be per- 
 mitted. 
 
 7. When Grand Officers visit a Temple, Taber- 
 nacle or Palatium, they must be received standing. 
 
 8. All officers in open Session shall be addressed 
 by the title of their office, all members as Daughter, 
 or Sir Knight; these titles are to be used only in 
 open Temples, Tabernacles or Palatiums, or w^hen 
 on duty or parade. 
 
 9. When it is necessary to get the sense of the 
 Session on any question or resolution, it must be 
 done by motion, duly seconded, stated by the Presid- 
 ing Officer, and decided by the voting sign. 
 
 10. When an office is made vacant by death, res- 
 ignation or for any other cause, the Presiding 
 Officer shall appoint a member to discharge the 
 dulies until the next regular election. 
 
 11. The Presiding Officer shall control the busi- 
 ness of the Session, and determine the time of clos- 
 ing without a motion. 
 
 12. The regular business of the Session shall be 
 transacted according to the '''Rules of Business." 
 (See Constitution. ) 
 
 13. The Presiding Officer shall be responsible to 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle for the manner 
 in which he administers the laws of the Order, and 
 he shall decide all doubtful questions of Constitu- 
 tion, regulations and order; the decisions which he 
 renders shall be final, until reversed by the C. G. 
 M., or the Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 14. No member shall speak more than once on 
 the same subject, until all who wish to speak have 
 spoken ; nor more than twice, nor longer than ten 
 
278 
 
 minutes, without permission from the Presiding 
 Officer. 
 
 15. A member speaking shall stand in front of 
 either the Temple or Tabernacle House (as the case 
 may be), and address the Presiding Officer, confine 
 himself to the question at issue, and avoid person- 
 alities and irrelevant language. 
 
 16. A member shall not be interrupted while 
 speaking, except to explain. 
 
 17. A motion shall not be in order until it is 
 seconded, and stated by the Presiding Officer. A 
 motion must be made in writing, when requested by 
 theC. S., C. R. orR. P. 
 
 18. A motion to lie on the table shall be decided 
 without debate. 
 
 19. A motion to postpone carries the question 
 over to the next meeting. 
 
 20. When a question is laid on the table, it can- 
 not be taken up until the next meeting, and then 
 only by a majority vote. 
 
 21. A motion to reconsider can be acted upon 
 only at the same Session ; it must be made by a 
 member who voted in the majority. 
 
 22. The first named on all special committees 
 shall be the Chairman. 
 
 23. In all business meetings, they shall proceed 
 according to the Order of Business. 
 
 24. A member wishing to retire from the Session 
 dunng the evening, must come before the Temple 
 (or Tabernacle) House, and make the request to the 
 Presiding Officer. He announces the request, and 
 if a majority are in favor of it, it is granted. 
 
279 
 
 25. Members wishing to retire for a few minutes, 
 shall rise from their seats and stand, and give the 
 saluting sign; the Presiding Officer, on observing 
 them, returns the sign, which signifies that permis- 
 sion is granted. 
 
 26. A member crossing the hall during the Ses- 
 sion must give the saluting sign. 
 
 27. The strictest order and decorum must be ob- 
 served during the hours of the Session. 
 
 28. Should an officer be absent from a meeting, 
 the Presiding Officer shall fill the seatpro-tein. 
 
 29. A motion for indefinite postponement, if de- 
 cided in the affirmative, quashes the proposition 
 entirely, and is not debatable. 
 
 30. A motion, when regularly made and seconded, 
 and proposed from the Chair, cannot be withdrawn 
 without the consent of the Session. 
 
 31. Any member may rise to a point of order, 
 whenever the speaker does not confine his (or her) 
 remarks to the question, or is not quoting the law 
 properly. 
 
 32. The previous motion cannot be entertained 
 until two members have spoken for and against the 
 subject at issue. The previous question is not de- 
 batable. 
 
 33. A new motion or resolution cannot be made 
 until the one under consideration is disposed of, ex- 
 cept a motion to lay on the table or previous 
 question ; these are not debatable. 
 
 34. A motion to postpone to a certain time, or a 
 substitute, or an amendment, or to refer to a com- 
 mittee, is in order when a motion or resolution is 
 pending. 
 
280 
 
 35. A member, when speaking, must not use 
 personalities or discourteous language. Should this 
 occur, however, then the Presiding Officers shall 
 call the speaker to order. If a member fails to come 
 to order when requested, the Presiding Officer shall 
 fine the speaker, and he must remain silent until the 
 fine is paid, or remitted by the Session or Presiding 
 Officer. 
 
 36. A motion to lay an amendment on the table, 
 if it is carried, removes the whole question from the 
 Session for the time, and if it is not taken from the 
 table, it is indefinitely postponed ; but it can be 
 taken up for further consideration at any future 
 time. 
 
 37. Privileged questions are in order at any time 
 during the Session, such as : first, motion for the 
 order of the day; second, a motion relating to in- 
 dividual members; third, questions of inquiry; 
 fourth, questions of the rights and privileges of the 
 Session; fifth, when a member desires to be 
 correctly informed on any matter that is before I he 
 Session; and sixth, when a member desires to ex- 
 plain a matter wherein he has been misunderstood. 
 
 38. A motion to adjourn is always out of order, 
 as the Session fixes the hour to open and the hour 
 to rest. The Presiding Officer is goverened by 
 these hours, unless a motion is carried to extend the 
 time. 
 
 39. The Presiding Officer shall decide all points 
 of order, without debate. 
 
 40. All motions or resolutions must be submitted 
 in writing and laid on the Secretary's desk, and 
 must be read when a member desires it. 
 
281 
 
 41. When a motion or resolution is made, duly 
 seconded, and stated by the Presiding Officer, it 
 becomes .the property of the Session, and cannot 
 be withdrawn without the consent of the Presiding 
 Officer, or a majority vote of the Session. 
 
 42. When a committee makes a report, if it is not 
 satisfactory, it shall be referred back to the same for 
 correction, with instructions. 
 
 43. If there is a majority and a minority report 
 of a committee, the minority report must be acted 
 upon first. 
 
 44. Members cannot vote, unless they are entitled 
 to a vote, or are present in open Session. 
 
 45. All amendments to motions or resolutions 
 must be disposed of before the main question can be 
 acted upon. If the amendment is not adopted, the 
 motion or resolution is put to a vote as amended ; 
 if the amendment is lost,' the vote is taken on the 
 previous question, without debate. 
 
GRKND HONORS. 
 
 : O : 
 
 The grand honors shown to an International or 
 Past International Grand Chief are given as 
 follows : A suitable escort is sent to the reception 
 room to conduct the visitor into the Session. As 
 he enters, the Presiding Officer gives four raps, 
 and all stand with their hands lifted up above their 
 heads. When he arrives at tlie Altar, or Temple 
 or Tabernacle House, he stops, and all give claps — 
 four times three — and all then say : We Welcome ! 
 three times. He is then escorted to the Presiding 
 Officer's station, and introduced by the Chief, 
 whereupon one rap is given and all are seated. On 
 invitation of the Chief, he may deliver an address. 
 
 An International Chief Grand Preceptress or 
 Past International Chief Grand Preceptress is re- 
 ceived in the same manner. 
 
 A Chief Grand Mentor, or Past Chief Grand 
 Mentor, is conducted into the Session by an suitable 
 escort. When he enters, the Presiding Officer 
 gives four raps, and all stand, with folded arms, 
 until he arrives at the Altar, or Temple or Taber- 
 nacle House, then all give seven claps, and say: 
 Wo Welcome I three times. Ho is tlien conducted 
 to the Presiding Officer's station, and introduced 
 by the Chief, whereupora one rap is given and all 
 
 282 
 
283 
 
 are seated. On invitation, he may address the 
 members. 
 
 A Chief Grand Preceptress or Past Chief Grand 
 Preceptress is receiv^ed in the same manner. 
 
 All other Grand Officers and Past Grand Officers 
 are received into Subordinate Temples, Tabernacles, 
 Palatiums and Tents with the standing honors. 
 When they arrive at the Altar, Temple or Taber- 
 nacle House, they are introduced by the Chief, and 
 seated. 
 
 The grand honors shall only be conferred upon 
 International or Past International Grand Chiefs 
 and International and Past International Grand 
 Preceptresses, Chief Grand Mentors and Past Chief 
 Grand Mentors, and Chief Grand Preceptresses and 
 Past Chief Grand Preceptresses, when received into 
 a Triennial Grand Session or a Grand Session. The 
 same grand honors are given to the above Officers 
 and Past Officers when they visit a Temple, Taber- 
 nacle, Palatium or Tent. 
 
RULES OF BUSINESS 
 
 GOVERNING THE 
 
 TRIENNIAL GRAND SESSIONS. 
 
 : o: 
 
 1. — On the day and hour fixed by the Constitu- 
 tion the members assemble. The I. C. G. M. takes 
 his seat and gives three distinct sounds with the 
 Taborian bell — this calls the Session to order. 
 
 2. — After being satisfied that all present are 
 members, he orders the I. C. G. St. and I. I. G. St. 
 to their posts (with instructions). 
 
 3.— The I. C. G. S. calls the roll of Grand 
 Temples and Tabernacles. If the Representatives 
 of ^ve of them are present, he shall proceed to 
 open the Triennial Session in the Saba Meroe De- 
 gree. 
 
 4._The I. C. G. S. calls the roll of Grand 
 Officers, and they are seated in their stations. If 
 an Officer is absent, the I. C. G. M. shall fill the 
 vacancy pro-tern » 
 
 5. — If the hall has not been dedicated to the Ta- 
 borian work, it is now attended to. 
 
 6. — The Committee on Credentials is appointed 
 by the I. C. G. M. 
 
 7. — Report of Committee on Credentials. 
 284 
 
285 
 
 8. — The I. C. G. M. appoints all the committees, 
 as prescribed by the Constitution. 
 
 9. — The I. C. G. M. reads his message, and it 
 is referred to the proper committee. The I. C. G. 
 P. reads her report, and it is referred. The I. G. 
 Q. M. reads her report, and it is refered. 
 
 10. — The Grand Temples and Tabernacles make 
 their reports through the C. G. M.s or C. G. P.s 
 
 11. — The International Districts make their re- 
 ports through their D. G. M.s 
 
 12. — At the opening of the Sessions, the I. C. 
 G. R. reads the proceedings of the previous Session, 
 unless otherwise ordered. 
 
 13 — Immediately after the proceedings are read 
 and disposed of, the I. C. G. M. calls for the re- 
 ports of the various committees, in their regular 
 order. 
 
 14. — Motions, resolutions, and new business. 
 
 15. — Election of International Grand Officers. 
 
 16. — Installation of Grand Officers. 
 
 17. — The I. C. G. M. declares the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle at rest. 
 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles shall make their 
 own Rules of Business, as well as those governing 
 the business of their Temples, Tabernacles, Pala- 
 tiums and Tents. 
 
FORM OP REPORT 
 
 FROM 
 
 GRAp TEMPLES AND TjlBEpCLES 
 
 TO THE 
 
 Triennial Grand Session. 
 
 :o:- 
 
 1. — Number of Temples, _ - . - 
 2. — Increase of Temples since last Triennial 
 
 Grand Session, - - - - 
 3. — Number of Tabernacles, - - 
 
 4. — Increase of Tabernacles since last Triennial 
 
 Grand Session, - - - - 
 
 5. — Number of Palatiums, - - - - 
 6. — Increase since last Triennial Grand Session, 
 7. — Number of Tents, - . - - 
 
 8. — Increase since last Triennial Grand Session, 
 9. — Number of Knights of Tabor, - - - 
 10. — Increase since last Triennial Grand Session, 
 11. — Number of Daughters of Tabor, - 
 12. — Increase since last Triennial Grand Session, 
 13. — Number of members in the Palatiums, 
 14. — Number of Palatine Guards and how many- 
 Companies, - - - - - 
 15. — Number of Maids and Pages, - - - 
 16. — Increase since last Triennial Grand Session, 
 17. — ^Names of the members of the International 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle that have 
 died since last Triennial Grand Session, 
 18. — Number of Knights and Daughters in the 
 
 State and Jurisdiction, « - - 
 
 19. — Amount of International Grand Dues: 
 
 First yeUr, ----- $ 
 
 Second year. 
 Third year, 
 
 Total Grand Dues, 
 
 286 
 
287 
 
 20. — Palatium Grand Dues, at one dollar per 
 year for each Palatium, : 
 First year, - - - - - $ . 
 
 Second year, - - - - * - 
 Third year, --_-.. 
 
 Total Grand Dues, $. 
 
 21. — Tent Grand Dues, at one dollar per year for 
 
 each Tent: 
 
 First year, $ 
 
 *^ Second year, - - - - - 
 
 Third year, - - . - 
 
 Total Grand Dues, - % 
 22.— Grand Total, % 
 
 I hereby certify that this is a true and correct report 
 
 for the three years ending the .... day of , a. 
 
 D. 18. ., A. O. T. . ., for the Grand Temple and Taber- 
 nacle for the State of and its Jurisdiction. 
 
 C. G. M. 
 
 I hereby attest this report to be correct and confirm 
 the same. Witness my hand and seal. 
 
 [seal.] C. G. S. 
 
 The I. C. G. S. is hereby authorized to collect the In- 
 ternational Grand Dues from the Grand Sessions of each 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle annually, and give his re- 
 ceipt for the amount. 
 
288 
 
 RERORT 
 
 FROM 
 
 INTERNATIONAL DISTRICTS 
 
 TO THE 
 
 TRIENNIAL GRAND SESSION. 
 
 :o: 
 
 1. — Number of Temples, . _ - - 
 2. — Number of memb'ers, - - - - 
 3. — Number of Tabernacles, - - - - 
 4. — Number of members, - - - . 
 5. — Number of Palatiums, - - - - 
 6. — Number of members, - - - - 
 7. — Number of Tents, - - - - - 
 8. — Number of members, - - - - 
 9. — The amount of Grand Dues paid : 
 
 First year, $ 
 
 Second year, - - - - - 
 Third year, _ - - - - 
 
 Total Grand Dues, $ 
 10. — The amount of expenses: 
 
 First year, $ 
 
 Second year, 
 
 Third year, 
 
 Total Grand Dues, $ 
 
 11. — Clear balance, $ 
 
 I hereby certify that this is a true report of Interna- 
 tional District, No D C M 
 
 The I. C. G. S. is hereby authorized to collect the 
 Grand Dues from the Districts annually, and give his re- 
 ceipts to the D. G. M. for the amount received. 
 
In Solo Deo Salus!" 
 
 S^MOF^SfS 
 
 OF 
 
 OFFICIAL FORMS, 
 
 USED BY THE 
 
 INTERNATIONAL 
 
 ORDER OF TWELVE, 
 
 (10 — Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
TKBORIKN FORTV^S. 
 
 777— INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELVE.-333. 
 
 PETITION. 
 
 To the Members of Temple^ No 
 
 Your petitioner has formed a good opinion of the Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve, and desires to be made a mem- 
 ber of your Temple. If admitted, I promise to obey tlie 
 Laws and Regulations of the Order. 
 
 Age , Residence , Recommended by 
 
 Signed this the day of , a. d. 18 . . . 
 
 Enclosed Fee, $ 
 
 333— INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELVE.— 333. 
 
 PETITION. 
 
 To the Members of Tabernacle^ No 
 
 Your petitioner has formed a favorable opinion of the 
 International Order of Twelve. I desire to be made a 
 member of your Tabernacle. If I am admitted a mem- 
 ber, I promise to obey the Laws and Regulations of the 
 Order. 
 
 Age , Residence , Recommended by 
 
 Signed this the day of , a. d. 18 . . . 
 
 Enclosed Fee, $ 
 
 INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELVE. 
 
 PETITION. 
 
 To the Members of Palatium, No 
 
 Your petitioner has been a member of tiie International 
 
 Order of Twelve for I am now in good 
 
 standing in Temple, (or Tabernacle.) No.. . . 
 
 290 
 
291 
 
 I desire to be enrolled a member of the Royal House of 
 Media, if found worthy. 
 
 Residence , Recommended by 
 
 Signed this the day of , a. d. 18. . . 
 
 Enclosed Fee, $ 
 
 777— INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELTE.-333. 
 
 GRAND TEMPLE AND TABERNACLE TRANSFER. 
 
 To All Whom These May Co7icern^ Greeting: 
 After careful examination, I am satisfied that the 
 
 bearer is a member of the International 
 
 Order of Twelve, and is worthy. By virtue of the author- 
 ity he (or slie) is hereby transferred to any Temple 
 of the Knights of Tabor (or Tabernacle) that elects him 
 (or her) a member, upon payment of one dollar. 
 
 Signed and sealed this the day of , a. d. 
 
 18..., A. O. T 
 
 [seal.] C. G. M. 
 
 For and Jurisdiction. 
 
 777-INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELVE.— 999. 
 
 TRANSFER. 
 
 This is to certify, that the bearer. Sir , 
 
 was a member in good standing when the transfer was 
 
 granted, in Temple, No. . . He is hereby 
 
 transferred to any Temple working under the Interna 
 tional Order of Twelve ; provided, he is elected by a ma- 
 jority vote of the members present at any Regular Ses- 
 sion, and upon payment of one dollar. This transfer is 
 good for sixty days from date only. 
 
 Witness our hands and seals this the day 
 
 of ,A. D. 18..., A. O. T 
 
 r -, C. M. 
 
 t^"""-^ C. S. 
 
 The Temple granting this transfer is authorized to charge 
 one dollar for it. No transfer can be granted, unless all dues 
 and fines are paid. 
 
292 
 INTERXATIOXAL ORDER OF TWELYE. 
 
 R. M. — TRANSFER. P. M. 
 
 This is to certify, that Prince (or Princess) was a mem- 
 ber in good standing at the time this transfer was 
 
 granted, of Palatium, No. . . He (or she) 
 
 is hereby transferred to any Palatium that is working 
 under the International Order of Twelve ; provided^ he 
 (or she) is elected by a majority of the members present, 
 and upon payment of one dollar. 
 
 Witness our hands and seals this the day 
 
 of , A. D. 18..., A. O. T 
 
 r -, P. P. 
 
 f^"^^-] R.P. 
 
 The members who receive a transfer shall pay one dollar 
 for it. 
 
 333— INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELVE.-333. 
 
 TRANSFER. 
 
 TJiis is to certify, that the bearer, Daughter Priestess 
 
 ,was a member in good standing when 
 
 this transfer was granted, of Tabernacle, 
 
 No... She is hereby transferred to any Tabernacle 
 working under the International Order of Twelve ; pro- 
 vided, she is elected by a majority vote of the members 
 present at a Regular Session, and upon payment of one 
 dollar. This transfer is good for sixty days from date 
 only. 
 
 Witness our hands and seals this the day 
 
 of , A. D. 18..., A. O. T 
 
 r -, C. P. 
 
 f^""^^ C.R. 
 
 The Tabernacle granting this transfer is authorized to 
 charge one dollar for it. 
 
293 
 INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TITELTE. 
 
 TRANSFER. 
 
 This is to certify, that the bearer was a member in good 
 
 standing of Tent, No . . . , at the time this 
 
 transfer was granted. He (or she) is hereby trans- 
 ferred to any Tent of Maids and Pages working under 
 the International Order of Twelve. 
 
 Signed this the day of , a. d. 18 
 
 Q. M. 
 
 [seal.] ^^ j^^ j^^ 
 
 777— INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELVE.— 333. 
 
 TRAVELING CERTIFICATE. 
 
 To All Whom These May Come, Greeting: 
 
 This is to certify, that the bearer is a member in good 
 
 standing in Temple, No. . . , situated in the 
 
 City of , State of 
 
 This certificate is granted to Sir for the 
 
 term of months. His monthly card will show 
 
 that he is clear with the Chief Scribe's books, and he will 
 give the Quarterly Pass that was used at the date of this 
 certificate. Chief Mentors are requested to give and 
 impart to him the Quarterly Pass whenever it is changed. 
 
 Members of the International Order of Twelve, every- 
 where, are requested to receive Sir as a true 
 
 and loyal member of the Knights and Daughters of Ta- 
 bor, of the Uniform Rank. 
 
 Signed this the day of , a. d. 18 ... , 
 
 A. O. T 
 
 C. M. 
 
 Attested by the seal of the Temple, and sig- 
 
 [SEAL.] nature of the Chief Scribe. 
 
 C. S. 
 
 This certificate is good only for the time for which it is 
 granted. 
 
294 
 777-INTERNATIONAL ORDER OF TWELYE. 
 
 TRAVELING CERTIFICATE. 
 
 To All Whom These Come, Greeting: 
 
 This is to certify, that the bearer is a member in good 
 
 standing in Tabernacle, No. . . , situated in the 
 
 City of , State of 
 
 This certificate is granted to Daughter Priestess 
 
 , f or the term of .months. Her monthly 
 
 card will show that she is clear with the Chief Recorder's 
 books, and she will give the Quarterly Pass which was 
 used at the date of this certificate. The High Priest- 
 esses are requested to give and impart to her the Quar- 
 terly Pass whenever it is changed. 
 
 Members of the International Order of Twelve, every- 
 where, are requested to receive Daughter Priestess 
 
 as a true and loyal member of the Knights 
 
 and Daughters of Tabor, and Priestess of Saba Meroe. 
 
 Signed this the ... ..... day of , a. d. 18 ... , 
 
 A. O. T 
 
 C. P. 
 
 Attested by the seal of the Tabernacle and 
 [seal.] signature of the Chief Recorder. 
 
 C. R. 
 
 This certificate is good only for the time for which it is 
 granted. 
 
295 
 
 QUARTERLY REPORT.-FORM 1. 
 
 1. — Number of members, - - - - 
 
 2. — Number suspended for dues, - - - 
 
 3. — Number expelled, - -• - - ...... 
 
 4. — Amount of sick dues paid this quarter, - 
 
 5. — Died this quarter, - - - - 
 
 6. — The amount of dues received this quarter, 
 
 7. — Number of new members received this quar- 
 ter, 
 
 8. — The amount received for fees, 
 
 9. — Total amount received from all sources, - ...... 
 
 10. — Amount paid out for regular expenses, - 
 
 11. — Amount paid out for funeral expenses this 
 
 quarter 
 
 12. — Amount given to distressed Knights or 
 
 Daughters, - - - - - 
 
 13. — Amount paid for C. G. P. or C. G. M. visits, 
 
 14. — Total amount paid out during the quarter, 
 
 15. — Balance in the treasury and bank, - - 
 
 16. — Do you own a hall? - - - - 
 
 17. — Do you hold 5^our regular sessions? - - 
 
 18. — Are your sessions pleasant and instructive? 
 
 I hereby certify this to be a correct report of 
 
 [seal.] the condition of Temple, 
 
 No .... (or Tabernacle, No . . . . ) 
 
 C. M. (orC. P.) 
 
 Attested and sealed this the day of , 
 
 A. D. 18..., A. O. T 
 
 C. S. (or C. R.) 
 
 All Temples and Tabernacles must report to the Chief 
 Grand Mentor the first week in March, June, September 
 and December. A Temple or Tabernacle that fails to 
 report quarterly, will be considered in bad condition. 
 
 The address of the C. M. or C. P. is Street, 
 
 City of State of 
 
296 
 QUARTERLY REPORT.-FORM 2. 
 
 1. — Number of members, - - 
 2. — How many boys? - - - 
 3. — How many girls? - - - _ 
 
 4. — How many boys transferred to the Temple? 
 5. — How many girls transferred to the Taber- 
 nacle? ------ 
 
 6. — What is the amount of dues received this 
 quarter? ------ 
 
 7. — What amount of fees received this quarter? 
 8. — Total amount received from all sources, - 
 9. — How much paid out for regular expenses? 
 10. — The amount paid to sick members, 
 11. — The amount paid on funerals this quarter, 
 12. — The amount paid on other expenses, 
 13. — Balance in treasury _ - - - 
 14. — Do you hold your sessions regularly? 
 
 I certify the above to be a true report of 
 
 Tent, No 
 
 Q. M 
 
 (Attested. ) C. R. K 
 
 All Tents must make a report to the Grand Queen 
 Mother the first week in March, June, September and 
 December, 
 
 The address of the Queen Mother is 
 
 Street, City of , State of 
 
297 
 THE QUARTERLY PASS. 
 
 The Quarterly Pass is issued to all Temples and Tab- 
 ernacles every three months. When it is received by the 
 C. M. or C. P. they impart it to their members at the first 
 Regular Session after it is received. If members are not 
 at the Session, they cannot receive it until the next Ses- 
 sion, as it is not to be given outside of a Session, and then 
 only by the Presiding Officer. C. M. and C. P. are not 
 permitted to give it to any but their members, except to 
 one having a traveling certificate from some other Tem- 
 ple or Tabernacle. The Quarterly Pass is a safe-guard 
 against imposition. C. M.s and C. P.s must carefully 
 follow these rules, and instruct their members not to 
 give it to any one, not even to a member of their own 
 Temple or Tabernacle, who have not received it. 
 :o: 
 
 REGULAR SESSION. 
 
 Temples and Tabernacles must hold at least one Session 
 in each month, if they fail to meet, they forfeit their 
 charter or warrant. If for reasons which make it impos- 
 sible for the Temple or Tabernacle to have their Regular 
 Session, the C. M. orC. P. must write immediately to the 
 C. G. M. and give him the reason, and get his dispensa- 
 tion. Unless this is done the charter or warrant will be 
 forfeited just as soon as the C. G. M. is notified. 
 
298 
 
 International Order of Twelve 
 
 OF 
 
 Knights and Daughters of Tabor. 
 
 ITS motto: 
 
 "In Solo Deo Salus!" 
 
 :o: 
 
 WORK AND BUSINESS OF MEMBERS. 
 
 This Order was organized for the benefit of its mem- 
 bers, and the people among whom Temples, Tabernacles, 
 Palatiums and Tents are organized. It is the duty of 
 the Order, 
 
 First, to take care of its sick^and distressed members, 
 to relieve its poor and helpless members, and to sustain 
 the widows and orphans. 
 
 Second, to advance the standard of virtue and moral- 
 ity, encourage and aid in multiplying schools and insti- 
 tutions of learning, and to impress upon its members the 
 necessity of investing in real estate, and acquiring home- 
 steads. 
 
 Third, to impress upon its members that they shall be 
 loyal to the Government in which they live, and to be 
 temperate, law abiding and trustworthy. 
 
 Fourth, our Order is non-sectarian and non-political, 
 therefore no denominational or political discussions shall 
 be permitted in our Temples, Tabernacles or Palatiums. 
 
 Fifth, when a member in good standing dies, it is the 
 duty of the Temple or Tabernacle and Palatium to have 
 the member respectably interred. 
 
299 
 
 Rights of Chief Mentors. 
 
 A Chief Mentor is responsible to the Grand Tem- 
 ple and Tabernacle for the manner in which he 
 conducts the business of his Temple. It is his bus- 
 iness to enforce the Laws of the Order, and the 
 Edicts of the C. G. M. He must have a thorough 
 knowledge of all the Laws and Rules of the Order. 
 He must not permit any one to assume control of 
 his Temple. His decisions are final, until reversed 
 by the C. G. M. 
 
 Rights of High Priestess. (C. P.) 
 
 A High Priestess is responsible to the Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle for the manner in which 
 she conducts the business of her Tabernacle. She 
 must enforce the Laws of the Order, and the 
 Edicts of the C. G. M. She must have a thorough 
 knowledge of the Laws and Rules of the Order. She 
 must not permit any one to assume control of her 
 Tabernacle. Her decisions are final, until re- 
 versed by the Chief Grand Mentor or Chief Grand 
 Preceptress. 
 
 Rights of Members. 
 
 Members of the International Order of Twelve 
 are obligated to obey all the Laws, Rules and 
 Edicts. It is the right of members in good stand- 
 ing to receive the weekly benefit when sick or dis- 
 abled, and to receive aid when in distress. It is 
 their right to demand and receive a traveling certifi- 
 cate upon their compliance with the Laws. It is their 
 right to receive a transfer, when they have paid all 
 their dues and taxes. There is no power that can 
 
300 
 
 suspend or expel a member without a trial, by due 
 process of the Laws of the Order. The right of 
 appeal, in accordance with the laws of appeals, 
 must not be denied to a member. A Knight of 
 Tabor, in good standing, has the right to visit any 
 Temple or Tabernacle, by producing proof that he 
 is in good standing in the Temple that he is a 
 member of. A Daughter of Tabor has the right 
 to visit any Tabernacle, by producing proof that 
 she is in good standing in the Tabernacle that she 
 is a member of. It is the right of members, who 
 die in good standing, to receive a respectable burial, 
 in accordance with the Laws of the Order. 
 
 Eights of Queen Mothers. 
 
 A Queen Mother has full control of her Tent, 
 and must administer the Laws governing the Tents, 
 and the Edicts of the C. G. M. She is to open 
 and close her Tent without a motion, in accordance 
 with the By-Laws of her Tent. She must have a 
 thorouo:h knowledije of the Laws of the Order. 
 Her decisions are final, until they are reversed by 
 the Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 Rights of Presiding Princes. 
 
 A Presiding Prince has full control of his Pala- 
 tium, and must administer the Laws that govern 
 Palatiums, and the Edicts of the C. G. M. He is 
 to open and close the Palatium without a motion, 
 in accordance with the By-Laws. He must li^ve a 
 thorough knowledge of the Laws of the Order. 
 His decisions are final, until they are reversed by 
 the C. G. M. 
 
301 
 
 A Recommendation. 
 It is recommended that the Daughters' Taber- 
 nacles hold their Sessions during the hours of the 
 day. If this is done, they will avoid being out late 
 at night, and will save themselves great inconveni- 
 ence, and for many other reasons not necessary to 
 mention. It will surely be for the best interests of 
 our Daughters to meet during the day. 
 
 The Degrees. 
 The degfrees of the International Order of Twelve 
 must be given according to the form as laid down 
 in the Rituals, and care must be taken to give the 
 candidate full and perfect instructions. No part of 
 the ceremony must be omitted. One or two de- 
 grees should only be conferred at any one Session; 
 in fact, it is best to confer but one degree on the 
 candidate at each Session. This will give the candi- 
 date a better idea of the different degrees. This 
 law applies only to chartered and warranted organi- 
 •zations, and not to the setting up of Clubs. 
 
 International Districts. 
 The I. C. G. M. may organize Districts in any 
 State, Territory or country, where there is no 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle. These Districts are 
 to remain under the Government of the Interna- 
 tional Grand Temple and Tabernacle, until they are 
 organized into Grand Temples and Tabernacles. 
 The I. C. G. M. shall appoint a District Mentor 
 and District Preceptress. A District must hold an 
 Annual Session, to be presided over by the I. C. G. 
 M. or District Mentor. The District must be com- 
 posed of all the Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 
302 
 
 and Tents, in one, two or more States or Terri- 
 tories. 
 
 Duties of the District Mentor. 
 
 It shall be the duty of the District Mentor to 
 make organizations in all parts of the District he 
 shall visit, and instruct Temples, Tabernacles, 
 Palatiums and Tents, when they request his pres- 
 ence. When he visits, his traveling expenses and 
 per diem must be paid by the Temple, Tabernacle, 
 Palatium or Tent which invites him. He must, when 
 ordered by the I. C. G. M., visit any part of the 
 District on special business for the Order. His- ex- 
 penses must be paid out of the International Grand 
 Treasury. He is to represent his District in the 
 Triennial Grand Session, and the Temples, Taber- 
 nacles, Palatiums and Tents in the District will be 
 assessed j9?'o rata to pay his traveling expenses and 
 per diem. He is to keep a list of all organizations» 
 and report to the I. C. G. M. their condition from 
 time to time. C. M.s and C. P.s will make their 
 quarterly reports to him, and he will furnish them 
 with the Quarterly Pass. His office expenses will 
 be paid out of the funds of the District Session, 
 that is, for his stationery and postage stamps. 
 
 Duties of the District Preceptress. 
 
 It shall be the duty of the District Preceptress 
 to visit all Tabernacles and Tents, when invited 
 by the C. P. or Q. M. Her expenses are to be 
 paid by the Tabernacle or Tent that she visits. She 
 is authorized to organize Tabernacles, Palatiums 
 and Tents in all parts of her District. She is the 
 Representative of the District in the Triennial Grand 
 
303 
 
 Session, and the organizations in the District will be 
 assessed pro rata to pay her expenses. 
 
 Grand Dues. 
 The amount which each Temple, Tabel-nacle, Pala- 
 tium and Tent shall pay for each member, will be 
 named from year to year, and collected at the Dis- 
 trict Session. Any Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium 
 and Tent, which fails to pay Grand Dues every year, 
 shall pay the penalty awarded by the District Ses- 
 sion. 
 
 District Sessions. 
 
 The C. M. must represent his Temple either in 
 person or by his Vice. 
 
 The C. P. must represent her Tabernacle either 
 in person or by her Vice. 
 
 The P. P. or V.-P. must* represent the Palatium. 
 
 The Queen Mother must represent her Tent in 
 person or by her Vice. 
 
 Each of the above organizations must pay the 
 traveling expenses and per diem of their Represen- 
 tatives. , 
 Time. 
 
 The time and month for holding the District 
 Sessions, shall be fixed by the International Chief 
 Grand Mentor. 
 
 Regalia. 
 
 The full dress of the Uniform Knights of Tabor 
 shall be as follows : 
 
 A black coat, single-breasted, buttoned up to the 
 neck in military style, yellow metal buttons, with 
 letters *'U. K. T.;" black pants; helmet, trimmed 
 with gold lace; a shield, with the letters *'U. K. 
 
304 
 
 T.,'* ornamented with a scarlet feather; a baldric, 
 four inches wide, colors black in the center and 
 scarlet on each side, trimmed with half inch gold 
 l-ace; on left breast the letters '*\j. K. T.," made of 
 yellow metal ; a twelve-pointed btar on the shoulder, 
 with the figures *«777" in the center; guantlets of 
 same colors as the baldric, made to reach half way 
 to the elbow, ornamented with letters "U. K. T. ;" 
 gloves buck-skin or lisle-thread, color light yellow; 
 regulation sword, silver scabbard with shield letters 
 **U. K. T. ;" sih^er chains, scarlet belt, with hooks 
 for cap and cup, on sword blade the words Uniform 
 Eank of Tabor; black navy cap, trimmed with silver 
 lace, letters **U. K. T." 
 
 Undress Uniform. 
 When giving the degrees or on fatigue duty the 
 uniform is the cap, sword, belt, gloves and badge. 
 The badge is a ten-pointed star, made of white 
 metal, with *'777" in the center, scarlet ribbon, 
 with letters International Order of Twelve printed 
 thereon. The badge is attached to the left breast 
 by bar and pin. 
 
 C. M.S AND P. C. M.s 
 Colors are emerald green, and gold; baldric, 
 green and black; helmet, green feather; sword, 
 yellow metal scabbard and chains; cap, gold lace; 
 badge or jewel, yellow metal. 
 
 Saba Merges Regalia, 
 full dress. 
 The High Priestess, Tharbis, white dress, a royal 
 purple robe entrail, spangled with small gold stars 
 
305 
 
 fastened at the shoulders with **333*' golden pins. 
 The jewel of office is pinned to left breast. The 
 staff in her right hand. An emerald green belt, 
 gold clasp *'333," gloves long, pink silk or lisle- 
 thread. A golden coronet, ornamented with 
 different colored stones. A Maid and Page accom- 
 pany her on all public occasions. 
 
 The Dress of Other Officers. 
 
 Amisis, Scsotheni, Seraphis, Hyerego, Abassine, 
 Lybenus, three Hespers, three Gyrenes, white 
 dress, sky blue robe entrail, spangled with small 
 silver stars; sky blue belt; silver clasp **333;" pink 
 silk or lisle-thread gloves ; a golden coronet, orna- 
 mented with white stones. 
 
 ♦ Dress Regalia. 
 
 The C. P.s and P. C. P.s will wear the following : 
 A collar, emerald green, ornamented with twelve 
 golden stars; pink gloves; staff; coronet; emerald 
 green sash or belt; jewel of office; yellow metal 
 star, resting on a ring; lettered in center, C. P. or 
 P. C. P. and emerald green ribbon on which is 
 printed, "International Order of Twelve" (with bar 
 and pin). 
 
 Other Officers. 
 
 V.-P., C. R., C. T., C. Ps., I. St., O. St., B. 
 Ys. and B. Es., emerald green collar, trimmed with 
 twelve silver stars, pink gloves, emerald green sash 
 or belt (333), coronet, jewel of office, white metal 
 star resting on a ring, with initials office in the 
 center; sky-blue ribbon on which is printed "Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve" (with bar and pin). 
 
306 
 
 Other Members. 
 
 Emerald green collar, ornamented with twelve 
 silver stars, buff colored gloves, emerald green 
 sash or belt (*'333"), a silver coronet or wreath of 
 flowers. The Badge — a white metal star resting 
 on a ring (''333") in the center. Sky-blue ribbon 
 on which is printed, "International Order of 
 Twelve" (with bar and pin). 
 
 All regalia may be ornamented with either gold 
 or silver lace or fringe to match the color of the 
 stars worn by the member. 
 
 Undress of Daughters. 
 
 The undress of the Daughters is the Jewel or 
 Badge, which must be worn at all Sessions when 
 the full regalia is not required, as also gloves. The 
 Jewel or Badge can be worn at any time to desig- 
 nate that you are a member of the Order on any 
 public occasion, when the full regalia is not needed. 
 Mourning Badge. 
 
 The Mourning Badge is a small rosette made of 
 crape, with an emerald green center. This must 
 be worn for the time set by the Temple or Taber- 
 nacle after the death of a member, not less than 
 thirty nor more than sixty days. 
 
 Staffs and Kods. 
 
 The C. P.'s staff is about three feet long, one 
 inch in diameter, surmounted with a golden ball ; 
 color of staff, emerald green. 
 
 Inner and Outer Sentinels' rods are seven feet 
 long, one inch in diameter; color, emerald green, 
 surmounted with spear and golden ball. 
 
 The C. Ps.* rod is seven feet long, one inch in 
 
307 
 
 diameter; color, emerald green, surmounted with 
 a golden crook. 
 
 Form of Tabernacle House. 
 
 The House shall be three stories high. First 
 story, fifteen inches square, twelve inches high; 
 second story, ten inches square, twelve inches 
 high ; third story, open on four columns, fifteen 
 inches high. Color: First story, pink; second 
 story, pea-green; third story, white. 
 
 Rings for carrying; two pink poles. 
 
 The moulding of the Tabernacle may be gilded 
 and ornamented to suit the taste. 
 
 Lettering on first story, first side, the name and 
 number; second side, the date of ^v'arrant; third 
 side, **Daughters of the Tabernacle;" fourth side, 
 the name of city and State. 
 
 Second story, first side, 333; second side, the 
 Bible; third side, the cups; fourth side,, the gol- 
 den shoes. 
 
 Form of Temple House. 
 
 The Temple House shall be three stories high. 
 First story, eighteen inches square and one foot 
 deep ; second story, fifteen inches square and one 
 foot deep; third story, ten inches square and one 
 foot deep, made to open in each story. Color: 
 First story, light scarlet; second story, pea-green; 
 third story, white; moulding gilded. Lettering: 
 First story — On one side, the name of the Temple 
 and number; next side, the dale of its organiza- 
 tion; third side, the city and State; fourth side, 
 **Knights of Tabor." Second story— First, 777; 
 second, 999; third, 444; fourth, 333. Third 
 
308 
 
 story — First, the eye ; second, the clasped hands ; 
 third, the ear; fourth, the emblematic star; rings 
 and pole for carrying. 
 
 Temple Furniture. 
 The Holy Bible, two cups, gavel, three pitchers, 
 sword, girdle, star, shield, key, Manual, three 
 candle-sticks, and staff. 
 
 Tabernacle Furniture. 
 Holy Bible, two golden shoes, roll. of flax, two 
 cups, ball of wool, curious girdle, five candle-sticks, 
 coronet, robes, bells, door, chariot and chair, and 
 faces. 
 
 Altar. 
 
 The altar is two feet six inches in height, one 
 foot six inches w^ide, and one foot deep, painted 
 emerald green on one side, on one side scarlet, on 
 one side blue, and on one side black, with figures 
 ''777," ''333," "444," "999" (one set of figures 
 on each side), the top white. 
 
 Governing Departments 
 1 .—Temples of the Knights of Tabor. 
 2. — Tabernacles of Daughter ' Priestesses of 
 Tabor, 
 3. — Palatiums of the Royal lloiise of Media. 
 4. — Tents of Maids and Pages of Honor, 
 5. — Grand Temples and Tabern'ides. 
 6. — International Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 Sickness. 
 One of the fundamental principles, as *vell as 
 most important, of the International Order of 
 Twelve, is the care of its sick, disabled or distressed 
 
309 
 
 members. An order or society which does not 
 make provision for its sick, has no right to exist. 
 
 The Temple or Tabernacle that does not amply 
 provide for its sick, disabled or distressed mem- 
 bers, ought to and should close up, for they are a 
 disgrace to the Order. Each Temple and Taber- 
 nacle must pay a weekly benefit, and if the sick 
 members need more, arrangements may be matie to 
 meet the expenses; make your monthly dues on 
 each member sufficient to keep money in your 
 treasury to meet expenses. Members, who know 
 that they will be cared for when sick, will not ob- 
 ject to paying the monthly dues. 
 
 District Grand Mentors. 
 
 Under the authority of Grand Temples and Tab- 
 ernacles, the appointing of D. G. M.s and arrang- 
 ing their Districts, is entirely the business of the 
 Chief Grand Mentors. He alone has the authority 
 to appoint. He is a Special Deputy of the C. G. 
 M., and the limits of his District are fixed by the 
 C. G. M.'s commission. The duties of the D. G. 
 M. must be named in his commission. If he is 
 ordered to visit a Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium or 
 Tent by the C. G. M., he must be paid out of the 
 Grand Treasury for his time, traveling expenses 
 and per diem. He cannot be received into an open 
 Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium or Tent on official 
 business, without showing his authority from the 
 Chief Grand Mentor. The D. G. M. is not permitted 
 to control the business of Temples, Tabernacles 
 Palatiums or Tents, nor can he preside in the elec- 
 tion of officers in any of the departments. 
 
310 
 
 Supplies. 
 
 The supplies which must be furnished, with the 
 charter, to new Temples, are as follows: — 
 
 6 Constitutions, 2 Complete Rituals, 6 Blank 
 Transfers, 6 Blank Traveling Certificates, 25 
 Monthly Cards, 12 Blank Petitions, 4 Blank Quar- 
 terly Reports, the Quarterly Pass and Key. 
 
 New Tabernacles, with the warrant: — 6 Consti- 
 tutions, 2 Third Degree Rituals, and 2 Fourth 
 Degree Rituals, 25 Monthly Cards, 6 Blank Trans- 
 fers, 6 Blank Traveling Certificates, 12 Blank Pe- 
 titions, 4 Blank Quarterly Reports, the Quarterly 
 Pass and Key. 
 
 New Palatiums, with the charter, 12 Rituals and 
 1 Manual. Palatiums make their own Constitution 
 and By-Laws, but they shall not conflict with the 
 General Laws and Constitution of Grand Temples 
 and Tabernacles. 
 
 New Tents, with charter, 25 Monthly Cards and 
 12 Constitutions. 
 
 Every Temple, Tabernacle, Palatium and Tent 
 must have and own a Manual within three months 
 after having been organized and set up. 
 
 Incorporation. 
 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles are a part of the 
 International Order of Twelve, yet they are set 
 apart as a Governing Power under the General 
 Laws in their States, Territories or Provinces. For 
 the purpose of legalizing these organizations and 
 their departments, they must be incorporated. 
 The Board of Grand Curators shall be th^ incor- 
 porators. 
 
311 
 
 Eeal Estate. 
 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles should secure 
 Real Estate, by having it deeded to the Board of 
 Grand Curators and their successors in office, the 
 ownership to be vested in the Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle of Knights and Daughters of Tabor, for 
 the State of . 
 
 A Temple or Tabernacle which is making prep- 
 arations to build a hall, or is about to buy a lot or 
 building, may secure the same as follows : 
 
 First, call a meeting and elect Trustees. A deed 
 can be made to these Trustees and their succes- 
 sors in office, the ownership to be vested in 
 
 Temple, No. — , of Knights of Tabor. (If 
 
 a Tabernacle, in Tabernacle, No. — , of 
 
 Daughters of Tabor), name town or city, county 
 and State. 
 
 When a Temple and Tabernacle unite to pur- 
 chase, they call a joint meeting and elect Trus- 
 tees. The property is deeded to these Trustees 
 and their successors. The ownership is vested in 
 
 Temple, No. — , and Tabernncle, 
 
 No. — , of Knights and Daughters of Tabor. Name 
 town or city, county and State. 
 
 In cities where there are a number of Temples 
 and Tabernacles, a joint meeting is called of all 
 the numbers, and Trustees are elected. A deed is 
 made to these Trustees and their successors in 
 office. The ownership is vested in (the name and 
 number of each Temple and Tabernacle is given in 
 the deed to the Knights and Daughters of Tabor, 
 also name of city, county and State.) 
 
al^ 
 
 The Number of Trustees. 
 
 There may be three, five, seven or nine Trus- 
 tees. In some States they must all be males, in 
 others a woman may be a Trustee. Whatever the 
 law is, comply with it. 
 
 Election. 
 
 The Trustees are elected annually, at a meeting 
 called for that purpose. Thirty dayS' notice must 
 be given, or the day and date fixed in the By-Laws. 
 
 Stocks and Shares. 
 
 When one Temple or Tabernacle buys real estate, 
 it is not necessary to form a joint-stock company, 
 but when two or more join together, the amount of 
 stock should be fixed and that divided into shares. 
 Temples and Tabernacles may take shares, or it 
 can be made so that the individual members can be 
 shareholders. None but members of the Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve, however, shall be share- 
 holders. 
 
 Incorporation. 
 
 Real estate, upon which halls are built, or to be 
 built, must be incorporated in accordance with the 
 form of the law of the State in which the real 
 estate is situated. 
 
 Palatium Regalia. 
 
 The Regalia of a Palatine Guard shall be as 
 follows : 
 
 Baldric, made of leather, four inches wide, length 
 to suit the height of the person. The center 
 emerald green, on each side of the green scarlet, 
 
313 
 
 trimmed with gold lace. A yellow metal star, with 
 seven points, on the shoulder; letters on the breast 
 *'P. C. ;" epaulet on left shoulder, ornamented with 
 green and gold. Regular Palatium Badge. A 
 black chapeau; a yellow metal star with seven 
 points, lettered '*P. C." in the center. Green and 
 white feathers ; chapeau ornamented with gold lace. 
 Guantlets or gloves of brown leather; guantlets 
 ornamented with ««777" on yellow metal. Dress 
 black military suit, with double row of yellow metal 
 buttons, lettered "P. C." 
 
 Undress Uniform. 
 
 Black skull-cap, with gold lace band, lettered 
 **P. C. ; " sword and belt; brown lisle-thread gloves ; 
 and regulation badge, of yellow metal. 
 
 Regalia of a Princess of Media. 
 
 Light buff dress, sash six inches wide, colors 
 emerald green and dark pink, three inches of each 
 color. The sash to hang from the left shoulder. 
 A seven-pointed star of yellow metal, lettered **P. 
 M." The star on the shoulder. The sash is made 
 to suit the height of the person. The belt dark 
 pink, with a five-pointed star made of yellow metal, 
 used as a clasp, and lettered **P. M. " Gauntlets 
 and gloves dark pink, letters on guantlets **P. M. ;'' 
 a poniard suspended by a gilded chain near the left 
 side ; a silver cup attached to the belt, and a mural 
 crown, ornamented with a variety of colored stones. 
 
 The regalia may be ornamented with gold lace 
 and fringe, to suit the taste. 
 
314 
 
 Undress Regalia of Princess of Media. 
 
 Any colored dress may be worn ; the regulation 
 badge, color emerald green and dark pink; Pala- 
 tium Badge, attached to left breast by a bar and 
 pin; also dark pink gloves. 
 
 The flag of the United States — the '*Star Spangled 
 Banner" — with flags of other nations (if thought 
 proper), shall be displayed by the Uniform Rank 
 Knights and Palatine Guards at all public parades. 
 
 Temple — Plateau. 
 
 Knights of Tabor may call their place of meeting 
 or hall either a Temple or Plateau. 
 
 Chief Preceptress — High Priestess. 
 
 The Presiding Officer of a Tabernacle may be 
 called either C. P. or H. P. 
 
REGKLIK B7XDGES. 
 
In Solo Deo Salus! 
 
 COMPLETE LEXICON 
 
 OF 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS 
 
 USED IN THE 
 
 INTERNATIONAL 
 
 ORDER OF TWELVE. 
 
 318 
 
TABORIAN LEXICON. 
 
 : o :■ 
 
 Abbreviations — The abbreviations which are 
 used in the Order are fully explained for the bene- 
 fit of the member!', as follows: 
 
 A. D. — An7io Domini — in the year of the Lord, 
 dating from the birth of Christ up to the present 
 time. 
 
 A. M. — Anyio Mundi — the year of the world, the 
 age of the world. 
 
 A. O. T.— Age of Taborians. 
 
 I. S. D. S.—'^In Solo Deo Scdus''—^'ln God 
 Alone is Safety" — The motto of the Order. 
 
 K. O. T.— Knights of Tabor. 
 
 U. R. T.— Uniform Rank of Tabor. 
 
 D. T.— Daughter of Tabor. 
 
 D. P. — Daughter Priestess. 
 
 Q. M. — Queen Mother. 
 
 M. A. P.— Maids and Pages. 
 
 T. C. — Taborian Cadets. 
 
 P. P. — Presiding Prince of the Palatium. 
 
 V.-Ps. — Yice-Princess of the Palatium. 
 
 P. R. M. — Prince of the Royal House of Media. 
 
 P. O. M.— Princess of Media. 
 
 P. P. P.— P.ist Presidinir Prince. 
 
 p. y.-Ps.—Past Vice-Princess. 
 317 
 
318 
 
 C. M.— Chief Mentor— the Presiding Officer of 
 the Temple. 
 
 p. C. M.— Past Chief Mentor. 
 
 C. P. — Chief Preceptress — The Presiding Officer 
 of the Tabernacle. 
 
 P. C. P.— Pasi Chief Preceptress. 
 
 H. P. — High Priestess — Presiding Officer in the 
 Ancient Tabernacle. 
 
 C. S.— Chief Scribe of Temple. 
 
 C. T. — Chief Treasurer of Temple. 
 
 C. O.— Chief Orator of Temple. 
 
 C. C. B— Chief Color Bearer of Temple. 
 
 C. D.-M.— Chief Drill-Master of Temple. 
 
 C. G.— Chief Guard of Temple. 
 
 C. St.— Chief Sentinel of Temple. 
 
 y.-P. — Vice-Preceptress or Vice-Priestess of 
 Tabernacle. 
 
 C. R. — Chief Recorder of Tabernacle. 
 
 C. Tr. — Chief Treasurer of Tabernacle. 
 
 C. Ps. — Chief Priestess of Tabernacle. 
 
 C. T.— Chief Tribune of Tabernacle. 
 
 I. St. — Inner Sentinel of Tabernacle. 
 Titles. 
 
 Temple— C. M. or Sir Chief. 
 
 Tabernacle, in the Fourth Degree, H. P. or 
 Tharbis. 
 
 Palatium — P. P. or Sir Prince. 
 
 Tents— C. M. P. or Chief Maid. 
 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle. — C. G. M. or 
 Grand Chief. 
 
 International Grand Temple and Tabernacle. — I. 
 C. G. M. or International Grand Chief. 
 
 I. O. T. — International Order of Twelve, 
 
319 
 
 C. M. P.— Chief Maid— the Presiding Officer of 
 the Tent. 
 
 C. G. M. — Chief Grand Mentor— the Presiding 
 Grand Officer of a Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 P. C. G. M.— Past Chief Grand Mentor. 
 
 C. G. P. — Chief Grand Preceptress. 
 
 P. C. G. P.— Past Chief Grand Preceptress. 
 
 G. Q. M. — Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 P. G. Q. M.— Past Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 D. G. M. — Deputy Grand Mentor, or District 
 Grand Mentor. 
 
 D. G. P. — Deputy Grand Preceptress. 
 
 G. T. T.— Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 I. C. G. M. — International Chief Grand Mentor 
 — the Presiding Officer of the International Grand 
 Temple and Tabernacle. 
 
 P. I. C. G. M.— Past International Chief Grand 
 Mentor. 
 
 I. C. G. P. — International Chief Grand Precep- 
 tress. 
 
 P. I. C. G. P.— Past International Chief Grand 
 Preceptress. 
 
 I. G. Q. M. — International Grand Queen Mother. 
 
 P. I. G. Q. M. — Past International Grand Queen 
 Mother. 
 
 I. D. G. M. — International Deputy Grand Men- 
 tor. 
 
 I. G. D. — International Grand Deputy (a 
 Daughter). 
 
 I. G. T. T. — International Grand Temple and 
 Tabernacle. 
 
320 
 
 A. 
 
 Agla — One of the twelve cabalistic names 
 which the ancient Magies of Persia and other mystic 
 workers used to express the incommunicable name 
 of the Deity — the names given are as follows : 
 
 Ehi, Azazel, Eloho, El-Gibbor, Eloah, Sabaoth, 
 Tseboath, Shaddai, Adonai, Makom and Agla. 
 The followers of Mithra, in practicing their mystic 
 rites, worshipped God under the name of Agla. 
 
 Amath — A noted Prince of the Tribe of Ben- 
 jamin. He was a giant in strength, and one of 
 Israel's mightiest warriors, a cotemporary with 
 Barak and Deborah ; and history tells us that he 
 was one of the leaders, with ten thousand warriors, 
 who conquered Sisera and his army in a battle near 
 Mount Tabor, b. c. 1336. 
 
 Adotiia — The Jews did not believe it right to 
 pronounce the true name of God. Joseph us, the 
 Jewish historian, said it was not lawful to pro- 
 nounce His holy name. In re^wiing, whenever the 
 word Jehovah occurred, tiiey abstained from pro- 
 nouncing it, and used the word Adonia instead. 
 The definition of this word is Lord or Master. It 
 is one of the twelve cabalistic names of God. The 
 number *M2" is a perfect number, and a symbol of 
 purity. 
 
 A7ja — In the mysteries of Ethiopia we find the 
 name Aya used to express the Goddess of Thun- 
 der, the wife of the River Nile. Si»e was supposed 
 by the ancient Ethiopians to have full comnuind of 
 the rise and fall of the Nile. When it thundereif, 
 it was Aya speaking. She was supposed to be 
 seated at the entrance of the ancient Tabernacle of 
 
321 
 
 Saba Meroe, guarded by a great serpent. The pre- 
 cepts of her thunder-bolts were light from Heaven. 
 
 Arcanum — A mystery, a hidden secret. In 
 Lai in, Arcanus, a closed secret, a chest or box, or a 
 secret repository. The Past Arcanum is the 
 Twelfth Degree in the International Order of 
 Twelve, and is the Presiding and Past Presiding 
 Officers' Degree. The members are regularly or- 
 ganized, and have monthly sessions. They rep- 
 resent their Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and 
 Tents. 
 
 Adoption — The title of the First Degree in the 
 Tabernacle. When a Daughter takes this degree, 
 she is adopted a Daughter of Tabor, and her name 
 is enrolled on the C. R.'s roll-book. 
 
 Advance — The title of the Second Degree in the 
 Tabernacle. When the adopted Daughter has 
 served her full time, she is prepared to advance to 
 the more serious and trustworthy dignity of a 
 Daughter of Tabor. 
 
 Altar — Just after the dawn and sun-rise of crea- 
 tion, very early in the history of the world. Altars 
 were erected, and sacrificial offerings were made 
 upon them in honor of and thanksgivings to God. 
 The first Altar that history gives an account of was 
 built by Cain and Abel, sons of Adam and Eve. 
 Through the pages of history, for four thousand 
 years, we read of Altars having been erected for 
 sacrificial offerings and praises to God. 
 
 In tlie Uniform Rank, or Fourth Degree of the 
 Knights of Tabor, the Altar takes a very prominent 
 part. In the Saba Meroe, or Fourth Degree of the 
 (11 — Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
322 
 
 Daughters of TMbor, the burning Altar is a very 
 interesting part of the ceremonies. The Presiding 
 Officer of the Temple and of the Tabernacle is 
 seated South of the Altar, the Vice in the North, 
 the C. R. in the East and the Chief Treasurer in 
 the West. 
 
 Ammon — (See Jupiter Ammon). 
 
 Amen — An expression used at the closing of 
 prayer, and signifies **So be it." When it is used 
 in a declaration, it means **Truly, faithfuly ful- 
 filled." 
 
 Ahassine — The name of the Inner Sentinel of the 
 Ancient Tabernacle of Saba Moroe. Abyssinia, a 
 country in Africa, situated South of Nubia and 
 West of the Red Sea, once was a powerful ancient 
 government, but with the fall of Ethiopia, Abyssinia 
 gradually lost its civilization and internal wars 
 debased the people to barbarism. The Abyssinians 
 embraced Christianity under the reign of Constan- 
 tine the Great, and for a time these people lived a 
 peaceful life, and the prospects were that they would 
 return to their ancient greatness, but internal strife 
 again reduced this favored country to its savage prac- 
 tices. The population at this date is about 3,000,- 
 000, divided into many distinct tribes, most of whom 
 are in a barbarous condition. Abassine, the guard- 
 ian of the inner entrance of the ancient Tabernacle 
 was a native of that country. 
 
 Amisis — The name of the Priestess of the Temple 
 which was situated in ancient Nubia, in the famous 
 city of Beyt-El-\Velee. A drawing taken from 
 ancient sculpture found in Nubia, represents Amisis 
 seated in the northern part of the ancient Taber- 
 
323 
 
 nacle, on a throne representing the Moon. She is 
 
 receiving a delegation of rank which has come to 
 
 consult Isis, by order of Ramesis the II, about the 
 
 conducting and management of victory. The name 
 
 Am isis is purely Ethiopian, and means that the 
 
 bearer is a representative of the universal power 
 
 of the Supreme Ruler of the World, or one able to 
 
 fortell future events. 
 
 B. 
 
 JBible^The Book of Books, the Sacred Word of 
 God, in which are contained the revelations of 
 the Supreme Being. The Old and New Testament. 
 The rules and principles of Christian faith and 
 practice. It is humanity's sacred treasure. The 
 revealed will of God to mankind. No person can 
 become a member of the International Order of 
 Twelve, unless a firm believer in the teachings of 
 the Holy Volume. 
 
 Barak — Al)out the year 1336, b. c. , the children 
 of Isreal were held captives by the Canaanites. 
 They prayed unto God to deliver them. He heard 
 their petition, and sent Deborah, a prophetess, who 
 was Judge of Israel at that time, to call Barak, a 
 son of Abinoam, of Kedesh-Naphthali, to go to 
 Mount Tabor, and take with him ten thousand men 
 of the tribes of Naphthali and Zebulon, Barak and 
 Deborah gathered ten thousand men, fully armed and 
 equipped, on the Phiteauof Mount Tabor, and gave 
 battle to the immense hosts of Canaanites, who were 
 under the command of Sisera, and by the help of 
 God secured a great victory, and freed the captive 
 Isaraelites. Knio^hts of Tabor will not foro^et the 
 inner history which secured to Barak this extra- 
 ordinary victorv. 
 
324 
 
 Book of Laws — Law is that which is set and 
 fixed by statute, an edict, a rule of government, an 
 expressed degree, a command, an enactment. No 
 government could exist for any length of time with- 
 out a cole of laws founded upon the principles of 
 justice and right. All who are enrolled members 
 of the International Order of Twelve are presented 
 with a book of laws — the Manual and the Constitu- 
 tions. The unwritten law is impressed upon their 
 memory in such a manner that it cannot be for- 
 gotton. 
 
 Ballot — It is the lawful duty of the members of 
 a Temple and Tabernacle to ballot on every candi- 
 date. The balls are white and black. All mem- 
 bers present at the Session must vote. If a candi- 
 date is reported on favorably by the Committee, the 
 ballot box is prepared by one of the Chief Guards 
 or Chief Tribunes, who puts all the balls into one 
 apartment of the box and then places it on the 
 altar. The C. S. or C. R. calls the roll. As each 
 member's name is called, the vote is cast; when the 
 roll is finished, the Guard or Tribune takes the box 
 to the V.-M. or V.-P. who examines the balls, but 
 does not announce.' The box is then placed before 
 the C. M. or C. P., and is examined, and the result 
 announced. If four black balls are found, the 
 candidate is rejected. If the C. M. or C. P. thinks 
 a mistake has been made by some member voting a 
 black ball, another ballot is ordered. 
 
 Blue — One of the appropriate colors found in the 
 Second Degree in the Tabernacle. It is an emblem 
 of universal love, and of that charity which is as 
 
325 
 
 broad as creation. It is emblematic of true friend- 
 ship and constant benevolence. 
 
 Banner — In the International Order of Twelve 
 four different banners are used. The Temple 
 Banner is made of heavy silk; colors, one side, 
 emerald green ; on the other side scarlet. The 
 trimming is gold ; the lettering on the green side is 
 ^'In /Solo Deo /Sahis,^^ sl twelve-pointed star in the 
 center, with figures ''111,'' <'999," and at the bot- 
 tom **U. R. of K. of T;" on the scarlet side the 
 name and number of the Temple is given, a seven- 
 pointed star, and the name of the city and State or 
 country. 
 
 The Tabernacle Banner is made of heavy silk, one 
 side emerald green, the other side light pink. Let- 
 tering: on the green side is **Saba Meroe/' A shield 
 with the following colors: gold, blue, purple, scar- 
 let and white, with **333" in the center of the 
 shield. 
 
 The Banner of the International Order of Twelve 
 is trimmed with gold lace and fringe ; on the pink 
 side the name and number of the Tabernacle and 
 the name of the city and State and country. 
 
 The Palatium Banner is made of heavy silk 
 or satin, trimmed with gold. The four colors are 
 green, scarlet, purple and white, arranged to suit 
 the taste. The lettering on one side is '*Royal House 
 of Media," and a blazing star with twelve points. 
 * 'International Order of Twelve" on the other side. 
 The name and number of the Palatium, a globe, the 
 name of city and State and country. 
 
 The Tent Banner is made of silk or linen, 
 trimmed with silver lace and fringe. The colors 
 
32(3 
 
 are piuk and scarlet ; on one side a bee-hive : *'The 
 Children of Mount Tabor;" on the other side the 
 name and number of the Tent, and city and State 
 and country. The Taborian Cadets carry a United 
 States flag also. 
 
 The flag of the United States of North America 
 must be carried in all public processions, and also 
 the flag of other nations wherein the Order is es- 
 tablished. 
 
 Badges — A badge is a mark of distinction ; it is 
 worn by Orders and Societies to designate to which 
 Order or Society the wearer belongs. They that 
 wear a badge, ought to be prepared to prove their 
 right to display it. The various badges worn by 
 the members of the International Order of Twelve 
 are hereby fully explained. 
 
 The Badge of a Knight of Tabor is a ten-pointed 
 star, made of silver or white metal, with figures 
 **777'* in the center; a scarlet ribbon, with the 
 Avords * 'International Order of Twelve" printed 
 thereon. The fastening is a bar and pin, worn on 
 left breast. The Badge of a Chief Mentor and Past 
 C. M. is gold or yellow metal, with an emerald 
 green ribbon. 
 
 The Badtre of the Dausrhter of the Tabernacle is 
 a five-pointed star on a ring of silver or white metal, 
 with fiijures **333" in the center; a skv-blue rib- 
 bon, with the words ''International Order of Twelve" 
 printed thereon. The fastening is a bar and pin, 
 worn on the left breast. This is the Saba Meroe 
 Badge. The Badge of a C. P. or H. P. is either 
 gold or yellow metal; the ribbon is emerald green. 
 The Past C. P. or Past II. P. wear the same. 
 
327 
 
 The Badge of the Eoval House of Media is a ten 
 pointed siar within a ring, made of gold or yellow 
 metal, lettered "R. M." in the center of the star, 
 with fastening bar and pin. 
 
 The Badge of Maids and Pages is a white metal 
 or silver star, on the face of which are crossed jav- 
 elins, with letters ''T. T.," and fastening bar and 
 
 pin. 
 
 C. 
 
 Candace — History informs us that for two or 
 three centuries the reigning Queens of Ethiopia 
 were called Candace. Ethiopia, at the time that 
 our Savior was on earth, was not the brilliant 
 government that it was when Queen Nicaule visited 
 Solomon, yet it was one of the recognized nations, 
 under its own monarchs. Candace, Queen of Ethi- 
 opia, was enrolled among the sovereigns of the earth. 
 One of her cabinet officers visited Jerusalem about 
 the time that Jesus was crucified, and on his way 
 home he had the Scriptures expounded to him by 
 Phillip, an apostle; he believed and was baptized. 
 This Eunuch was a man of authority under Queen 
 Candace, and no doubt taught the Christian doctrine 
 in Ethiopia. The name of Candace, Queen of 
 Ethiopia, will be perpetuated in the Saba Meroe. 
 
 Cabalistic — The ancient traditions or a mysterious 
 science, used by the ancients to interpret unpub- 
 lished history of events. The Jewish doctors used 
 a combination of words, letters and numbers in 
 interpreting the Scriptures, and the cabalistic doctors 
 pretended to foretell future events by the study of 
 this science. 
 
328 
 
 The Egyptian and Ethiopian priesthood used this 
 secret science and mystery in I heir mys'tic work. 
 It was by this means they taught the greatness of 
 Jehovah ; by this system they illustrated the great 
 truths of the resurrection and immortality of body 
 and soul. The Knights of Tabor, in their Third and 
 Fourth Degrees, have clearly unfolded the mystical 
 modes of the Cabala, in explaining sacred things. 
 
 Calanthe — A very interesting history is attached 
 to this word. The great mysteries of Mithras were 
 instituted by Zer.idusht, a learned sage of ancient 
 Persia. The mysteries of Mithras were divided 
 into seven degrees. No one was accepted to member- 
 ship until he had passed through the most severe 
 tests, to prove that he was worthy to be admitted 
 to that mystic and binding friendship which could 
 not be severed. The aspirant for membership was 
 first purified by water in seven baths, each bath of 
 seven hours' duration. He was made to pass through 
 what he supposed was flames of fire. If he had 
 couratje and determination he wentthrouo^h unhurt. 
 The next was a fast of seven days to test his en- 
 durance. After these preparations he was per- 
 mitted to enter a cavern, representing the world ; on 
 its walls were inscribed the celestial signs. Mithras 
 was represented as seated in the sun, denoting that 
 his followers paid adoration to the sun's light, heat 
 and fire; to the right of Mithras were Dalmon and 
 Phyletus, two men, with their right hands clasped 
 together, around them was a bright rain-bow. 
 They represented true friendship, and were votaries 
 of the mysteries of Mithras. They had been tested, 
 and proved their ability to keep aa obligation. 
 
329 
 
 Dalmon had been arrested for killing a man, and 
 was tried before Dionysius, the Governor, holding 
 oflSce under the authority of Astyages, King of 
 Media. (Persia at that time, 575 years, b. c, 
 was a province governed by Media. ) Dalmon was 
 condemned and sentenced to be thrown into a den 
 of tigers within five days. Phyletus felt it his duty 
 to save Dalmon or die for him. He appealed to 
 Dionysius, and stated to him that Dalmon had a 
 wife and children who depended on their husband 
 and father for sustenance, and that if Dalmon 
 could not be pardoned, he would take Dalmon's 
 place and die in his stead. He said: *'I have no 
 wife nor children depending on me, like Dalmon.'* 
 
 The Governor declared that he would not issue a 
 pardon, nor would he accept the proposition which 
 Phyletus made to him. Phyletus, finding that 
 Dionysius would not hear him, decided to make a 
 personal appeal to King Astyages. The king re- 
 sided in a distant city. Phyletus, with two other 
 friends, mounted on fast horses, made the journey, 
 and appeared before the king the next day after 
 they had started. 
 
 Phyletus gave a history of the case, the friend- 
 ship that existed between him and Dalmon, and his 
 desire, if Dalmon could not be pardoned, to be per- 
 mitted to die in his stead. The king questioned 
 Phyletus, so as to find out the workings of the 
 mystic brotherhood, and the mysteries of Mithras. 
 The answers were so interesting and extraordinary 
 that the king was surprised to hear that such an 
 order existed in Persia, a province that had been 
 lately added to his kingdom. Calanthe, the only 
 
330 
 
 daughter of the king, stood near her father when 
 Phyletus made his appeal, and was so pleased with 
 what she had heard, that she requested the king to 
 visit the Province of Persia and investigate the 
 statements that had been made. The kinof con- 
 sented, and preparations were at once made for the 
 journey. The king, with a large escort, arrived in 
 the morning of the very day on which Dalmon w^as 
 to suffer the penalty at sun -down. 
 
 After a short rest, the king summoned Dionysius, 
 Dalmon and Phyletus to appear before him. The 
 governor explained to the king all that transpired 
 on the trial, and that the laws of Persia demanded 
 life for life; and he further stated, that. on the trial 
 it was proven that Hieatus had made the attack on 
 Dalmon; but the law was positive, and Dalmon 
 must die, unless the king decreed otherwise. 
 Phyletus again appealed to the king, and said that 
 he did not wish the king to abrogate the law, nor 
 would he ask a pardon, but that if a life must be 
 given for a life, he should permit him to die in 
 Dalmon's stead. On hearing this, Dalmon (though 
 his wife and children were present) protested that 
 he alone was guilty, and he never would consent to 
 let his friend Phyletus die for him. Phyletus re- 
 minded Dalmon of his family, and that the Mystis 
 would approve of his action, and the bonds of friend- 
 ship required the sacrifice; but to all his entreaties 
 Dalmon refused to listen. Calanthe pled with her 
 father, the king, to pardon Dalmon. She contended 
 that he was the most noble man she ever heard 
 speak, .and that the friendship between Phyletus 
 and DalmoD was wonderful beyond expression, and 
 
331 
 
 that such greatness of courage and fidelity should 
 merit the king's approval. 
 
 Astyages conferred apart with Dionysius. AYhen 
 he returned, he stated that the laws of the Meads 
 and Persians could not be abrogated or annulled, 
 and Dalmon must be cast into the tigers' den, and 
 that he would not permit Phyletus to take his 
 place. The sentence was that Dalmon must be 
 cast into the tigers' den. Calanthe and Phyletus 
 attempted to speak, but the king would not listen to 
 them. The king, with his escort, accompanied the 
 guards with Dalmon to the den. Just as the sun 
 was setting, they lifted Dalmon to cast him into the 
 den, amid the cries of his wife and children. Phy- 
 letus made one more effort to take his place, but 
 was held back by the guards. Dalmon asked to 
 speak, and the king gave him permission, he said, 
 '^Phyletus I leave my wife and children in your 
 care; now, Oking, I die contented." The king gave 
 the signal, and the guards lifted Dalmon and let 
 him down into the den. (The manner in which 
 Dalmon was saved appeared wonderful to those who 
 were not let into the secret. Under the orders of 
 the king, secretly given to Dionysius, he instructed 
 the keepers of the tigers to fasten them up in the 
 second room of the den. Dalmon was let down 
 into the empty room. The keepers were instructed 
 to open the middle door as soon as Dalmon was 
 drawn out. Those who looked into the opening 
 could see the tigers as they walked around. All 
 this was kept a secret from the people by the 
 keepers.) 
 
332 
 
 At length the king said, Calanthe, go to the 
 opening and call Dalmon. The guards removed 
 the cover, and Calanthe called Dalmon ; he ans-wered, 
 O, Calanthe, Agla has preserved my life. The 
 king, on hearing his voice, ordered the guards to 
 let down a rope and lift Dalmon out of the den. 
 The law and the sentence has been complied with, 
 and he is free. When Dalmon was drawn out, the 
 people gave a great shout of joy. They said it 
 was a wonderful deliverance. Calanthe was repre- 
 sented in the cavern, seated in the moon, an emblem 
 of her care over the members of the mystic order 
 of Mithras, during the night of danger and distress. 
 
 Candidate — One who ^eks and aspires to an 
 office, elective or appointive. A petitioner to any 
 Order or Society is a candidate for membership. 
 
 Chief Mentor — ^The title of the Presiding Officer 
 in a Temple of The Knights of Tabor. 
 
 Chief Preceptress — The title of the Presiding 
 Officer in a Tabernacle of the Daughter Priestesses 
 of Tabor. 
 
 Cush — The name of Ham's eldest son. He was 
 the founder of the Kingdom of Ethiopia. The de- 
 scendants of Cush, or Cushites as they were called, 
 were the most ancient civilized nation on earth. 
 Saba Meroe, the capital of Ethiopia, was, according 
 to ancient writers, one of the most beautiful cities 
 in the world. It was the residence of the proud 
 kings and queens of Ethiopia for over two thousand 
 years. In that city was situated the ancient Taber- 
 nacle. The title of Priestess, in the Daughters of 
 Tabor, is derived from that Tabernacle. 
 
333 
 
 The musty pages of ancient history give but an 
 item here and there of the grandeur of this magnifi- 
 cent empire. A great part of its history is so 
 mixed with that of Egypt, that unless the searcher 
 for the truths of history carefully separates the 
 historical facts pertaining to these two noted 
 countries, there will be a tendency to award to 
 Egypt what belongs to Ethiopia. The opening to 
 civilization of Central Africa by Cush is traced 
 back to 2,000 years before Christ. The writings of 
 Herodotus, Diodorus, Siculus and Josephus, and 
 the testimony given in the Bible, and the admirable 
 work of Major Martin R. Delaney, on the * 'Origin 
 of Races and Colors," clearly proves that the Ethi- 
 opians were the first enlightened and civilized 
 people on earth. Major Delaney gave this subject 
 years of careful research and study, and to the 
 unprejudiced mind establishes the truth of Ethi- 
 opia's ancient civilization. The definition of the 
 word Cush, or Kush, is black, or dark brown. 
 
 Cushites — The descendants of Cush. 
 
 Cahri — The mysteries of Cabri originated among 
 the Syrians. It was the name of the Phenician 
 God. The worship of Cabri was fir&t established 
 by the children of Sydyk, and they were taught 
 how to build ships by Cabri. The mysteries were 
 practiced by the Samothracians, Thebians and the 
 Lemnos. The object of the mysteries was to make 
 men just and virtuous. 
 
 Ghus — (See Abassine. ) 
 
 Cyrene — A noted city in Africa. It was one of 
 the cities cotemporary with ancient Saba, and was 
 celebrated for the learning and refinement of its 
 
334 
 
 citizens. The Ethiopic mysteries were taught by 
 the priesthood. They were represented in the 
 ancient Tabernacle. The part performed by the 
 Priestesses of Cyrene was to attend the Altar and 
 keep a perpetual fire burning on it. They did this 
 for hundreds of years. A school of philosophy 
 was sustained. Aristippus and many others of note 
 were the instructors. Josephus speaks of Cyrene 
 as one among the powers in African civilization. 
 
 D. 
 
 Dalmon — The mysteries of Mithras were founded 
 upon the influence of true friendship. The mem- 
 bers were bound together by the mystic rite of 
 initiation, which emblematized the union of soul and 
 body. Death could only part them. The followers 
 of Mithras were always prepared to defend a mem- 
 ber or sacrifice their lives to save him, and to die 
 for him if necessary. Dalmon and Phyletus proved 
 by their courage and fidelity to each other that the 
 cords of Mithrian true friendship could not be 
 broken. (See Calanthe.) It was from this part of 
 the history of the mysteries of Mithras that the 
 legend of Damon and Pythias was written. The 
 name Dalmon signifies true and unalterable friend- 
 ship. 
 
 Deborah — The fourth chapter of Judges (Bible) 
 informs us that Deborah was a prophetess and a 
 judge in Israel. This distinguished woman lived 
 between Ramah and Bethel, on Mount Epliraim, 
 and was a judge and prophetess of the Israelites 
 1,296 years before Christ. This part of the Scrip- 
 tures is a pleasing study. It proves that God 
 
335 
 
 entrusts his work and the accomplishment of great 
 events to the brain and hands of women as well as 
 men, and establishes one of the teachings of the 
 International Order of Twelve, which is that a 
 woman is man's equal. 
 
 E, 
 
 Egypt — This famous country is situated in the 
 northeastern part of Africa, between Nubia and 
 the Mediterranean See. Egypt was settled by 
 Mizraim, the second son of Ham. Owinff to the 
 close proximity to Ethiopia and the close relation- 
 ship of the founders, the Egyptians soon adopted 
 the Ethiopian civilization. For many years these 
 two nationalities were united under one govern- 
 ment. Ham, the father of Gush and Mizraim, 
 lived, after settling in Africa, about three hundred 
 years. He resided for a number of years in Egypt, 
 and was a co-ruler with Mizraim, until his death. 
 Modern writers make the mistake of awarding^ to 
 Egypt the title of the first civilized government on 
 earth. This is the fault of not taking the proper 
 means to explain the two forms of government, and 
 in giving of each the true historical facts. When 
 the truth is told, without prejudice, Ethiopia stands 
 at the head of civilization. It is a proud title, and 
 the descendants of this noble ancient people must 
 not permit this honor to be taken from them ; in 
 fact, it cannot be lost — historical facts must and 
 will stand. The hieroglyphical records on the 
 sculptured stones, found in various parts of Ethi- 
 opia, are evidence of African greatness. The sym- 
 bolized columns of the Temples in Nubia, which have 
 
336 
 
 been covered by the dust of ages, have recently been 
 excavated, and the student of history can read on 
 them the history of a great people. 
 
 Ethiopia — (See Cush, and Egypt.) It would 
 take too much space to give a history of this country 
 in detail. 
 
 Eloliim — This is one of the names of God. It 
 is a sacred and mystic name. The name symbolizes 
 the Holy Trinity, a mysterious union in the God- 
 head. The ancient Jews had a deep reverence for 
 this name of the Deity, and never pronounced it, 
 but substituted the word Adonia, or Father. 
 
 East — In the Saba Meroe, the Priestess of Mem- 
 non is seated in the East, symbolizing the rising 
 of the sun, and the beginning of another day. 
 
 Elton — The candidates in the Ethiopic mysteries 
 had to pass through a purification, divided into three 
 parts. The first, air; the second, fire; the third, 
 water. A subterranean chamber was so arranged 
 that a fierce wind sweept through it. If the candi- 
 date succeeded in passing through the chamber, he 
 was informed that he had been favored by El ion. 
 The chamber of fire was presided over by Eloi. 
 The chamber of water was presided over by Noil. 
 In p.issing these three chambers, the candidate 
 proved his courage and will-power. Elion means 
 mortality; Eloi, immortality; Noil, true happiness. 
 These words have a prominent place in The Key 
 Knights' history. 
 
 F. 
 
 Four — In searching among the mysteries of 
 Mithras, we find the figure four (4) one of the 
 
337 
 
 mystic numbers. God was worshiped under the 
 name of Agla. When thej desired their members 
 to assemble in case of a sudden emergency, the 
 trumpet was sounded distinctly three times four. 
 It made no difference what a member was doing at 
 the time, everything was dropped to obey that call. 
 
 G. 
 
 God — The word God is of strictly Anglo-Saxon 
 origin, and means Good Being, from the attribute 
 of Goodness, Jehovah, a Supreme Being, All-power- 
 ful, Divine. The only one for mankind to worship. 
 The Creator, Eternal and Sovereign Ruler of the 
 Universe. In our investigations of the ancient 
 mysteries, we find that in many of them the pure 
 worship of God is veiled in symbols and metaphors, 
 and yet, when we sift the language, and find its 
 allegorical meaning, it is the highest and most ex- 
 alted worship of the true God. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hyerego — In the ancient Tabernacle of Saba 
 Meroe, there was a Priestess, whose duty it was 
 to offer incense on the burning altar. She was the 
 Oracle, was gifted with knowledge, could solve 
 problems, and foretell future events. She sym- 
 bolically represented the power of faithful prayer. 
 * 'Whatsoever ye ask in faith, believing it sh^ll be 
 given," is the words of our Savior. 
 
 Hesper — The ancient Tabernacle was so situated, 
 that the approach to it was very difficult for those 
 who were strangers. The Priestesses of Hesper were 
 detailed for the special duty of guiding strangers 
 
338 
 
 through the winding and intricate jDassages to the 
 entrance. Their name implies that they were from 
 the western part of Ethiopia. The symbol worn 
 by them consisted of three stars, as a sign that they 
 belonged to the Hesperine Priesthood, and had 
 direct communication with the Garden of Hespe- 
 rides. 
 
 Hesperides — An Ethiopic legend, handed down 
 from the remotest period, speaks of the Garden of 
 Hesperides. It was said to have been situated in 
 Central Africa, and was a most beautiful and 
 brilliant garden — a Paradise to live in. The ancient 
 Ethiopians believed that it was the abode of those 
 who originally taught their forefathers and founders 
 the great lessons of social civilization — morals, 
 literature, religion, and all the sciences. The em- 
 blems and precepts taught by them are of the 
 hio^hest order. The Phenix — Motto : We reorene- 
 rate ourselves. The Ram — Motto: Peace, patience, 
 friendship. The Thunderbolt — Motto : Light from 
 heaven. The Great Serpent, whose body sur- 
 rounded the entire garden — The precepts : Fear not 
 God's works, they are good. The Pyramid — Motto : 
 The Lord has been merciful to us. 
 
 The philosophy of the Hesperides is replete with 
 beautiful legendary instructions. It shows the 
 ideal consummation of social and religious civiliza- 
 tion. The Garden of Hesperides was a symbol rep- 
 resenting ancient Ethiopia in the lead of the civil- 
 ized world. 
 
 I. 
 
 Indian — In some parts of the ritualistic work of 
 the International Order of Twelve, reference is 
 
339 
 
 made to the Indian mysteries. Nearly all the ancient 
 mysteries had their origin in Ethiopia or Egypt. 
 After a thorough search for a derivation of the 
 mysteries of India, we find that they originated in 
 the East. The Gymnosophists were celebrated for 
 their learning. They inculcated a belief in the 
 triad of Gods, under the names of Brama, Vishnu, 
 and Siva, and these were represented as the 
 supreme, eternal, and uncreated God. They 
 taught the immortality of the soul. The mysteries 
 were divided into four defi^rees. The initiation was 
 very severe, and required courage and endurance. 
 The ceremonies were interspersed with prayer, 
 fasting and ablutions. The candidate was required 
 to serve in a preparatory state for several months, 
 by prayer, fasting, and cleansing and purifying by 
 water. The First Degree represented our first 
 parents in Paradise — in happiness. The Second 
 Degree represented them expelled from the garden, 
 and their sufferings. The Third Degree repre- 
 sented the life in the world, with its cares and toils. 
 The candidate was impressed with what he saw and 
 heard, and that a pure life in this world and a firm 
 belief in Brama, Vishnu, and Siva, would insure an 
 eternal life of happiness. The Fourth Degree rep- 
 resented the soul entering Paradise. He was en- 
 trusted with the sacred word, *'Aum," which sig- 
 nifies : created, preserved and saved. 
 
 The object of the Indian mysteries was to teach 
 the unity of God, and the necessity of living a pure 
 life. 
 
340 
 J. 
 
 Jahin — One thousand three hundred years before 
 the advent of Christ, the Lord, the children of 
 Israel were held in bondage by Jabin, King of 
 Canaan. Deborah, a prophetess, being inspired 
 by the Lord God, caused Barak to gather from the 
 tribes of Naphthali and Zebulon ten thousand men 
 on Mount Tabor, to do battle against the large army 
 of Jabin. Deborah said that God had promised 
 them the victory, and Israel would be freed. 
 History tells us that a desperate battle was fought — 
 God fighting for Israel — Jabin' s hosts were con- 
 quered and Israel's bondage was broken. The defi- 
 nition of the word Jabin is : he will cause pain. 
 
 Jewels — The accepted definition of the word 
 Jewel, is personal ornaments of gold, silver and 
 precious stones. In the International Order of 
 Twelve the ofiicial badges worn by the officers are 
 called Jewels. The following is a description of 
 the various official Jewels worn in the different de- 
 partments. 
 
 The Temples have twelve Jewels. Ten-pointed 
 stars, made of silver or white metal ; ribbon, light 
 scarlet, with the words * 'International Order of 
 Twelve" printed thereon, fastened by a bar andpin ; 
 in the center of the star the initial letters of the 
 different officers are placed. The C. M.'s Jewel 
 has green ribbon and yellow metal star. 
 
 The Tabernacle has eighteen Jewels. Five- 
 pointed star, resting on a ring made of silver or 
 white metal, in the center of star the initials of the 
 different officers are placed ; ribbon, sky-blue, with 
 
341 
 
 < 'International Order of Twelve" printed thereon, 
 fastened by a bar and pin. The C. P.'s ribbon is 
 green, and yellow metal star. 
 
 The Palatium has twelve Jewels. Seven-pointed 
 star, made of gold or yellow metal, the star en- 
 closed in a ring. The initials of the various officers 
 are placed in the center of the star; ribbon, green 
 and scarlet, and lettered '*I. O. of 12," fastened 
 by a bar and pin. 
 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles have twenty- 
 seven Jewels. Ten-pointed star, made of gold or 
 yellow metal, enclosed in a ring, ornamented with a 
 wreath; in the center of the star the initial letters 
 of the various officers are placed; green ribbon, on 
 which ''Grand Temple and Tabernacle" is printed, 
 fastened by a bar and pin. 
 
 The International Grand Temple and Tabernacle 
 has thirty-three Jewels. A twelve-pointed star, 
 made of gold or yellow metal, with six long and six 
 short points, enclosed in a ring, ornamented with 
 green, red and white stones. In the center of the 
 star the initial letters of the various officers are 
 placed; green ribbon, on which is printed "Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve," fastened by a bar and 
 pin. 
 
 K. 
 
 King — The word king occurs several times in 
 various parts of the ritualistic work of the Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor. In the primary, ancient 
 sense, the word king means the head or chief of a 
 family or race; the common term means a monarch, 
 sovereign or chief ruler, over a nation or cpuntries, 
 and they usully have hereditary succession. 
 
342 
 
 Knight — The institution of the Knighthood was 
 first conferred by kings and emperors as a mark of 
 honor upon some distinguished soldier or states- 
 man. The ceremonies of the Knighthood were very 
 impressive. Organized Knighthood commenced 
 about the year 302 b. c. by St. Helena, the mother 
 of Constantine the Great. The Order of Knights of 
 the Holy Sepulchre was instituted by her. These 
 Knights were eminent for their courage and fidelity 
 to the Christian religion. There are at this day a 
 large number of organized Knights among the 
 various Secret Orders. 
 
 Kush — (or Gush) — The eldest son of Ham. 
 
 KusMtes — (or Gushites) — The descendants of 
 Kush (or Gush). 
 
 I.. 
 
 Law-Booh — A book containing or treating of the 
 laws. 
 
 Lyhenus — In the mystic work of Ethiopia Ly- 
 benus was a very prominent figure, and was en- 
 trusted with especial duties. The Priestess of 
 Lybia, or we will say the several Priestesses of that 
 country, under the name of Lybenus, were always 
 on duty as guards of the entrance to the ancient 
 Tabernacle, at the mystic door. All who ap- 
 proached must give the Niolotic word and sign. 
 In the Taborian formula Lybenus is symbolized in 
 a true representative manner. 
 
 M. 
 
 Media — This remarkable country was a civilized 
 government nearly one thousand years before 
 Christ. They traced their origin to the ancient 
 
343 
 
 2end Tribes. The Sacred Book of Zendavesta un- 
 folds a system of ceremonial religion which is traced 
 back to the Ethiopic mysteries. The history of the 
 Medes is well worthy of careful study. 
 
 Meroe — The city of Meroe, situated in Central 
 Africa, was built on the banks of the river Nile. 
 It was the most ancient city in the world. Its 
 African name was Saba. The sacerdotal and 
 palatial city of Ethiopia, the residence of the kings 
 and queens. Within its walls was the ancient 
 Tabernacle, which was instituted to preserve the 
 name and worship of the true God. Two thousand 
 years before Christ this city was the seat of learn- 
 ing and refinement. It is said to have been the 
 most beautiful city that was ever built. Strangers 
 and foreigners, who visited this city, call it the 
 Celestial City. During the time that Solomon , King 
 of Israel, was in the height of his glory, this city 
 sent one of its most learned women, Queen Nicaule 
 of Ethiopia, called Queen of Sheba in the Scriptures, 
 to test his wisdom. After a contest of many days, the 
 queen declared that Solomon was the wisest man 
 whom she had ever met, and Solomon said she was 
 the most learned woman in the world. These two 
 distinguished monarchs, who stood at the head of 
 their respective governments, were the wonder and 
 admiration of all the other nations. Meroe, with 
 its marble palaces and impregnable walls, which the 
 large Egyptian army, under the command of that 
 able general, Moses, the Hebrew, after months of 
 battering, could not make an impression upon, this 
 city, which from its strength seemed to be enabled 
 to stand for all time to come, has passed away, 
 
344 
 
 buried under the dust of ages. No vestige now 
 remains of this once ^Dowerful city, and the people 
 of Ethiopia are scattered. The wheel of time which 
 rolled Ethiopia to the bottom of the hill, tliat same 
 wheel — mark wliat I say — will some day roll it to 
 the top of the hill again. God is just. 
 
 N. 
 Nicault — History speaks of several queens of 
 Ethiopia. In this Lexicon we will only refer to two 
 of them. Nicaule was crowned Queen of Ethiopia 
 and Egypt about the year 980 before Christ. 
 These two powerful kingdoms had for a number of 
 years been united under one government. This 
 queen excelled in learning and diplomacy. It was 
 this queen who visited King Solomon when he was 
 in the zenith of his glory, 992 years before Christ. 
 Josephus speaks of this visit, and says f-he was 
 admired for her many accomplishments and learn- 
 ing. Chapter 10, 1st Kings (Bible) tells us that she 
 visited Solomon to test his wisdom by propound- 
 ing very difficult questions. This chapter refers to 
 her as Queen of Sheba. The word Sheba niLans 
 conversion. It is certain that this queen was con- 
 verted to the Jewish faith during her visit to Solo- 
 mon. Some modern writers have endeavored to 
 prove that this queen was not the reigning monarch 
 of Ethiopia and Egypt, by asserting that she 
 was a Sabean, from South Arabia; but Josephus, 
 with full access to the records of Jewish history, 
 could not make a mistake, and he was an unpreju- 
 diced writer. The truth will prevail, and that is 
 that she was an Ethiopian, and the most learned 
 woman of the age in which she lived. 
 
345 
 
 Odin — The founder of the Odonic mysteries was 
 born in the city of On, in Lower Egypt, about 
 the beginning of the Christian era. He traveled 
 among the Asiatic tribes, and assisted by Segge, the 
 Chief of the Asers, initiated them into the myster- 
 ies of Odin. The precepts were peculiar, some 
 of which we here give, as follows: **Let not your 
 right hand know what your left hand doeth," and 
 "a secret is not a secret, when it becomes the prop- 
 erty of those who have no right to it." 
 
 Odo — The sacred Ethiopic name of the Wife of 
 Thunder. When the thunder rolled, the wife shed 
 tears, and the river Nile overflowed its banks, and 
 Egypt was blessed with a plentiful harvest. This 
 mystic legend is a beautiful one. 
 
 Om — This peculiar word, in the Ethiopic lan- 
 guage, signifies the central power. When joined 
 with two other words, it means all-powerful. 
 
 Opliir — (See Seraphis). 
 
 Order — Rank, class, division of men or women; 
 as the Order of Twelve, etc. 
 
 Osiris — (See Rameses). 
 
 P. 
 
 Power — The physical ability to act, strength, 
 endurance, force, energy, activity; the mental or 
 moral faculty of thinking, reasoning and judging; 
 the exercise of any kind of control, influence, com- 
 mand, sway, governing, dominion; there are vari- 
 ous other powders, however, such as in mechanics, 
 in optics, in law, in arithmetic, in Scripture, etc. 
 
u^ 
 
 Palatium — A Latin word, meaning a palace. 
 One of the seven hills of Rome, on which Augus- 
 tus Caesar had his residence, was called a Pala- 
 tium. The Ninth, Tenth and Eleventh Degrees in 
 the International Order of Twelve compose the third 
 department or Royal House of Media. The place 
 of meeting is called the Palatium. 
 
 Palatine Guards — The Guards of the Palace. 
 This is the name of the drill department of the Pa- 
 latium. 
 
 Preceptress — A teacher or instructor. It is the 
 proper title of the Presiding Officer in the Daugh- 
 ter's Tabernacle, a department in the International 
 Order of Twelve. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Queen — The wife of a king, a woman who is 
 the sovereign ruler of a kingdom. Queen Mother 
 is the title of the executive officer in a Tent of Maids 
 and Pages, the fourth department in the Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve. 
 
 R. 
 
 Revista — A noted Princess of the Median empire 
 during the reign of Zendacer, 600 years before 
 Christ. His daughter, Revista, was his principal ad- 
 visor, and her influence was very great throughout 
 the kingdom, so much so, that the king consulted 
 her on all State matters. 
 
 Rameses — To obtain a partial history of ancient 
 Ethiopia, careful search must be made. Upon in- 
 vestigation it is found that Ethiopia and Egypt, for 
 the first four hundred years of their existence, were 
 so closely and intimately connected that they seem- 
 
347 
 
 ingly had but one government, and yet the careful 
 searcher can trace the line that divides the two 
 kingdoms. The founding and settling of Ethiopia 
 and Egypt is clearly written. Ham, a son of Noah, 
 had four sons; Cush, Mizraim, Phut and Canaan. 
 Biblical history is plain in its details of wdiat parts 
 of the world were settled by the families of these 
 sons. Noah lived three hundred and fifty years 
 after the flood. Since then the number of people 
 increased considerably, and at the building of the 
 Tower of Babel, when their languages were con- 
 founded, the Lord scattered them abroad to people 
 all the earth. The families of the different sons of 
 Noah must have been very large. The various 
 boundaries of their individual countries were fixed. 
 Canaan, the youngest son, settled in the land of 
 Judea, then known as the land of Canaan. Nimrod 
 remained in the land of Shinar, and became the 
 founder of the two mighty empires of antiquity, 
 Assyria and Babylon. Ham and his three sons, 
 Cush, Mizraim and Phut, took up their line of 
 march for Africa. They remained for a short time 
 in the land of Media. They finally crossed the 
 Isthmus of Suez and from thence crossed over into 
 Africa. Ham, Mizraim and Phut settled on the 
 Delta (Egypt), and Cush with his families pushed 
 into the interior of Africa. That part of the country 
 from the borders of Egypt to the interior of Af- 
 rica was called Ethiopia. Cush laid the foundation 
 of Saba, the capital city, on the banks of the river 
 Nile. This beautiful city was called Meroe by the 
 Greeks. Under the wise administration of Cush, 
 Ethiopia soon became a flourishing kingdom, with all 
 
348 
 
 the attributes of a polished, enlighted people. 
 Egypt, from the close relationship of the people, soon 
 adopted the Ethiopian manners and customs. These 
 two countries were for years conjointly under the 
 governorship of Ham, Cush and Mizraim. Ham, 
 during his lifetime, was the chief ruler, bearing the 
 title of Rameses I; after his death Cush was the 
 chief, bearing the title of Rameses II; after his 
 death Mizraim governed, under the name of Ram- 
 eses III. Ham died at an advanced age, being much 
 loved by the people. He was deified under the 
 name of Jupiter Amnion, and was worshiped as a 
 God. He is represented as having the head of a 
 ram, with a man's body. 
 
 Cush, when he died, was deified under the name 
 of Sesostris. He w^as represented as having a dog's 
 face, with a human body. 
 
 Mizraim, when he passed from earth, was deified 
 under the name of Osiris. He was represented as 
 having a bull's face, with a man's body. 
 
 A work, **The Antiquities of Africa," which was 
 published in London, England, in 1703, informs 
 us that ancient Ethiopia was divided into forty-five 
 kingdoms. Diodorus, Siculus, and other ancient 
 historians tell us that the laws, manners and cus- 
 toms of Egypt were nearly the same as those of 
 Ethiopia. 
 
 There is no doubt but that Cush and Mizraim, 
 after the death of Ham, governed conjointly for 
 the benefit of both countries. The pyramids were 
 undoubtedly built by them. The principal ones 
 are the monuments of Rameses I, Rameses IT, and 
 Rameses III. The catacombs and the numerous 
 
349 
 
 temples of Ethiopia and Egypt are evidence of the 
 kindred stA'les in architecture. Their statuary and 
 heiroglyphic characlers were the same. The Ethi- 
 opians invented the first alphabet. Job Ludolphus, 
 the learned Israelite in Ethiopic literature, gives the 
 form of 16 letters which were used by the royal 
 family and the priesthood. I might proceed and 
 speak of the twenty-five dynasties under the Ram- 
 eses, and the splendor of Ethiopic civilization for 
 ages, but must desist for want of space. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sesotheni — The Priestess in the ancient Taber- 
 nacle of Memnon — sometimes called the Temple of 
 the Sun. When the sun arose and cast its rays on the 
 roof of this beautiful Temple of Memnon, sweet 
 music continued to play until the sun was at its 
 meridian. Sesotheni was seated at the east side 
 of the ancient Tabernacle. Her duty was to record 
 the beginning of another day, and announce the 
 coming of the Day-God. 
 
 Sesostris — (See Rameses) — Sesostris was the first 
 to settle in Egypt with his family. 
 
 Seraphis — An ancient Priestess, who represented 
 the value of gold and silver. Her place in the 
 ancient Tabernacle was at the west side. It was 
 her duty to teach the votaries of the Saba Meroe 
 the value of time, and that a minute, hour or day 
 lost was irretrievable. 
 
 Sisera — The name of the general who com- 
 manded the Canaanite Army, which was defeated 
 by Barak with his ten thousand in the memorable 
 
350 
 
 battle on and around Mount Tabor, one thousand 
 three hundred years before Christ. 
 
 Shamgar — The name of one of Israel's mightiest 
 men. Shamgar was a son of Anath. 1336 years 
 before Christ the Israelites and Philistines were 
 almost continuously at war. In one of the battles 
 Shamgar slew six hundred Philistines with an 
 ox-goad. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tabernacle — The definition of Tabernacle is a 
 flimsily built temporary habitation, a tent or port- 
 able structure, moveable at the will of those who 
 owned it. A sacred Tabernacle was a moveable 
 tent-like house, for the worship of God. The most 
 ancient Tabernacle known was erected within the 
 walls of the ancient city of Saba, in Ethiopia. It 
 represented the temporary existence of human 
 beings on this earth. The Tabernacle erected by 
 Moses in the Wilderness of Sin, 1491 years before 
 Christ, for the worship of God, while the children 
 of Israel were journeying from the Red Sea to the 
 Promised Land, was the most costly one ever built. 
 In our Order, the place of meeting for the Daugh- 
 ters of Tabor is called a Tabernacle. 
 
 Temple — An edifice erected to worshi{) the Deity. 
 Temples, for the worship of idols, were numerous 
 in ancient times, even now there are numerous 
 Temples erected for the worship of idols. The 
 Jewish Temple, built by Solomon, and dedicated 
 to the worship of the true God, is acknowledged to 
 have been the most artistic structure ever built by 
 man. Any Christian church, or any place used for 
 
351 
 
 divine worship, is termed God's Temple. The place 
 where the Knights of Tabor meet is called a Temple. 
 
 Tabor — A lute, or a kind of drum-guitar. 
 Mount Tabor, a conical mountain in Galilee, is 
 about eighteen hundred French feet high, on the 
 top of which is a beautiful plateau, about one mile 
 in circumference. It is a historical mountain, and 
 a land-mark where events transpired which made it 
 memorable. About the year 1396 b. c. Deborah, a 
 judge and prophetess of Israel, summoned Barak 
 to gather ten thousand men of the tribes of Zebulon 
 and Naphthali on the top of Mount Tabor and to 
 give battle to the mighty hosts of Sisera. The 
 scene in that battle was grand — God fought for 
 Israel that day. The stars of Heaven (angels) 
 fought against Jabin's army. The lightning and 
 thunder of Jehovah's power was hurled against the 
 Canaanites, and Israel was victorious. 
 
 The second scene was under the new dispensa- 
 tion — the transfiguration of Jesus, the Son of God — 
 this glorious sight was witnessed by three Apostles : 
 Peter, James and John. 
 
 Tetra — This word is from the Greek, and means 
 four. Among the ancients the figure four (4) had 
 a mystic significance. The inexpressible name of 
 the Deity was expressed in four letters, the most 
 prominent of the mysteries which originated in 
 Ethiopia and Egypt and which were transmitted to 
 the surrounding nations. We find that the figure 
 four (4) represented the Great Ruler of Mankind. 
 A. G. L. A. and E. L. J. E. were the cabalistic letters 
 representing the ineffable name of God. The figure 
 four (4) represents the four necessary elements to 
 
352 
 
 perpetuate the existence of mankind, namely : earth, 
 fire, air and water. It represents the four principal 
 departments in the International Order of Twelve, 
 viz: Temples, Tabernacles, Palatiums and Tents; 
 also the four Presiding Officers : Chief Mentor, 
 Chief Preceptress, Presiding Prince, and Queen 
 Mother. 
 
 Three — Among the ancient mysteries the figure 
 three (3) occupied a prominent place. It is a per- 
 fect number. It designates the triune God — the 
 Father, the Son, and the Holy Gliost — the Holy 
 Trinity. Among the pagan nations, the figure 
 three was prominent as a mystic number. Cerberus, 
 the Dog-God, had three heads. The scepter of 
 Neptune was a trident. A triple cord was used in 
 the Ethiopic mysteries. Three colors : red, black 
 and white, were worn as a charm to protect the 
 wearer in time of danger. The three-fold cord was 
 not easely broken. Three times- three are strong 
 numbers in the ritualistic work of the Order of 
 Twelve. The three principal colors of the Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve are : red, black and green. 
 Red is emblematic of the blood of Jesus, which 
 saves all who come unto Him in faith. Bhick is an 
 emblem of death, and reminds us of the fact that 
 all mortals must pass through the narrow passage- 
 way before becoming immortal. Green is emblem- 
 atic of eternity, and admonishes us that if we 
 would enjoy eternal rest and happiness we must 
 live the life of true Christians on earth. Knights 
 and Daughters of Tabor, when you wear the rega- 
 lia, remember its* instructions. 
 
353 
 
 Tent — A movable or portable lodge. It was the 
 first covering or shelter which our ancestors used. 
 The fourth department in the International Order 
 of Twelve is called the Children's Tent. The 
 members of it are known as Maids and Pages. But 
 three adults are permitted to be members. Tents 
 were organized to gather in the children, to give 
 them moral instruction, to teach them the difference 
 between right and wrong, to guide their young 
 minds in the ways that will ultimately make them 
 good men and women, and to discipline them in 
 the obeying of the laws and rules. As they grow 
 up, the impression of right and justice will be im- 
 pressed upon them, and they will be moral and 
 good citizens and faithful members of the Order. 
 The Tent is governed by the Constitution and By- 
 Laws; it has no rituals nor degrees. Provision is 
 made, when the boys become 18 years of age and 
 the girls 16 years of age, so that they can become 
 members of either a Temple or a Tabernacle. If 
 they have been properly instructed in the Tent, 
 they will understand the nature of a sacred obliga- 
 tion. The Queen Mother must carefully train the 
 girls in ladylike manners and deportment, and the 
 boys in good manners and manliness. The Father 
 of Tents must teach the Taborian Cadets the march 
 and drill. It is not necessary that the girls shall be 
 drilled in public. Teach them how to be modest, 
 virtuous, and retiring. The Tent is the Order's 
 school-house. 
 
 Twelve — Three times four, or four times three, 
 a symbol representing twelve units, as 12 or xii. 
 ^12 — Dickson's New Manual.) 
 
354 
 
 Twelve is a perfect number. A study of the twelve 
 Apostles in the Holy Scriptures is pleasing and in- 
 structive to the biblical student. In many of the 
 ancient mysteries the figure twelve (12) had a 
 prominent part. In the mystic ancient Tabernacle 
 of Saba Meroe there were twelve divisions of 
 officers and members — the most notable were the 
 Priestesses of Twelve. In the Key Knights of 
 Tabor the figure twelve (12) represents a perfect 
 Temple of the Uniform Rank. There must be 
 twelve officers present to constitute a Taborian 
 Temple. There must be twelve officers to all pei^ 
 feet Palatiums, of the Eoyal House of Media. The 
 Past Arcanum must have twelve officers. The 
 twelve requisites demanded of every Knight and 
 Daughter of Tabor, if they are true and worthy, 
 are: 1st, Justice; 2d, Temperance; 3d, Prudence; 
 4th, Constancy; 5th, Morality; 6th, Industry ; 7th, 
 Benevolence; 8th, Love; 9th, Truth; 10th, Perse- 
 verance; 11th Courage; 12th, Mercy. Knights and 
 Daughters are requested to define these twelve 
 requisites, and make proper application in their 
 lectures. 
 
 U. 
 
 Unite — To combine, to join together, to form a 
 whole, to become one, cemented, consolidated, act- 
 ing in concert, a united compact body. The Inter- 
 national Order of Twelve of Knights and Dauo^hters 
 of Tabor is a unit, bound together by the twelve 
 secret degrees. 
 
 Unity — Means oneness, indivisibility, uniformity, 
 a circle. The obligations of the Knights and 
 
355 
 
 Daughters of Tabor bind together the members in 
 one body. The entire circle is a unity. 
 
 Union — The act of uniting, combining, joining, 
 consolidating an agreement on the part of persons 
 to form a unit, under the general laws and rules. 
 The International Order of Twelve forms a union 
 of Grand Temples and Tabernacles, by its General 
 Laws. 
 
 Uniform — The dress regalia of a Knight of 
 Tabor. It is designated by the number of Degrees 
 he has received, if he has received the full four, he 
 is classed as a Uniform Rank Knight of Tabor. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vote — To signify will or preference either by 
 ballot, signs or viva voce. It is the duty of every 
 member of the Order to vote, just as conscience 
 dictates, and for the protection of the good name 
 of the Order. When a vote decides a question or 
 the business under consideration, the minority must 
 rest satisfied. There are three forms of voting in 
 the International Order of Twelve: 1st, the secret 
 ballot, in the degrees; 2d, the written ballots, 
 on electing officers ; 3d, the vote by signs. The 
 taking of a vote in public can be expressed either 
 standing or by yeas or nays. 
 
 Votaries — Those who are devoted, or consecrated 
 by a vow or promise. The Priestesses of Saba 
 Meroe were votaries of the ancient Tabernacle, and 
 devoted to its service and worship. 
 
 W. 
 
 West — The ancient Tabernacle of Saba Meroe, 
 faced north and south. When the Fourth Degree is 
 
356 
 
 opened for work or business, the official position 
 of the four prominent officers is as folh)ws : Thar- 
 bis, the High Priestess, is seated in the South ; 
 Amisis, the Vice-Priestess, is seated in the North ; 
 Sesotheni, the Priestess of Memnon, is seated in 
 the East; Seraphis, the Priestess of Ophir, is 
 seated in the West. When a Temple of the Knights 
 of Tabor is opened in any of the degrees, the C. 
 M. is seated in the South; the V.-M. in the Narth; 
 the C. S. in the East, and the C. T. in the West. 
 
 Xanthian — When ancient Ethiopia was in its 
 height of power and culture, a sect of Ethiopians 
 formed a settlement east of Central Africa, and 
 built a city called Xanthus. They were a peaceful 
 people, and excelled in sculpture. The Xanthians 
 were noted for their extreme temperate habits. 
 After the downfall of Ethiopia, it is supposed that 
 a remnant emigrated into Asia, and settled in Italy, 
 and were known as Xerophagists or dry livers. 
 They worshiped God under the name of Jupiter 
 Amnion. During their residence in Xanthus they 
 were represented in the ancient Tabernacle of Saba 
 Meroe by the Mcroes. 
 
 Y. 
 
 Yaruhas — The Ethiopic definitions of the sym- 
 bols, mottoes and precepts, found in the Garden 
 of Hesperides. The Yaruban language is supposed 
 to be the ancient Ethiopic, and is spoken to this 
 day by the tribes south of the Desert of Sahara. 
 
357 
 
 z. 
 
 Zendavesta — Nearly one thousand years before 
 Christ the Medes were a civilized people. They 
 drew their origin from the ancient Zend races. 
 These people possessed a mystic religion, which they 
 learned from the Cushites. The sacred book, or 
 Zendavesta, unfolded a mysterious system of cere- 
 monial religion, which is traced back to the myste- 
 ries of Ethiopia. The members of the Royal 
 House of Media should refer to the history of 
 Media for further instructions. 
 
Flax. 
 
 Girdle. 
 
 Woul. 
 
 .// 
 
 TABERNACLE FURNITURE. 
 (For Other Tabernacle Furniture, see page 167.) 
 
 358 
 
TEMPLE FURNITURE. 
 (For Other Temple Furniture, see page 168.) 
 
 359 
 
TEMPLE FURNITURE. 
 (For Other Temple Furniture, see pages 168 and 359.) 
 
PALATIUM BADGE. 
 
 361 
 
GENeRKL- INDEX. 
 
 :o: 
 
 Page. 
 
 Introdftction 5, 6 
 
 Biographical Sketch of the Founder 7-13 
 
 Extract from I. C. G. M.'s Message 14-16 
 
 Secrecy of the Knights of Liberty 16, 17 
 
 Mary Elizabeth Dickson 10-24 
 
 The Manual Law 25, 26 
 
 International Constitution 27-54 
 
 Perpetuation 33 
 
 Duties of International Grand Officers 34-39 
 
 International Deputies 39-41 
 
 Duties of International Deputy Grand Mentor 39 
 
 Duties of International Deputy Grand Preceptress .... 41 
 
 International Rules of Business 47, 48 
 
 Form of International Grand Temple and Tabernacle. 49 
 
 Powers and Prerogatives of the I. C. G. M 50, 51 
 
 Impeachment 52, 53 
 
 Amendments 53,54 
 
 Continuation of General Laws 56-67 
 
 Grand Temples and Tabernacles 58, 62 
 
 Annual Sermons 62 
 
 Dedicating Halls 63 
 
 Business of International Deputies 63, 64 
 
 International Districts 64 
 
 Suspensions and Expulsions 64, 65 
 
 Honorary Members 66 
 
 Unity of the International Order 66, 67 
 
 The Organization's Birthday 68 
 
 Installing Ceremony of International Grand Officers 69-81 
 
 Form of a Grand Temple and Tabernacle 83 
 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle Officers 85, 86 
 
 Duties of Grand Temple and Tabernacle Officers 87-95 
 
 Trustees of Grand Temple and Tabernacle 96, 97 
 
 Bonds 97 
 
 Widows and Orphans 98,99 
 
 Power, Strength and Perpetuity 100 
 
 Amendments to General Laws 101 
 
 The Penalty 101,102 
 
 362 
 
363 
 
 Page. 
 Installing Ceremony of Grand Temple a' d Tabernacle 
 
 Officers 104-1 18 
 
 Officers of a Temple 121 
 
 Installing Ceremony of Temple Officers 124-138 
 
 Burial Ceremony of the Temple 139-152 
 
 Installing Ceremony of Tabernacle Officers 156-166 
 
 Funeral Ceremony of the Tabernacle 169-179 
 
 The Palatium 181-184 
 
 Officers of the Palatium 184 
 
 Installing Ceremony of the Palatium Officers 186-197 
 
 Burial Ceremony of Palatine Guards 198-209 
 
 Tents of Maids and Pages 212-218 
 
 Instructions 213, 214 
 
 Eegalia of Maids 215 
 
 Tent Banner 216 
 
 Regalia of Queen Mother 216 
 
 Installing Tent Officers 216, 217 
 
 Tent Treasurer 218 
 
 Form of a Tent 219 
 
 Officers of a Tent 222 
 
 General Tent Regulations 222, 223 
 
 Funeral Ceremony of the Tent •. 224-232 
 
 Laying Corner-Stone 233-242 
 
 Dedicating Ceremony 245-256 
 
 Uniform Rank Knights' and Palatine Guards' Drill. . -257-270 
 
 Taborian Cadets' Drill 271-274 
 
 General Rules of Order 275-281 
 
 Grand Honors 282, 283 
 
 Rules of Business 284, 285 
 
 Form of Reports for Grand Temple and Tabernacle 286, 287 
 
 Reports of International Districts 288 
 
 Synopsis of Official Forms 289-296 
 
 Form of Petition— Temple 290 
 
 Form of Petition— Tabernacle 290 
 
 Form of Petition— Palatium 290 
 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle Transfer 291 
 
 Form of Temple Transfer 291 
 
 Form of Palatium Transfer 292 
 
 Form of Tabernacle Transfer 292 
 
 TentTransfer 293 
 
 Traveling Certificate— Temple 293 
 
 Traveling Certificate — Tabernacle 294 
 
 Form of Quarterly Report 295, 296 
 
 Tent's Quarterly Report 296 
 
364 
 
 Paos. 
 Quarterly Pass. 297 
 
 Regular Session 297 
 
 The Motto of the Order , 298 
 
 The Work and Business of Members 298 
 
 Rights of Chief Mentor .' 299 
 
 Rights of High Priestess (C. Ps.) 299 
 
 Rights of Members 299 
 
 Rights of Queen Mothers 300 
 
 Rights of Presiding Princes 300 
 
 A Recommendation 301 
 
 The Degrees 301 
 
 International Districts 301 
 
 Duties of District Mentor 302 
 
 Duties of District Preceptress 302 
 
 International District Grand Dues 303 
 
 International District Session 303 
 
 Regalia of a Uniform Rank Knight 303, 304 
 
 Saba Meroe Regalia 304-30G 
 
 Mourning Badge 306 
 
 Form of Tabernacfe House 307 
 
 Form of Temple House 307 
 
 Temple Furniture 303 
 
 Tabernacle Furniture 30S 
 
 Form of Altar 30S 
 
 Govern ing Departments 30 > 
 
 Sickness 308 
 
 District Grand Mentor appointed under the authority of 
 
 the Grand Temple and Tabernacle 309 
 
 Supplies for New Organizations 310 
 
 Incorporation 310 
 
 Real Estate 311 
 
 Palatium Regalia— Palatine Guards 312-314 
 
 Taborian Lexicon 316-357 
 
 Banners of the Order 325 
 
 Badges of the Order 326 
 
 Officers' Jewels of the Ord .r 340, 341 
 
 Tents and their Use and Bus: iness 353 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 Page. 
 Rev. Moses Dickson, Founder of the Order of Twelve 1 
 
 Mrs. Mary Elizabeth Dickson — Wife of Rev. Moses Dick- 
 son 18 
 
 International Grand Officers' Jewels 55 
 
 Badge of a Knight of Tabor 82 
 
 Grand Temple and Tabernacle Officers' Jewels 84 
 
 Knights' Fancy Badge 103 
 
 Knights of Tabor Pins and Emblems 119 
 
 Temple House 120 
 
 Temple Officers' Jewels 122 
 
 Taborian Altar 123 
 
 Tabernacle House 153 
 
 Tabernacle Officers' Jewels 154 
 
 Daughters' Pins and Emblems 155 
 
 Tabernacle Furniture — (continued on page 358) 167 
 
 Temple Furniture — (continued on pages 359, 360) 168 
 
 Uniform Rank Helmet — Palatine Guards' Chapeau 180 
 
 Uniform Rank Buttons 180 
 
 Palatium Officers' Jewels 185 
 
 Taborian Cadet Javelins 210 
 
 Caps of Uniform Rank Knights, Palatine Guards and 
 
 Taborian Cadets 211 
 
 Tent Badge 220 
 
 Tent House 221 
 
 Mural Crown 243 
 
 Saba Meroe Coronets and Belt Clasp 243 
 
 Badge of Daughter Priestesses 244 
 
 Inspection Diagram 258 
 
 Diagram Ko. 2 259 
 
 Diagram No. 3 260 
 
 Regalia Badges 315 
 
 Tabernacle Furniture^-(continued) — see page 167 358 
 
 Temple Furniture — (continued) — see page 168 359, 360 
 
 Palatium Badge 361 
 
 Palatine Guard, Without Baldrick 366 
 
 365 
 
PALATINE GUARD, WITHOUT BALDRICK. 
 
 86$ 
 
RETURN TO: CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 198 Main Stacks 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 Home Use 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS. 
 
 Renewals and Recharges may be made 4 days prior to the due 
 date. Books may be renewed by calling 642-3405. 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW. 
 
 SENT ON ILL 
 
 
 
 AUG 7 2007 
 
 
 
 U.C. BERKELEY 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FORM NO. DD6 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. BERKELEY 
 50 M 3-07 Berkeley, California 94720-6000 
 
€%K'